Palm Cell Phone 755P User Manual
User Guide  
Your Palm® Treo™ 755P Smartphone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
What’s in the box? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8  
What do I need to get started? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8  
Where to learn more . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9  
Chapter 1: Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11  
Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
Installing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15  
Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16  
Maximizing battery life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18  
Making your first call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
Setting up your computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
Synchronizing information—the basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27  
Chapter 2: Moving around on your smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29  
Moving around the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31  
Using the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36  
Opening applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39  
Chapter 3: Your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
Turning your smartphone on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43  
Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45  
Receiving calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49  
Using voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50  
What can I do when I’m on a call? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52  
Viewing minutes usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
Defining favorite buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download. C O N T E N T S  
iii  
Using a phone headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Customizing phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
What are all those icons? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Chapter 4: Your email and other messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Which application should I use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
The Wireless Sync application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
The VersaMail® application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Chapter 5: Your connections to the web and wireless devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
BroadbandAccess Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
Connections with Bluetooth® devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
Chapter 6: Your photos, videos, and music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Camera and Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
Pics & Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
145  
Pocket Tunes™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Chapter 7: Your personal information organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151  
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165  
Chapter 8: Your memos and documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169  
Documents To Go® Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Voice Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
C O N T E N T S Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iv  
Chapter 9: Your application and info management tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177  
Using Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179  
Viewing and using the alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179  
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180  
Installing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181  
Removing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184  
Viewing application info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185  
Sending information with Bluetooth® wireless technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186  
Beaming information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188  
Synchronizing information—advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191  
Using expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198  
Chapter 10: Your personal settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205  
System sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207  
Display and appearance settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208  
Applications settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210  
Locking your smartphone and info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213  
System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220  
Connection settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222  
Chapter 11: Common questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223  
Upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225  
Desktop software installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227  
Resetting your smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228  
Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230  
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231  
Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232  
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240  
Hands-free devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243  
Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download. C O N T E N T S  
v
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244  
Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245  
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248  
Making room on your Treo™ smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249  
Third-party applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250  
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251  
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253  
Important safety and legal information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257  
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265  
C O N T E N T S Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vi  
Welcome  
DID YOU KNOW? The Verizon Wireless  
business-to-business sales channel offers a  
Treo 755P smartphone without a camera. If  
you purchased your smartphone from this  
channel, check the package to see if your  
smartphone includes a camera.  
Congratulations on the purchase of your  
Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone! In one  
compact and indispensable device, you  
now have all of the following:  
•
•
•
Text and multimedia messaging  
A media player  
•
•
•
An advanced mobile smartphone  
Mobile email (corporate and personal)  
Productivity software  
High-speed Internet connection and  
data transfer with NationalAccess and  
BroadbandAccess support  
This guide helps you set up your Treo  
smartphone and learn to use it.  
®
•
Palm OS organizer applications  
NOTE Phone and text messaging services  
require a service contract with Verizon  
Wireless. Web, email, and multimedia  
messaging services require a service  
contract and high-speed data service from  
Verizon Wireless. Data speeds vary based  
on network availability and capacity.  
KEY TERM Organizer applications: The  
Calendar, Contacts, Tasks, and Memos  
applications are collectively referred to as  
organizer or PIM (personal information  
manager) applications.  
•
•
Expansion capability (mini-SD)  
A 1.3-megapixel digital camera (camera  
version only)  
W E L C O M E  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
What’s in the box?  
What do I need to  
get started?  
You should have received all the following  
items in the Treo smartphone box:  
As you work through the instructions in this  
guide, you’ll need all the items that came in  
the Treo 755P smartphone box (see What’s  
in the box? ), as well as the following:  
Hardware  
•
•
•
•
•
Treo smartphone  
Rechargeable battery  
AC charger  
•
An activated account with Verizon  
Wireless  
USB sync cable  
Stereo headset  
•
A location with wireless coverage for  
your smartphone  
•
•
An electrical outlet  
Documentation and software  
The computer with which you want to  
synchronize your personal information  
•
•
•
Read This First setup poster  
Quick Reference  
•
The Palm Software Installation CD  
included in the box  
Palm Software Installation CD, which  
includes the following:  
• Palm® Desktop software  
• Links to bonus software for your  
smartphone  
• User Guide (this guide)  
Palm warranty  
•
•
Software license agreement  
W E L C O M E  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
tips are available by selecting a Tips  
in the upper-right corner of a dialog box.  
icon  
Where to learn more  
Online support from Palm: For up-to-date  
downloads, troubleshooting, and support  
information, go to  
For a quick introduction  
Quick Tour: Introduces you to many of your  
smartphone’s features. You can open it  
www.palm.com/treo755pverizon-support.  
any time. Press Applications  
select Quick Tour  
, and then  
.
If you need more information  
Windows Vista™ users: For information on  
using your smartphone and desktop software  
with Windows Vista, visit www.palm.com/  
windowsvista.  
Interactive User Guide: Walks you through  
how to move around on your smartphone, set  
up features (such as voicemail and email), and  
perform common tasks. To view this guide,  
go to www.verizonwireless.com/multimedia/  
mim/palm treo755p.  
®
Books: Many books on Palm OS devices are  
available in local or online book retailers (look  
in the computers section), or visit  
www.palm.com/mypalm/755pverizon.  
While using your Treo™ smartphone  
On-device User Guide: A specially formatted  
version of this guide, available right on your  
smartphone. To open the on-device guide,  
Online forums: Consult online Treo device  
user discussion groups to swap information  
and learn about topics you may find nowhere  
else. For details, visit www.palm.com/  
mypalm/755pverizon.  
press Applications  
, select My Treo  
, select the Support tab, and then select  
User Guide  
.
Customer service from Verizon Wireless: For  
questions about your mobile account or  
features, contact Verizon Wireless technical  
support at 800-922-0204 or Verizon Wireless  
customer service and billing at 800-256-4646.  
Tips: Many of the built-in applications include  
tips for getting the most out of your  
smartphone. Some tips are available from a  
menu: open an application, press Menu  
,
select Options, and then select Tips. Other  
W E L C O M E  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                           
W E L C O M E  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER  
1
Setting up  
You’re about to discover the many things about your  
Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone that will help you better  
manage your life and have fun, too.  
As you become more familiar with your smartphone, you’ll  
want to personalize the settings and add applications to make it  
uniquely yours. But first, take these few easy steps to set up.  
Benefits  
•
Know where your smartphone  
controls are located  
•
Establish a link between your  
smartphone and your computer  
•
Start using your smartphone right  
away  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In this chapter  
Palm® Treo™ 755p smartphone overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Installing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Charging the battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Maximizing battery life. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Making your first call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Setting up your computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Synchronizing information—the basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S E T T I N G U P  
1
Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone overview  
Front view  
Indicator light (phone  
and charge indicator)  
Earpiece  
5-way navigator and  
Center button  
Power/End  
Applications  
Menu  
Volume button  
Side button  
Send  
Wireless Sync  
Calendar  
Phone  
Option  
TIP Protect your screen. Be careful to store  
your smartphone away from items that might  
scratch or crush the screen. Visit  
www.palm.com/mypalm/755pverizon to find  
carrying cases and other useful accessories.  
DID YOU KNOW? The indicator light is visible  
only when the light is on.  
DID YOU KNOW? When your smartphone screen  
is on, you can press and hold the Side button  
to open an application of your choice; see  
Reassigning buttons for details.  
®
T R E O ™ 7 5 5 P  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comP. AAlLlMManuals SearchSAMndA RDToPwHnOloNadE.O V E R V I E W  
13  
                                         
S E T T I N G U P  
1
Back view  
Self-portrait  
Speaker  
Camera lens  
(camera  
version only)  
mirror (camera  
version only)  
Stylus  
Battery door release  
Infrared  
(IR) port  
Mini-expansion  
card slot  
Headset jack  
Multi-connector  
Microphone  
IMPORTANT The Treo smartphone  
speaker includes a large magnet, so be  
sure to keep your smartphone away from  
credit cards or other items that could be  
demagnetized.  
™
P A L M ®  
7 5 5 P S M A R T P H O N E O V E R V I E W  
T R EDOownload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
                         
S E T T I N G U P  
1
Top view  
Installing the battery  
Sound On  
Sound Off  
1
Press the battery door release, and  
slide the battery door downward to  
remove it from your smartphone.  
Ringer switch  
DID YOU KNOW? The Ringer switch silences all  
sounds, including music, at once; you don’t  
need to hunt for “off” or “mute” settings in  
individual applications.  
Battery door  
release  
2
3
Align the metal contacts on the battery  
with the contacts inside the battery  
compartment.  
Insert the battery into the compartment  
at a 45-degree angle, and then press it  
into place.  
I N S T A L L I N G T H E B A T T E R Y  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
S E T T I N G U P  
1
Battery  
TIP If your smartphone does not turn on, you  
need to connect it to the AC charger. If it still  
does not turn on after you connect the AC  
charger, then do a soft reset. See Performing  
a soft reset.  
contacts  
Smartphone  
contacts  
Charging the battery  
The battery comes with a sufficient charge  
to complete the setup process and activate  
your phone. After activation, we  
recommend charging your smartphone for  
3.5 hours (or until the indicator light is solid  
green) to give it a full charge. See  
Maximizing battery life for tips on  
maximizing the life of your smartphone’s  
battery.  
4
5
Slide the battery door onto the back of  
the smartphone until it clicks into place.  
When the language selection screen  
appears, select the language you want  
to use.  
IMPORTANT You must select the same  
language on your smartphone and desktop  
software.  
TIP To avoid draining the battery, charge your  
smartphone every day, especially if you use  
your phone often.  
6
Follow the onscreen instructions to set  
up your smartphone.  
DID YOU KNOW? If your battery ever becomes  
fully drained, your info is still stored safely on  
your smartphone until you recharge the  
battery or connect your smartphone to a  
power source.  
T H E  
C H A R G I N G DownBloAaTdTfrEoRmY Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16  
                   
S E T T I N G U P  
1
1
2
Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.  
3
To confirm that your smartphone is  
charging, check the indicator light on  
your smartphone.  
Connect the charger cable to the  
bottom of the smartphone. Make sure  
the arrow on the connector is facing up,  
toward the screen.  
• Solid red indicates that your  
smartphone is charging.  
• Solid green indicates that your  
smartphone is fully charged.  
Indicator light  
TIP If the battery is fully drained, it may take a  
few moments for the indicator light to turn on  
when you begin charging.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can also charge your  
smartphone by connecting it to your computer  
with the sync cable. You can do this with or  
without using the charger cable (see  
Connecting your Treo smartphone to your  
computer).  
TIP If the indicator light doesn’t turn on when  
you connect your smartphone to the AC  
charger, double-check the cable connection  
and the electrical outlet to which it is  
connected.  
Keep in mind that it takes longer to charge the  
battery using the sync cable, and if your laptop  
isn’t plugged into a power source, it can drain  
the laptop’s battery.  
C H A R G I N G T H E B A T T E R Y  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
S E T T I N G U P  
1
When your smartphone is on (see Turning  
your phone on and off), the onscreen  
battery icon displays the charging status:  
Battery icon  
A red lightning bolt indicates that  
the battery is connected to a wall  
outlet and is charging.  
A green lightning bolt indicates  
that the battery is connected to a  
wall outlet and is fully charged.  
A partial battery without a  
Maximizing battery  
lightning bolt indicates that the  
battery is not connected to a wall  
outlet and it has some power.  
life  
An almost empty battery that is  
red at the bottom indicates that  
you need to charge the battery  
immediately.  
Battery life depends on how you use your  
smartphone. You can maximize the life of  
your battery by following a few easy  
guidelines:  
DID YOU KNOW? You can buy an extra battery as  
a spare for long airplane trips or periods of  
heavy use. To purchase batteries that are  
compatible with your smartphone, go to  
www.palm.com/mypalm/755pverizon.  
TIP To see exactly how much power is left in  
your battery, tap the onscreen battery icon.  
L I F E  
M A X I M I Z I NDGoBwAnTloTaEdRfYrom Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18  
                 
S E T T I N G U P  
1
•
•
Charge your smartphone whenever  
you’re at your desk, or charge it  
overnight. The Li-ion battery has a much  
longer useful life when it is topped off  
frequently, versus charging it after it is  
fully drained.  
•
•
Turn down the screen brightness (see  
Adjusting the brightness).  
Decrease the settings in Power  
Preferences and turn off Beam Receive  
(see Optimizing power settings).  
®
•
Turn off the Bluetooth feature if you’re  
Your smartphone’s wireless features  
(phone, email, messaging, and web)  
and media features (camera, media  
players, eBooks, and games) consume  
more power than its organizer features.  
If you spend a lot of time using the  
wireless and media features, keep an  
eye on the battery icon and charge  
when necessary.  
not using it. See Connecting to a  
Bluetooth® hands-free device.  
Making your first call  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN If Phone Off  
appears in the title bar, you need to turn on  
your phone (see Turning your phone on and  
off). If No Service appears in the title bar,  
you are outside a wireless coverage area. If  
you believe you are in a wireless coverage  
area and this problem persists, contact  
Verizon Wireless for assistance:  
•
•
If you don’t plan to use the wireless  
features on your smartphone for a  
while, turn off your phone (see Turning  
your phone on and off) and let all calls  
be picked up by voicemail.  
As with any mobile phone, if you are in  
an area with no wireless coverage, your  
smartphone searches for a signal, which  
consumes power. If you cannot move to  
an area of better coverage, temporarily  
turn off your phone. While your phone is  
off, you can continue to use your  
•
Verizon Wireless technical support:  
800-922-0204  
•
Verizon Wireless customer service and  
billing: 800-256-4646  
smartphone’s nonwireless features.  
M A K I N G Y O U R  
C A L L  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And DownloadF. I R S T  
19  
                           
S E T T I N G U P  
1
1
2
Press Phone  
.
If prompted, press Center  
to turn  
off Keyguard (see Locking your keyboard  
(Keyguard) for more info).  
3
If you haven’t already activated your phone,  
follow these steps before continuing:  
•
Tap the onscreen Dial Pad to enter *228  
.
• Press Send to dial.  
• When prompted, press 1 (this number  
appears on the E letter key) to  
program your phone. A service  
provisioning message appears on  
your smartphone screen.  
5
6
Press Send  
After you finish the call, press Power/  
End to end the call.  
to dial.  
TIP You can also dial phone numbers with the  
number pad on the keyboard. See Dialing  
using the keyboard for details.  
• Wait a few minutes until you see the  
Programming Successful! message,  
and then tap the onscreen OK button.  
If the Ringer switch is set to Sound  
Adjusting call volume  
On  
programming is successful.  
Press Power/End to end the call.  
, you hear three tones when  
While a call is in progress, press the  
Volume button on the side of your  
smartphone to adjust the call volume.  
•
4
Tap the onscreen Dial Pad to enter the  
number you want to call.  
•
To increase the volume, press the upper  
half of the Volume button.  
•
To decrease the volume, press the  
lower half of the Volume button.  
M A K I N G Y O U R F I R S T  
Download frComA LWL ww.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
20  
     
S E T T I N G U P  
1
TIP If your phone number doesn’t appear in  
Phone Info, turn your phone off and on again  
before you recheck Phone Info. If your phone  
number still doesn’t appear, contact Verizon  
Wireless to confirm that your phone has been  
activated.  
Volume button  
Setting up your  
computer  
What’s my phone number?  
You need to install the desktop software  
and connect the sync cable so that you can  
synchronize the info on your computer and  
the info on your smartphone. You can use  
either Palm® Desktop software (included)  
or Microsoft Outlook® for Windows (sold  
separately) as your desktop software.  
1
Make sure your phone is on (see  
Turning your phone on and off).  
2
3
4
Press Phone  
.
Press Menu  
.
Select Options, and then select Phone  
Info.  
Synchronization means you can enter or  
change info on your smartphone or on your  
computer and then sync to automatically  
update the info in both places. There’s no  
need to enter the info twice. We strongly  
recommend that you sync your  
Look here for  
your phone  
number  
smartphone with your computer frequently  
to keep your info up-to-date (and backed  
up) in both locations.  
S E T T I N G  
Y O U R  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And UDPownload.C O M P U T E R  
21  
                             
S E T T I N G U P  
1
System requirements  
using your smartphone and desktop  
software with Windows Vista.  
Your computer should meet the following  
minimum system profiles:  
Upgrading from another Palm OS® device  
•
Windows 2000, XP Service Pack 2, or  
Media Center Edition 2005  
NOTE If you are setting up your first Palm  
OS device, skip ahead to Connecting your  
Treo smartphone to your computer.  
• 32MB of available memory (RAM)  
• 170MB of free hard disk space  
• CD drive  
You can transfer all compatible applications  
and information from your previous Palm  
OS® device to your new Treo 755P  
smartphone. This includes your calendar  
events, contacts, memos, and tasks, as  
well as your application settings and any  
compatible third-party applications  
and files.  
• Available USB port  
•
Mac OS X version 10.2 or later  
• 128MB of total memory (RAM)  
• 190MB of free hard disk space  
• CD drive  
• Available USB port  
When you install the desktop software  
from the Palm Software Installation CD,  
some third-party applications may be  
quarantined because they are not  
compatible with the Palm OS software  
version 5.4.9 on your new Treo  
smartphone. Quarantined files are not  
installed on your smartphone, nor are they  
deleted; these files are placed in a new  
folder on your computer: C:\Program  
Files\Palm\device name\PalmOS5  
Windows XP users: To sync your info, you  
must install Palm Desktop software from  
the Palm Software Installation CD that  
came with your smartphone—even if you  
sync with Outlook (sold separately) or  
another third-party application.  
Windows Vista users: Before inserting  
the Palm Software Installation CD, go to  
www.palm.com/windowsvista where you’ll  
find instructions and information about  
Incompatible Apps. (On some systems  
S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                               
S E T T I N G U P  
1
Palm may be replaced with palmOne or  
Handspring.)  
• Look at the numbers on the Free  
Space line and subtract the number  
on the left from the number on the  
right to calculate the space used. For  
example, on the device shown here,  
22.4 – 17.5 = 4.9. This means that  
4.9MB of space is occupied on this  
device.  
TIP If you have third-party applications on the  
device you are upgrading from, you may want  
to review the info in Upgrading that lists kinds  
of apps you do not want to try to install on  
your new device. The info in Upgrading is also  
useful if you run into other problems during  
the upgrade process.  
TIP Some third-party utilities allow you to back  
up your old device’s information onto an  
expansion card and then transfer the info to  
your Treo 755P smartphone. We do not  
recommend this method because any  
incompatible applications are also transferred  
to your smartphone.  
2
If the space occupied on your previous  
device is 60MB or less, then go to step  
3. If the space occupied is greater than  
60MB, then do any of the following to  
reduce the storage space you’re using  
before you go to the next step:  
1
Calculate how much space your apps  
and info occupy on your previous Palm  
OS device:  
• From Applications View, open the  
menus.  
• Delete any third-party applications  
that you no longer use.  
• Select Info on the App menu.  
• Move large files, such as eBooks and  
images, to an expansion card.  
• At the bottom of the screen, select  
Size.  
S E T T I N G  
Y O U R  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And UDPownload.C O M P U T E R  
23  
                           
S E T T I N G U P  
1
• Move third-party applications to an  
expansion card.  
• Indicate whether you want to sync  
only the info in your PIM apps  
(Calendar, Contacts, Memos, and  
Tasks) or all info and apps (excluding  
apps known to be incompatible).  
• Purge old info in applications such as  
Calendar (Date Book), Tasks (To Do),  
and email. Refer to the  
documentation that came with your  
previous device for instructions on  
these items.  
• Select a device name for your new  
smartphone; be sure to select the  
same name that you used for your old  
device. (This is the name that appears  
in the User list in Palm Desktop  
software.)  
3
4
Synchronize your previous device with  
your previous desktop software to back  
up your information one last time.  
MAC ONLY If you have pictures on your  
previous device, copy them from your  
previous device to an expansion card or  
beam them to your new Treo 755P  
smartphone.  
Install the desktop synchronization  
software from your new Palm Software  
Installation CD (see Installing the  
desktop synchronization software).  
IMPORTANT Do not synchronize your new  
Treo 755P smartphone with any previous  
versions of Palm Desktop software.  
6
If you plan to continue using your  
previous device, perform a hard reset to  
remove its associated device name.  
(See the documentation that came with  
your previous device for instructions on  
performing a hard reset.) Each device  
you synchronize with your computer  
must have a unique name. The next  
time you synchronize your previous  
device with your computer, be sure to  
assign it a new name.  
5
During the installation process, sync  
your new Treo smartphone with your  
new desktop software as instructed.  
When prompted, do the following:  
• Connect your new smartphone to  
your computer (see Connecting your  
Treo smartphone to your computer).  
S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
S E T T I N G U P  
1
If any third-party applications are  
quarantined during the installation, do not  
manually install them. Contact the  
third-party developer for software updates  
and info about compatibility with your Treo  
755P smartphone.  
1
2
Close any apps that are running on your  
computer, including those that are  
minimized. Your computer needs all its  
resources to install the software.  
Insert the Palm Software Installation CD  
into the CD drive on your computer.  
Installing the desktop synchronization  
software  
IMPORTANT Even if you already own a  
Palm OS device and have installed a  
previous version of the desktop software,  
you must install the software from the  
Palm Software Installation CD that came  
with your Treo 755P smartphone.  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN If you are installing  
on a computer at work, make sure your  
computer is configured to let you install  
new software. Contact your company’s  
IT department for help.  
3
4
If you are installing on a Mac,  
double-click the CD icon on the desktop,  
and then double-click the  
PalmSoftware.pkg icon.  
When the installation wizard opens,  
follow the onscreen instructions. Please  
note these important points about the  
installation process:  
TIP If you want to sync info with applications  
other than Palm Desktop or Microsoft  
Outlook, you need to purchase additional  
third-party sync software. This sync software  
is sometimes called a conduit.  
• When the language selection screen  
appears, click the same language you  
selected on your smartphone.  
S E T T I N G  
Y O U R  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And UDPownload.C O M P U T E R  
25  
                         
S E T T I N G U P  
1
• You can choose which desktop  
2
Plug the USB sync cable into an  
available USB port or a powered USB  
hub on your computer.  
software you want to use for  
synchronization: Palm Desktop  
software or Microsoft Outlook.  
TIP For best performance, plug your sync  
cable directly into a USB port on your  
computer. If your computer has USB ports on  
both the front and back, we suggest using the  
back port; the front port is often a low-power  
port. If you use a USB hub, make sure the  
hub has its own power supply.  
TIP To download a trial version of Microsoft  
Outlook and learn about discount offers go to:  
www.palm.com/mypalm/755pverizon-bonus.  
NOTE If you use Microsoft Outlook as your  
desktop email application, select Microsoft  
Outlook as your desktop synchronization  
software. If you select Microsoft Outlook,  
Palm Desktop software still installs on your  
computer. When you enter information on  
your computer, be sure to enter your  
information in Microsoft Outlook, not in  
Palm Desktop software.  
3
4
With the sync button facing up, connect  
the sync cable to the bottom of your  
smartphone. Do not press the sync  
button until you are instructed to do so.  
Connect the charger cable to the  
bottom of your smartphone.  
•
When the install process prompts you  
to connect your smartphone to your  
computer, go to Connecting your Treo  
smartphone to your computer.  
Sync  
button  
Sync  
cable  
Connecting your Treo smartphone to your  
computer  
1
Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.  
S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
S E T T I N G U P  
1
You are now ready to synchronize; go to  
Synchronizing information—the basics.  
corporate server frequently to keep your  
info up-to-date (and backed up) in  
both locations.  
The info from all the following applications  
is updated by default each time you sync  
your smartphone with your desktop  
software:  
Synchronizing  
information—the  
basics  
Synchronizing means that info that is  
entered or updated in one place  
(your smartphone or your computer) is  
automatically updated in the other, so  
there’s no need to enter the info twice. We  
strongly recommend that you sync your  
smartphone with your computer or  
How each application syncs depends on  
your computer type and the desktop  
software you are using, as follows:  
Computer type  
Desktop type  
What syncs and where  
Windows  
Microsoft Outlook  
(sold separately)  
•
Calendar, Contacts, Memos, and Tasks  
sync with Outlook  
•
Pics&Videos syncs with Palm Desktop  
software  
Windows  
Mac  
Palm Desktop  
software  
All apps sync with Palm Desktop software  
Palm Desktop  
software  
All apps sync with Palm Desktop software  
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — T H E B A S I C S  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                         
S E T T I N G U P  
1
BEFORE YOU BEGIN To sync your info,  
3
4
A message indicates that  
synchronization is in progress.  
you must install Palm Desktop software  
from the Palm Software Installation CD  
that came with your Treo 755P  
smartphone—even if you sync with  
Outlook (sold separately) or another  
third-party application. See Installing the  
desktop synchronization software for  
instructions.  
Wait for a message that indicates that  
the process is complete before you  
disconnect the sync cable.  
TIP If you have problems synchronizing, see  
Synchronization for suggestions.  
TIP For more sync options, including which  
apps sync, see Synchronizing information—  
advanced.  
1
Connect your Treo 755P smartphone to  
your computer (see Connecting your  
Treo smartphone to your computer).  
If you’re finishing your initial setup, you  
now have the option to install bonus  
software. If you choose to install some of  
the bonus software, you need to sync  
again to install the software on your  
smartphone. You can also install bonus  
software later, see Installing applications.  
NOTE If you’re performing initial setup,  
your smartphone should already be  
connected to your computer.  
2
Press the sync button on the sync  
cable.  
TIP For info on locating your pictures and  
videos on your computer, see Viewing  
pictures and videos on your computer.  
Sync button  
I N F O R M A T I O N — T H E  
S Y N C H R O NDI ZoIwNnGload from Www.SomanuBalAsS.cIoCmS. All Manuals Search And Download.  
28  
       
CHAPTER  
2
Moving around on your  
smartphone  
Have you ever been to a new city and felt a bit lost until you  
figured out that the numbered streets run north/south and the  
avenues run east/west? Learning to move around on your  
smartphone is similar. Most Palm OS® applications use the  
same set of controls. So once you learn how to use these  
controls on your Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone, you’ll be  
driving all over town and you won’t even need a map.  
Benefits  
•
•
•
Find and open applications quickly  
Access extra features with menus  
•
Access many more characters and  
symbols than are displayed on the  
keyboard  
Move around in applications with  
one hand, using the 5-way  
navigator  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
In this chapter  
Moving around the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Using the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Opening applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
2
Moving around the  
screen  
TIP Some third-party applications may not  
work with the 5-way navigator, and you must  
use the stylus instead.  
DID YOU KNOW? In this guide, we use arrow  
icons to indicate directions on the 5-way.  
These are different from any onscreen arrows  
that you tap with your stylus or select with  
the 5-way to display pick lists.  
To move around the Treo 755P smartphone  
screen, you can use the 5-way navigator for  
one-handed navigation, or you can tap  
items on the screen with the stylus. With  
use, you will find your own favorite way to  
scroll, highlight, and select menu items.  
The 5-way includes the following buttons:  
Center  
Up  
Left  
Right  
Down  
M O V I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
2
Scrolling through screens  
Up  
or Down to scroll one screen  
at a time.  
As on a computer, you scroll on the Treo  
smartphone to move from field to field or  
You can also scroll using the stylus. Tap an  
page to page, or in some cases to highlight onscreen scroll arrow, or drag the slider of  
an item or option in a list.  
an onscreen scroll bar.  
In list screens, use the 5-way  
to  
select and move between entries such as  
notes, memos, contacts, or photos. In  
individual entry screens—such as a single  
photo or email message—use the 5-way to  
move among the items on the screen or to  
move to another entry.  
Slider  
Scroll arrows  
The behavior of the 5-way for list screens  
and entry screens varies according to  
application. Here are some general  
scrolling tips that apply in most  
applications:  
Highlighting and selecting items  
On most screens, one item—a button, a  
list entry, or a check box—is highlighted by  
default. The highlight identifies which item  
is affected by your next action. Use the  
5-way to move the highlight from one item  
to another before opening or selecting it.  
•
Press Right , Left , Up , or  
Down to move to the next field,  
button, or action in that direction.  
The highlight can take one of two forms,  
depending on what is highlighted:  
•
•
In list screens, press and hold Up  
Down to scroll one screen at a time.  
or  
•
Border glow: When an onscreen  
When inside a text field, press Right  
button (such as OK or Cancel) or pick list  
is highlighted, the item displays a glow  
around its border. If an entire list screen  
or Left to scroll to the next character  
or word, press Up  
or Down to  
scroll between lines, or press and hold  
M O V I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                     
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
2
is highlighted, the glow appears at the  
top and bottom of the screen only.  
TIP When a border appears at the top and  
bottom of a list screen, press Center on the  
5-way to highlight the first item in the list.  
TIP After you open an application (see  
Opening applications), experiment with using  
the 5-way to highlight various screen  
elements.  
Highlighting text  
You can use the stylus to highlight text on  
the screen.  
•
Tap and drag the stylus across the text  
you want to highlight.  
•
•
To highlight a word, double-tap it.  
To highlight a paragraph, triple-tap it.  
•
Colored background: When a phone  
number, text, an email address, a web  
link, or an item in a list is highlighted,  
the item is displayed as white text  
against a colored background. Examples  
of lists include the Contacts list, the  
Messaging Inbox, and the Tasks list.  
Accessing command buttons  
In most applications, command buttons  
such as New, OK, and Details appear at the  
bottom of the screen. In many cases, you  
can jump directly to these buttons instead  
of scrolling to them.  
•
From a list screen, such as the Contacts  
list or Memos list, press Right to  
jump to the first button.  
After highlighting an item, you can select or  
activate it by pressing Center  
, or by  
tapping the item with the stylus.  
M O V I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                               
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
2
•
•
From a screen where you create or edit  
entries, such as Edit Contacts, press  
Center  
to jump to the first button.  
From a dialog box, such as Edit  
Categories, press Up  
or Down to  
scroll to the buttons.  
KEY TERM Dialog box A set of options and  
command buttons that are enclosed by a  
border and that enable you to carry out a  
specific task.  
Menu shortcut  
2
3
4
Press Right and Left to switch  
between menus.  
Selecting menu items  
Many applications have menus to give you  
access to additional features. These menus  
are usually hidden from view, but they  
Press Up  
and Down to highlight a  
menu item.  
Press Center  
to select the menu  
appear when you press Menu  
. To get  
item, or press Menu  
to close the  
the most out of your Treo smartphone, it’s  
a good idea to familiarize yourself with the  
additional features available through the  
various application menus.  
menu and cancel your selection.  
TIP Most menu items have menu shortcuts  
listed in the menu. To use a menu shortcut,  
press Menu plus the shortcut letter. You don’t  
have to see the menu item to use the menu  
shortcut. For example, when you’re in  
Calendar, you can press Menu + N to create a  
new event.  
1
Press Menu  
to display an  
application’s menus.  
M O V I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
2
Selecting options in a pick list  
•
Stylus: Use your stylus to tap the pick  
list.  
A range of options is often presented in a  
type of menu called a pick list, which can  
be identified by a downward-pointing  
arrow. Pick lists are different from the  
application menus previously described.  
The application menus give you access to  
additional features and pick lists let you  
select the contents for a particular field.  
• Tap the item you want from the list.  
• To exit the pick list without making a  
selection, tap outside the list.  
You can select items from a pick list with  
the 5-way or the stylus.  
•
5-way: Use the 5-way  
to highlight  
the pick list, and then press Center  
to display the items in the list.  
• Press Up  
and Down to highlight  
the item you want.  
• Press Center  
to select the  
highlighted item.  
• To exit the pick list without making a  
selection, press Left or Right  
.
M O V I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
2
Using the keyboard  
Backlight  
Backspace  
Return  
Option  
Shift/Find  
Menu  
Space  
Alt  
Entering lowercase and uppercase letters  
TIP When using the keyboard, most people  
find it easiest to hold the Treo smartphone  
with two hands and use the tips of both  
thumbs to press the keys.  
•
•
To enter lowercase letters, press the  
desired keys.  
To enter an uppercase letter, press  
Shift/Find  
key. You don’t need to press and hold  
Shift while entering a letter. When Shift  
is active, the  
lower-right corner of the screen.  
and then press a letter  
DID YOU KNOW? The Treo smartphone includes  
a keyboard backlight that turns on and off  
when the screen turns on or off. The backlight  
also dims when an active call lasts longer than  
a specified period of time. See Optimizing  
power settings to adjust the automatic  
shut-off and dimming intervals.  
symbol appears in the  
U S I N G  
K E Y B O A R D  
T H EDownload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
36  
                               
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
2
•
To turn Caps Lock on, press Shift/Find  
DID YOU KNOW? Some application views  
automatically default to Option Lock, such as  
the Dial Pad View in the Phone application or  
the Calculator. In this case, you do not need  
to press Option to enter numbers.  
twice. To turn it off, press Shift/  
Find  
once. When Caps Lock is on,  
symbol appears in the  
the  
lower-right corner of the screen.  
Entering numbers, punctuation, and  
symbols  
Entering other symbols and accented  
characters  
Number, punctuation, and symbol  
characters appear above the letters on  
the keys.To enter these characters, do one  
of the following:  
Symbols and accented characters that do  
not appear on the keyboard are sometimes  
called alternate characters because they  
are entered using the Alt  
key.  
1
Enter the character that corresponds to  
the symbol or accented character you  
want. See the table on the next page.  
Symbol  
Letter  
2
3
Press Alt  
.
•
Press Option  
, and then press the  
key with the desired character shown  
above the letter. You don’t need to press  
and hold Option while pressing the  
second key. When Option is active, the  
symbol appears in the lower-right  
corner of the screen.  
Press Up , Down , Right , or  
Left to highlight the desired  
character.  
4
Press Center  
character.  
to insert the  
•
To turn Option Lock on, press Option  
twice. To turn it off, press Option  
once. When Option Lock is on, the  
DID YOU KNOW? Alternate characters are  
grouped by their similarity to the base key. For  
example, the alternate characters for the e key  
are é, è, ë, ê, and  
.
symbol  
appears in the lower-right  
corner of the screen.  
U S I N G T H E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.K E Y B O A R D  
37  
                             
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
2
Symbols and accented characters  
Press…  
Then press  
Alt to  
Press…  
Then press  
Alt to  
Press…  
Then press  
Alt to  
select…  
á à ä â ã å æ  
Á À Ä Â Ã Å Æ  
ß
select…  
select…  
ú ù ü û  
Ú Ù Ü Û  
x ¤  
a
n
ñ
u
A
N
Ñ
U
b or B  
o
ó ò ö ô œ õ  
x or X  
c
ç ¢ ©  
O
Ó Ò Ö Ô Œ Õ  
y
Y
!
ý ÿ  
C
Ç ¢ ©  
p or P  
r or R  
s
Ý Ÿ  
e
é è ë ê  
É È Ë Ê  
í ì ï î  
®
¡
E
ß š  
ß Š  
™
?
:
¿
i
S
:-) :-( ;-)  
£ ¥ ¢  
I
Í Ì Ï Î  
t or T  
$
l or L  
£
Press Alt  
characters:  
by itself, after a space or at the beginning or end of a line, to select these  
£ ¥ ¢ [ ] { } < > « » © ® ™ ~ ^ ø |  
; _ • \ % = ° ÷  
U S I N G  
K E Y B O A R D  
T H EDownload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
38  
         
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
2
Each quick button opens two applications:  
Opening applications  
•
To open a button’s primary application,  
simply press the button.  
When you open an application using either  
Applications View or an application button,  
you automatically close the application you  
were previously using.  
Button  
Primary application  
Phone  
Calendar  
Using the quick buttons  
The front of the Treo 755P smartphone has  
three buttons that you can use to open  
applications. The fourth button opens  
Applications View (see Using Applications  
View).  
Wireless Sync  
•
To access a button’s secondary  
application, press Option  
and then  
press the quick button.  
TIP You can customize the quick buttons  
yourself; see Reassigning buttons for details.  
Buttons  
Secondary application  
Web  
+
+
+
World Clock  
Messaging  
Phone  
DID YOU KNOW? Pressing Option + Menu dims  
your smartphone screen.  
Option  
Calendar  
Applications  
Wireless  
Sync  
O P E N I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                       
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
2
Using Applications View  
In Applications View, you can also do any of  
the following:  
You can access all available applications  
through Applications View.  
•
Press Applications  
repeatedly to  
cycle through various categories of  
applications. See Applications settings  
for more info on categories.  
1
2
Press Applications  
.
Use the 5-way  
application you want to use.  
to highlight the  
•
Enter the first few letters of the  
application’s name to highlight it. For  
example, if you enter P, it highlights  
Phone; if you then enter R, it highlights  
Prefs. If you pause and then enter R, it  
highlights the first application that starts  
with R.  
TIP You can also press and hold Applications  
from any screen on your smartphone to select  
from a list of your most recently used apps.  
3
Press Center  
to open the selected  
application.  
O P E N I N G  
ADPoPwLnI CloAaTdI OfroNmS Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
40  
                   
CHAPTER  
3
Your phone  
The Phone application is your home base for making and  
receiving calls and for storing info about the people you need to  
stay in touch with.  
You can effectively manage multiple calls, such as sending text  
messages to ignored calls, swapping between calls, and  
creating three-way conference calls. Your Palm® Treo™ 755P  
smartphone helps you perform all these tasks with ease.  
And you can do more than manage your phone calls, too. You  
can send text messages, open applications, go to your favorite  
web pages, see your upcoming appointments, and even find  
out how many unread email messages you have.  
Benefits  
•
Stay in touch: you choose how  
•
Have fun: add wallpaper and  
ringtones  
•
Save time with shortcuts to your  
favorite info  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
In this chapter  
Turning your smartphone on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Receiving calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Using voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
What can I do when I’m on a call?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Viewing minutes usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Defining favorite buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Using a phone headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Customizing phone settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
What are all those icons?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
example, when you’re on a plane and want  
to look at your calendar.  
Turning your  
smartphone on and  
off  
1
Press and release Power/End  
to wake up the screen.  
TIP You can also press any of the quick  
buttons or the Applications button to wake  
up your smartphone screen.  
NOTE Throughout this guide we use the  
term smartphone to describe your device  
and its physical attributes. We use the term  
phone to describe the features of your  
smartphone that lets you connect to the  
Verizon Wireless network to make and  
receive calls and transmit data.  
Power/End  
Center  
The phone and the screen of your  
smartphone can be turned on and off  
separately. This means that you can wake  
up the screen to use just the organizer  
features of your smartphone, without  
turning on the phone. Also, when the  
screen is turned off, the phone can be on  
and ready for you to receive and make  
calls.  
2
3
Press Center  
to turn off Keyguard.  
For more info about turning Keyguard on  
and off, see Locking your keyboard  
(Keyguard).  
Press and release Power/End  
to turn off the screen.  
Waking up the screen  
TIP You can set how long the screen stays on.  
Press Applications, select Preferences,  
select Power, and then adjust the Auto-off  
after setting.  
Wake up the screen and leave the phone  
turned off when you want to use only the  
organizer features of your smartphone; for  
T U R N I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E O N A N D O F F  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
Turning your phone on and off  
When your smartphone locates a signal  
(provided you are in a coverage area),  
Verizon Wireless and the  
When your phone is on, it is connected to  
the Verizon Wireless network (provided  
you are in a coverage area) so that you can  
make and receive phone calls and use  
wireless services such as email,  
messaging, and the web browser. During  
initial setup, your phone is on by default, so  
you can use wireless services right away.  
signal-strength  
icon appear at the  
top of the screen, indicating that you  
can use the phone and Internet features  
(if supported by the mobile network).  
TIP The indicator light flashes green when  
your phone is on and you’re inside a coverage  
area. If you’re outside a coverage area, No  
Service appears in the upper-left corner and  
the indicator light flashes amber.  
If you turn off your phone, you can still use  
the organizer features such as Contacts  
and Calendar, as well as the media  
features, such as the pTunes music  
application and Pics&Videos. This is  
sometimes referred to as flight mode and  
is ideal for airplane flights and maximizing  
battery life.  
3
Press and hold Power/End  
again to turn off your phone. When your  
phone is off, Phone Off and the  
phone-off  
icon appear at the top of  
the Phone application screen and your  
smartphone is not connected to any  
mobile network. You can still use the  
nonwireless features of your  
1
2
Wake up the screen.  
Press and hold Power/End  
turn on your phone.  
to  
smartphone, such as Contacts,  
Calendar, Tasks, and Memos.  
TIP If the Ringer switch is set to Sound On,  
you hear a series of tones when you turn your  
phone on and off (see Silencing sounds).  
T U R N I N G  
S M A R T P H O N E O N A N D O F F  
YDOoUwRnload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
44  
                           
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
Opening the Phone application  
Press Phone to open the Phone  
application’s Main View.  
•
Status icons  
Dial Pad  
3
Tap Dial or press Send  
the call.  
to make  
Favorite  
buttons  
TIP If you changed the wallpaper in the Phone  
application’s Main View (see Customizing the  
Phone application’s Main View), you can still  
access the Dial Pad. From the Phone  
application’s Main View, press Send, and then  
select Dial Pad.  
Making calls  
Your smartphone offers several options for  
making calls. As you become familiar with  
your smartphone, you’ll discover which  
method you prefer.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can paste numbers directly  
into the Dial Pad. Copy a number from another  
application and press Phone to switch to the  
Dial Pad. Open the Edit menu and select  
Paste. Press Send to dial.  
Dialing using the onscreen Dial Pad  
1
2
Press Phone  
.
Dialing using the keyboard  
Enter the phone number by tapping the  
onscreen Dial Pad with the stylus.  
1
2
Press Phone  
.
Press the numbered keys to enter the  
phone number. (You don’t need to press  
Option.)  
M A K I N G C A L L S  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
• First name (JOH for John)  
• Last name (SMI for Smith)  
• First initial and last name (JSM for  
John Smith)  
For example, entering SM would display  
Smilla Anderson, John Smith, and Sally  
Martin. Entering JSM finds only John  
Smith.  
Text appears  
here as you  
enter it  
3
Press Send  
to make the call.  
TIP You can also press Center on the 5-way to  
make the call.  
Dialing by contact name  
Before you can dial a call by contact name,  
you must create some contacts (see  
Adding a contact), or import them by  
synchronizing (see Synchronizing  
information—the basics).  
TIP To restart your search, press Backspace to  
delete letters you’ve entered. Or select  
Cancel to return to Main View.  
1
2
3
Press Phone  
.
4
5
Select the number you want to dial.  
Select the Contacts favorite button.  
Press Send  
to dial.  
Using the keyboard, just start entering  
one of the following for the contact you  
want to call:  
M A K I N G C A L L S  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
DID YOU KNOW? If you want to be able to dial by  
entering a contact name in the Phone  
application’s Main View (instead of a phone  
number), you can change a setting to do that  
(see Customizing phone settings).  
TIP To see more info for a contact, highlight  
the name and press Center  
on the 5-way  
to view the address, company, and other  
details.  
DID YOU KNOW? If you select a contact from  
Dialing with a speed-dial favorite button  
your Contacts list when you create a  
speed-dial favorite, you can see all the  
numbers for that contact. Highlight that  
contact’s speed-dial favorite button, and  
press Space on the keyboard.  
Your smartphone comes with a few  
predefined speed-dial favorite buttons, but  
you can also create your own favorites. See  
Creating a speed-dial favorite button.  
1
2
3
Press Phone  
Press Down to access Favorites.  
Use the 5-way to highlight the  
speed-dial favorite you want.  
.
4
Press Center  
to make the call.  
Dialing from a web page or message  
Your smartphone recognizes most phone  
numbers that appear on web pages or in  
text, email, or multimedia messages.  
Look for the  
icon to distinguish a  
speed-dial favorite from other types of  
favorites.  
1
Select the phone number on the web  
page or in the message.  
TIP To view more favorite buttons, repeatedly  
press Down or Right on the 5-way to scroll to  
other Favorites pages.  
M A K I N G C A L L S  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
call, and then press Send  
again to  
dial.  
2
3
Press Center  
Number dialog box.  
to open the Dial  
Select Dial to dial the number.  
To select from a chronological list of  
calls: Select the Call Log favorite button.  
You can also access your Call Log from the  
Phone application’s Main View by pressing  
TIP If you can’t use the 5-way or stylus to  
highlight and dial a phone number on a web  
page or in a message, it means that your  
smartphone doesn’t recognize the number as  
a phone number.  
Send  
and selecting Call Log from  
the Redial list.  
Redialing a recently called number  
To dial the last number: From the Phone  
application’s Main View, press and hold  
Send  
to dial the last number you  
called.  
To select from your most recently dialed  
numbers: From the Phone application’s  
Main View, press Send  
to open the  
Redial list, select the number you want to  
M A K I N G C A L L S  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
DID YOU KNOW? If a number in your Contacts  
list supports text messaging, you can send a  
text message from your Call Log. If a number  
in your Call Log matches a number in your  
Contacts list, open the Record menu and  
select Message to send a message to this  
contact.  
DID YOU KNOW? If music is playing and a call  
arrives, the phone rings softly. The music  
pauses automatically if you answer the call  
and resumes when you hang up.  
Ending a call  
Do one of the following:  
•
•
•
Press Power/End  
.
Select Hang Up All.  
Press the button on the headset (if the  
headset is attached).  
TIP See a photo of the person calling you!  
Learn how to assign a caller ID photo in  
Assigning a caller ID photo.  
Receiving calls  
To answer a call, do one of the following:  
To receive calls, your phone must be on.  
This is different from having only the  
screen turned on (see Turning your phone  
on and off). When your phone is off, your  
calls go to voicemail.  
•
•
•
Press Send  
.
Select Answer.  
Press the headset button (if the  
headset is attached).  
TIP The headset button may work differently  
on headsets other than the one provided with  
your smartphone.  
R E C E I V I N G C A L L S  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
To ignore a call, do one of the following:  
Send the call to voicemail: Press Power/  
End or select Ignore.  
Using voicemail  
Verizon Wireless service includes  
voicemail. Keep in mind that airtime and  
other charges apply when using voicemail  
from your smartphone.  
Send the caller a text message: Select  
Ignore with Text. This option sends the  
call to voicemail and opens a text message  
addressed to the caller.  
Setting up voicemail  
NOTE Sending text messages to land line  
phones may not be supported.  
TIP If you can’t connect to the Verizon  
Wireless voicemail system, contact Verizon  
Wireless for assistance:  
To silence the phone while it is ringing, do  
one of the following:  
•
Verizon Wireless technical support:  
800-922-0204.  
•
Press any key on your smartphone  
•
Verizon Wireless customer service and  
billing: 800-256-4646.  
except Send, Power/End, or the 5-way.  
•
Slide the Ringer switch to Sound  
Off  
. This immediately silences all  
1
Make sure your phone is turned on (see  
Turning your phone on and off) and that  
you are in a coverage area.  
system sounds, including the ringer.  
DID YOU KNOW? When you silence the ringer  
while it is ringing, you can either answer the  
call or let it ring through to voicemail.  
2
3
Press Phone  
.
Press and hold 1 or select the  
Voicemail favorite button to dial the  
Verizon Wireless automated voicemail  
system.  
4
Follow the voice prompts to set up your  
voicemail.  
U S I N G V O I C E M A I L  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                     
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
Voicemail notification  
3
Enter your voicemail password using  
the keyboard.  
When you have a new voicemail message,  
you are notified with an Alert dialog box.  
TIP Remember, you do not need to press  
Option to enter numbers, *, or # while on a  
call.  
•
To dismiss the Alert dialog box, select  
OK.  
•
To play the message, select Listen.  
NOTE If you defined Extra Digits for the  
Voicemail favorite button (see Editing a  
favorite button for details), you can select  
this button to enter your password.  
When you have messages that you have  
not listened to, a Voicemail icon also  
appears in the title bar of the Phone  
application. You can select this icon to  
listen to your voicemail.  
DID YOU KNOW? tip If the voicemail icon stays in  
the title bar after you listen to your messages,  
you can clear the voicemail icon. Open the  
Options menu, select Phone Preferences,  
and then select Clear Voicemail Icon.  
Listening to voicemail messages  
1
2
Press Phone  
.
Press and hold 1 to dial the voicemail  
system, or select the Voicemail favorite  
button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And DoUwSnlIoNaGd.V O I C E M A I L  
51  
           
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
Use the 5-way  
onscreen buttons. Here’s what the buttons  
do:  
or stylus to select the  
What can I do when  
I’m on a call?  
Ends the call immediately. You can  
also press the headset button (if the  
headset is attached).  
When you make or receive a call, Active  
Call View appears.  
Turns on the speakerphone. When  
the speakerphone is on, you can  
take the smartphone away from  
your ear and use other features  
during a call. For example, you can  
check your calendar or look up  
contact info.  
Call  
duration  
Caller’s  
name and  
number  
Turns off the speakerphone when it  
is on.  
TIP If the screen dims during a call, press any  
key except Power/End to restore the screen  
brightness. Be careful not to press Power/End  
to restore the screen brightness because this  
ends the call.  
Replaces the Spkr-phone button  
when a Bluetooth® headset is  
attached. Select this button to  
transfer the call from the Bluetooth  
headset to the built-in earpiece.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can set how long the  
screen stays at full brightness during phone  
calls. See Optimizing power settings for  
details.  
Places the current call on hold.  
W H A T  
I
D O W H E N I ’ M O N  
A
C A L L ?  
C A N Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
52  
                       
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
Enables you to place another call  
while the first call is on hold. For  
information on handling a second  
incoming call, see Answering a  
second call (call waiting).  
Switching applications during a call  
You can use many other applications on  
your smartphone while holding a phone  
conversation, including the organizer and  
text messaging features. You cannot,  
however, make a data connection while on  
a call. This means that you cannot browse  
the web or send and receive email or  
multimedia messages while on a call.  
Opens the Dial Pad so you can  
manually dial additional numbers,  
such as an extension or a response  
to a voice prompt.  
Dials any extra digits (such as a  
password or an extension) that you  
assigned to a favorite button. This  
button replaces the Dial Pad button  
during outgoing calls to numbers  
that include predefined extra digits.  
See Defining favorite buttons for  
information on defining extra digits.  
1
Do one of the following:  
• Select Hold to pause your  
conversation while you view the other  
application.  
• Select Spkr-phone to continue the  
conversation while you view the other  
application.  
• Connect a headset (see Using a  
phone headset).  
Mutes the microphone so that you  
cannot be heard.  
2
3
Press Applications  
.
Select the icon for the application you  
want to open.  
DID YOU KNOW? Do you accidentally press  
onscreen buttons when you’re on a call? You  
can disable the screen’s touch-sensitive  
feature during your calls; see Locking your  
screen.  
4
Press Phone  
anytime to return to  
Active Call View.  
W H A T  
I
D O  
I ’ M O N  
A
C A L L ?  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All ManualsCSAeNarch AnWd HDEoNwnload.  
53  
                         
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
the number into the first available phone  
number field for that contact.  
TIP You can also press Phone to toggle  
between Active Call View and Main View in  
the Phone app, so you can open a favorite by  
selecting its button.  
•
•
To decline adding this number, select  
Cancel.  
To disable the Add New Number  
prompt, check the Don’t ask me this  
again box.  
Saving phone numbers  
After you complete an outgoing call to a  
number that is not in your Contacts list,  
you are prompted to add the number to  
your Contacts list. You are also prompted  
to add new numbers from incoming calls  
with caller ID.  
TIP You can turn the Add New Number  
prompt on and off. From the Phone  
application’s Main View, open the Options  
menu, and select Phone Preferences. To turn  
this option on, check the Ask to add  
unknown phone numbers after calls box.  
To turn this option off, uncheck this box.  
If you don’t add a number right away, follow  
these steps to add it later.  
1
In the Call Log (see Redialing a recently  
called number), highlight the number  
you want to save.  
2
3
4
5
Press Menu  
.
•
•
To create a new contact entry for this  
number, select Create a New Contact,  
and enter the contact’s info.  
Select Add Contact.  
Enter the information for the entry.  
Select Done.  
To add this number to an existing  
contact entry, select Add to a Contact,  
and then select the contact. This pastes  
W H A T  
I
D O W H E N I ’ M O N  
A
C A L L ?  
C A N Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
54  
               
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
Making a second call  
DID YOU KNOW? When the second call is an  
outgoing call, you can conference the two  
calls, but you cannot swap between them.  
You can make a second call while your first  
call is still active.  
When the second call is an incoming call, you  
can swap between the two calls, but you  
cannot conference them.  
1
Dial the first number and wait until the  
person answers.  
2
3
4
Select Hold.  
When two calls are active and you press  
Power/End, you hang up both calls. If the  
second call is an outgoing call, you can return  
to the first call by waiting for the person on  
the second call to hang up. If you accidentally  
hang up both calls, your smartphone  
automatically dials the number that was on  
hold.  
Select Add Call.  
Dial the second number using any of  
the methods described in Making calls.  
5
When the Dial another call prompt  
appears, select Yes .  
When two calls are in progress, Active Call  
View includes two status lines, each  
representing one of the calls.  
Answering a second call (call waiting)  
When you are on a call, you can receive a  
second call. When the second call comes  
in, you hear a call waiting tone and the Call  
Waiting dialog box appears. You can do any  
of the following to handle the second call:  
•
To place the current call on hold and  
answer the new call, press Send  
or select Answer.  
•
To send the new call to voicemail, select  
Ignore.  
W H A T  
I
D O  
I ’ M O N  
A
C A L L ?  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All ManualsCSAeNarch AnWd HDEoNwnload.  
55  
                         
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
•
•
To send the new call to voicemail and  
send the caller a text message, select  
Ignore with Text.  
To hang up the current call and answer  
the new call, press Power/End  
.
When the incoming call message  
reappears, select Answer or press  
Send  
.
After you answer a second call, you can  
switch between the original call and the  
second call by selecting Swap.  
Making a conference call  
When you are on a call and place a second  
outgoing call, you can join the two calls in a  
conference session, provided that the  
service is available in your area. Please  
contact Verizon Wireless for more  
information. Additional charges may apply  
and minutes in your mobile account may  
be deducted for each call you place.  
3
To end the conference, press Power/  
End to end all the calls.  
DID YOU KNOW? Pressing Send during a  
conference call usually hangs up the second  
call. However, depending on your network  
connection, you may occasionally hang up the  
first call.  
1
While the first call is in progress, place a  
second call.  
2
Select Conf. This joins the two calls in a  
conference session.  
W H A T  
I
D O W H E N I ’ M O N  
A
C A L L ?  
C A N Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
56  
         
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
Using Flash mode during a call  
• If you have one call in progress, to  
make an outgoing second call, dial the  
number using any of the methods  
described in Making calls.  
Flash mode enables you to manually  
manage your calls while one or more calls  
are active. This mode is often used during a  
conference call when one of the calls has  
ended but the other remains connected.  
• If you have one call in progress and  
place an outgoing second call, press  
Send  
after establishing a  
1
Press Send  
View.  
from Active Call  
connection with the second party to  
set up a conference session using  
three-way calling.  
2
If the Do you want to switch to Flash  
mode prompt appears, select Yes.  
• If you have two calls in conference,  
press Send  
to hang up one of  
the calls; you can then dial another  
number and place the new caller into  
the conference session.  
4
To exit Flash mode and end all the calls,  
press Power/End  
.
Forwarding calls  
Please check with Verizon Wireless about  
availability and pricing of forwarding calls to  
another phone; call forwarding is not  
available in all areas, and additional charges  
may apply.  
3
While in Flash mode, do any of the  
following:  
• If you have one call in progress and  
answer an incoming second call,  
press Send  
to swap between  
1
2
Press Phone  
.
the calls.  
Enter *72 followed by the number  
where you want to forward your calls.  
W H A T  
I
D O  
I ’ M O N  
A
C A L L ?  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All ManualsCSAeNarch AnWd HDEoNwnload.  
57  
           
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
For example, to forward calls to  
4
Select Done.  
415-555-1234, enter:  
*724155551234.  
TIP Want to see how much time you spent on  
a particular call? From the Call Log, select the  
call, and then select Details. Keep in mind  
that your billing statement may vary slightly  
from the information you see onscreen.  
Usage is charged based on your calling plan,  
and calling plans vary.  
3
4
Press Send  
forwarding.  
to turn on call  
When you’re ready to turn off call  
forwarding, enter *73 and then press  
Send  
.
Defining favorite  
buttons  
Viewing minutes  
usage  
Your Treo smartphone provides 70 favorite  
buttons for quick access to the following  
common tasks:  
1
2
Select the Call Log favorite button.  
Select Totals.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Dialing a phone number (speed dial)  
Accessing your Call Log  
Accessing the onscreen Dial Pad  
Opening an application  
Accessing a web page  
Addressing a text, multimedia, or email  
message  
•
Accessing voicemail (preset on your  
Treo smartphone)  
3
(Optional) To reset the counters to zero,  
select Reset Counters.  
V I E W I N G  
U S A G E  
MDI NowUnTlEoSad from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
58  
                     
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
TIP If there are no blank buttons on the current  
Favorites page, press Right on the 5-way to  
scroll through the other pages. If all your  
favorites are full, you can delete a favorite to  
make room for a new one (see Deleting a  
favorite button).  
3
Enter a label for the favorite:  
• If the entry is for an existing contact,  
select Lookup. Start entering the last  
name of the contact, and select the  
contact when it appears in the lookup  
list.  
DID YOU KNOW? If you’re upgrading from a  
previous Treo smartphone, your favorites may  
be transferred along with your other info.  
However, you may need to rearrange the  
order in which your favorites appear by  
opening the Record menu and then selecting  
Edit Favorites Pages.  
• If the entry is for a new contact, enter  
the label, press Down , and enter  
the number.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can assign a special  
ringtone for a contact. See Assigning a caller  
ID ringtone for details.  
Creating a speed-dial favorite button  
1
2
Press Phone  
.
Use the 5-way to select a blank favorite  
button.  
4
(Optional) Enter a Quick Key, which you  
can press and hold from the Phone  
D E F I N I N G F A V O R I T E B U T T O N S  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
application to instantly dial this  
speed-dial number.  
5
6
7
Enter a label for the favorite and enter  
any other necessary information on the  
screen.  
5
(Optional) Select More, and then select  
advanced options:  
(Optional) Enter a Quick Key, which  
you can press and hold to open the  
favorite from the Phone application.  
Extra Digits: Defines additional digits  
to dial, such as a password or  
extension. To enter a one-second  
pause, insert a comma between digits.  
To add a longer pause, enter more  
commas.  
Select OK.  
DID YOU KNOW? When creating a Message or  
Email favorite, you can enter multiple  
addresses; simply separate each address with  
a comma. This is an easy way to send  
messages to a group of people.  
Dial Extra Digits Automatically: Dials  
predefined extra digits immediately  
after dialing the phone number, when  
checked.  
Editing a favorite button  
6
Select OK.  
1
2
Press Phone  
.
Use the 5-way  
Favorites.  
to access  
Creating other types of favorite buttons  
1
2
Press Phone  
.
3
Highlight the favorite button you want to  
edit.  
Use the 5-way  
to access  
Favorites.  
4
5
Press Menu  
.
3
4
Select a blank button.  
Select Edit Favorites Button on the  
Select the Types pick list and select Call  
Log, Dial Pad, Application, Message,  
Email, or Web Link.  
Record menu.  
6
Make the desired changes. For  
example, you can add a Quick Key,  
which you can press and hold to  
D E F I N I N G F A V O R I T E B U T T O N S  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                   
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
instantly open the favorite from the  
Phone application.  
Using a phone  
headset  
7
Select OK.  
TIP You can also organize your buttons on  
various Favorites pages. Open the Record  
menu and select Edit Favorites Pages. Drag  
and drop the buttons into a new slot. To move  
a favorite to another page, drag the button  
onto the page icon at the bottom of the  
screen.  
You can connect a phone headset for  
hands-free operation. If you need to use  
your phone while driving and this is  
permitted in your area, we recommend  
using a phone headset (wired stereo  
headset included) or a hands-free car kit  
(sold separately).  
Deleting a favorite button  
In addition to the stereo headset included  
with your smartphone, your smartphone is  
compatible with the following types of  
headsets that are sold separately:  
1
2
Press Phone  
.
Use the 5-way  
to access  
Favorites.  
3
Highlight the favorite button you want to  
delete.  
•
Wired headsets with a 2.5mm  
connector (3-pin or 4-pin)  
4
5
Press Menu  
.
•
Wireless headsets and car kits enabled  
with Bluetooth 1.1 or 1.2 wireless  
technology  
Select Edit Favorites Button on the  
Record menu.  
6
7
Select Delete.  
TIP The headset designed for Treo 180/270/  
300 devices is not compatible with your Treo  
755P smartphone.  
Select OK.  
Check the specifications for your headset  
or car kit to confirm compatibility. When in  
U S I N G  
A
P H O N E H E A D S E T  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
doubt, ask the manufacturer if the product  
•
•
•
Switch between two calls (if the second  
call is incoming)  
is compatible with Treo 755P smartphones.  
To find compatible hands-free devices, go  
to www.palm.com/mypalm/755pverizon.  
Join two calls in a conference (if the  
second call is outgoing)  
NOTE You cannot use a headset with  
Bluetooth wireless technology to listen to  
music files.  
Hang up all calls in progress  
TIP The headset button may work differently  
on other headsets.  
Using a wired headset  
Connecting to a Bluetooth® hands-free  
device  
Microphone  
Headset  
button  
KEY TERM Partnership Two devices—for  
example, your smartphone and a hands-free  
device—that can connect because each  
device finds the same passkey on the other  
device. Once you form a partnership with a  
device, you don’t need to enter a passkey to  
connect with that device again. Partnership is  
also known as paired relationship, pairing,  
trusted device, and trusted pair.  
Speakers  
When using the headset that is included  
with your smartphone, you can press the  
headset button to perform any of the  
following tasks:  
Once you set up a partnership with a  
Bluetooth headset or car kit, you can  
communicate with that device whenever it  
is turned on and within range. Bluetooth  
range is up to 30 feet/10 meters in  
•
•
•
Answer an incoming call  
Answer a call-waiting call  
Pick up a call that is on hold  
optimum environmental conditions.  
Performance and range may be reduced by  
U S I N G  
A
P H O N E H E A D S E T  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
physical obstacles, radio interference from  
nearby electronic equipment, and other  
factors.  
3
(Optional) Enter a device name that  
identifies your smartphone when it is  
discovered by other Bluetooth devices.  
NOTE Use the same device name for all  
your Bluetooth connections. If you change  
the device name, you need to recreate any  
partnerships you already created.  
TIP If you hear a headset buzz or experience  
poor microphone performance, your headset  
may be incompatible with your smartphone.  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Prepare your  
headset or car kit to accept a connection  
from another Bluetooth device. See the  
documentation that came with your  
hands-free device for instructions.  
4
5
Keep Visibility set to Hidden, and then  
select Setup Devices.  
Select Hands-free Setup.  
1
Press Applications  
and select  
Bluetooth or tap the Bluetooth  
icon in the title bar.  
2
Select Bluetooth On.  
6
Follow the onscreen instructions to  
create a partnership with the specific  
hands-free device. When prompted,  
enter a passkey.  
IMPORTANT Some hands-free devices  
have a predefined passkey; if so, you can  
find the passkey in the documentation for  
U S I N G  
A
P H O N E H E A D S E T  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
that device. Other devices provide a screen You can tell the connection is successful  
where you enter a passkey that you make  
up. In either case, you must use the same  
when you see a light blue headset icon in  
the title bar of the Phone application. You  
passkey on both your smartphone and your can now use your smartphone with the  
hands-free device. We recommend that  
where possible, you make up a passkey of  
16 alphanumeric characters (letters and  
numerals only) to improve the security of  
your smartphone. The longer the passkey,  
the more difficult it is for the passkey to be  
deciphered.  
Bluetooth hands-free device.  
Using a Bluetooth hands-free device  
After you create a partnership with your  
Bluetooth hands-free device and you turn it  
on within range (up to 30 feet/10 meters),  
your smartphone automatically routes all  
calls to the hands-free device instead of to  
the earpiece on your smartphone. When a  
call comes in, your smartphone rings and  
the hands-free device beeps. Even if you  
answer the call on your smartphone, the  
call goes to the hands-free device. If you  
prefer to route calls to the earpiece on your  
smartphone, you can change the settings  
on your smartphone to do this; see  
7
After you finish setting up the device,  
select Done to return to Trusted  
Devices View.  
NOTE For some car kits, you need to  
initiate a Bluetooth connection from your  
smartphone to complete the partnership  
process. To do this, highlight the car kit in  
Trusted Devices View, press Menu  
,
Customizing advanced settings for your  
hands-free device.  
and then select Connect.  
8
(Optional) Enable advanced hands-free  
TIP If you’re using a Bluetooth hands-free  
device and you want to return to the earpiece  
during a call, select Cancel Bluetooth in  
Active Call View. To return the call to the  
hands-free device, open the Options menu  
and select Connect Bluetooth.  
features by pressing the multifunction  
button (MFB) on the hands-free device.  
U S I N G  
A
P H O N E H E A D S E T  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
The features of your hands-free device vary Customizing advanced settings for your  
by model. Check the documentation for  
your hands-free device for details about  
these features. Your smartphone can  
support the following actions, provided that  
your hands-free device also supports them:  
hands-free device  
You can set whether your hands-free  
device automatically answer calls, provided  
the device supports this feature.  
1
Press Applications  
Prefs  
and select  
•
•
Answer an incoming call  
.
Hang up a call and answer a call-waiting  
call  
2
3
Select Hands-free.  
Do one of the following:  
•
Place a call on hold and answer a  
call-waiting call  
To send all calls to your hands-free  
device: Check the Always route calls  
to handsfree box. Select the Auto  
answer pick list and select whether you  
want your hands-free device to  
•
•
Hang up a single call  
Transfer an outgoing call from the  
earpiece on your smartphone to the  
hands-free device  
automatically answer incoming calls and  
how quickly it answers.  
•
•
Ignore an incoming call  
Redial the last number you called from  
the hands-free device  
To choose between the earpiece on  
your smartphone and your  
hands-free device on a call-by-call  
basis: Uncheck the Always route calls  
to handsfree box. When the phone  
rings, you can answer the call with your  
hands-free device by pressing the  
multifunction button on your hands-free  
device, or you can answer the call with  
the earpiece on your smartphone by  
DID YOU KNOW? If you have more than one  
Bluetooth hands-free device, the last one you  
connected to becomes the active device. To  
switch between devices, disconnect the  
active device before you try to connect to the  
other device.  
U S I N G  
A
P H O N E H E A D S E T  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
using the controls on your smartphone  
(see Receiving calls).  
TIP If you select the Show Wallpaper option,  
you can still access the Dial Pad. From the  
Phone application’s Main View, press Send to  
open the Redial list, and then select Dial Pad.  
4
Select Done.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can also set the  
background for the Calendar Agenda View.  
See Customizing display options for your  
calendar for details.  
Customizing phone  
settings  
Customizing the Phone application’s  
Main View  
Phone Display Options let you customize  
the appearance and entry mode of the  
Phone application’s Main View.  
1
2
3
Press Phone  
.
Press Menu  
.
Select Options, and then select Phone  
Display Options.  
Typing: Sets whether typing enters  
numbers in the Dial Pad or starts a  
contact search.  
4
Set any of the following options:  
Show…: Sets whether the Dial Pad or  
wallpaper appears in the Phone  
application’s Main View. If you select  
Show Wallpaper, select the thumbnail  
image and then select an image to use  
as wallpaper.  
TIP If you select the Typing starts contacts  
search option, you can still enter numbers in  
the Dial Pad by pressing Option before  
entering the first number.  
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E  
Download froSmE TWTwI NwG.SSomanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
66  
                               
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
Show Calendar event: Sets whether  
the current event from the Calendar  
application appears in the Phone  
application’s Main View. When this  
option is enabled, you can then select  
this event to jump to the Calendar  
application.  
2
3
Press Menu  
.
Select Options, and then select Sound  
Preferences.  
4
Select the Application pick list and  
select Ring Tones.  
Show Favorite buttons: Sets whether  
Favorites appear in the Phone  
application’s Main View.  
Rows: Sets the number of favorite  
button rows that appear in the Phone  
application’s Main View.  
5
Select OK.  
5
6
Select the Volume pick list and select  
the volume level.  
Selecting ringtones  
Select the Vibrate pick list and select  
how you want your smartphone to  
vibrate upon an incoming call.  
You can set various tones for various types  
of incoming calls.  
7
8
(Optional) Check the Escalate ring  
tone volume box if you want the ring to  
play softly and then increase to full  
volume the longer it rings.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can download any  
compatible ringtone directly to your  
smartphone (see Downloading files from a  
web page). You can also download ringtones  
to your computer and then email them to your  
smartphone.  
Select ringtones from the following pick  
lists:  
Known Caller: An incoming call from  
someone in your Contacts or Favorites.  
1
Press Phone  
.
P H O N E S E T T I N G S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals CSUeaSrTcOhMAInZdI NDGownload.  
67  
                             
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
Unknown Caller: An incoming call  
• To play a sound, select it with the  
5-way  
• To delete a sound, highlight it and  
press Backspace  
from someone identified by caller  
ID who is not in your Contacts or  
Favorites.  
.
.
Roaming: A special tone for incoming  
calls when you’re outside your home  
mobile network.  
• To send a sound, highlight it and  
select Send.  
6
Select Done twice.  
9
Select Done.  
TIP You can also create a new sound by  
selecting New in Sound & Alerts Preferences.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can assign a ringtone to a  
contact or an entire category of contacts.  
Ringtones assigned to individual contacts  
override the ringtone assigned to a category  
of contacts.  
Selecting Phone alert tones  
You can set various tones for various types  
of alerts.  
1
2
3
Press Phone  
.
Creating and managing ringtones  
Press Menu  
.
You can also record sounds and use them  
as ringtones.  
Select Options, and then select Sound  
Preferences.  
1
2
3
Press Phone  
.
4
Select the Application pick list and  
select Phone Alerts.  
Press Menu  
.
Select Options, and then select Sound  
Preferences.  
4
5
Select Manage.  
Do one of the following:  
• To record a sound, select New.  
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E  
Download froSmE TWTwI NwG.SSomanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
68  
               
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
Adjusting call volume  
While a call is in progress, press the  
Volume button on the side of your  
smartphone to adjust the call volume.  
5
6
Select the Volume pick list and select  
the volume level.  
Volume button  
Side button  
Select the Vibrate pick list and select  
how you want your smartphone to  
vibrate upon an incoming call.  
7
Select alert tones from the following  
pick lists:  
Adjusting ringer volume  
Voicemail Alert: Indicates that a new  
When a call is not in progress and music is  
not playing, press the Volume button on  
the side of your Treo smartphone to adjust  
ringer volume, and then press the Side  
button to confirm your selection.  
voicemail message has arrived.  
Coverage in/out: Indicates that you  
moved into or out of a coverage area.  
Signal faded: Indicates that the signal  
lost strength and a call was dropped.  
Assigning a caller ID ringtone  
8
Select Done.  
Caller ID ringtones can let you know who is  
calling before you even look at your  
smartphone. This is a great way to identify  
P H O N E S E T T I N G S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals CSUeaSrTcOhMAInZdI NDGownload.  
69  
                           
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
calls from important people in your life and  
to screen calls you’d prefer not to answer.  
TIP You can assign a ringtone to an entire  
category of contacts. For example, use a  
special ringtone for categories such as Family,  
Work, or Golf Buddies. Select the category  
pick list in the upper-right corner and select  
Edit Categories. Select the category, and  
then select the ringtone on the Edit Category  
screen.  
1
2
3
Press Phone  
.
Select the Contacts favorite button.  
Open the contact to whom you want to  
give a caller ID ringtone.  
4
5
Select Edit.  
Select the Ringtone pick list and select  
Assigning a caller ID photo  
a tone for this contact entry.  
1
2
3
Press Phone  
.
Select the Contacts favorite button.  
Open the contact to whom you want to  
give a caller ID photo.  
4
Select Edit.  
6
Select OK.  
5
Select the Picture box and do one of  
the following:  
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E  
Download froSmE TWTwI NwG.SSomanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
70  
             
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
• Select Camera to take a photo and  
add it to this contact entry when you  
save the photo (if your smartphone  
includes a camera).  
1
2
3
Press Phone  
.
Press Menu  
.
Select Options and then select Dial  
Preferences.  
• Select Photos and select an existing  
photo that you want to assign to this  
contact.  
4
Set any of the following options:  
Dialing from North America: Formats  
phone numbers using North American  
conventions (XXX-XXX-XXXX).  
6
Select Done.  
DID YOU KNOW? If you assign pictures to your  
contacts in Microsoft Outlook® (sold  
Always dial 1 in front of the area  
code: Adds a 1 in front of 10-digit phone  
numbers. This option is available only  
when North American Dialing is  
enabled.  
separately) or Palm® Desktop software and  
you install the desktop software from the  
Palm Software Installation CD, the pictures  
are automatically added to your contact  
entries on your smartphone when you sync. If  
you use third-party synchronization software,  
picture sync may not be supported. Check  
with the software vendor for information.  
International Prefix: Replaces the +  
sign in front of International phone  
numbers with the specified number.  
To 7 digit numbers: Adds a prefix to  
7-digit numbers. For example, enter  
your own area code to automatically add  
your area code when you dial local  
numbers.  
Setting your dialing preferences  
Dialing preferences let you assign a prefix  
to your phone numbers. For example, you  
can automatically dial a 1 before all 10-digit  
phone numbers. You can add a different  
prefix based on the length of the phone  
number.  
To (6), (5), (4), digit numbers: Adds a  
prefix to numbers with the specified  
number of digits. For example, if all the  
phone numbers in your office begin  
with 555, followed by a 4-digit  
P H O N E S E T T I N G S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals CSUeaSrTcOhMAInZdI NDGownload.  
71  
         
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
extension, you can select 4, enter your  
area code, and then enter 555 as the  
prefix. When you want to call a  
colleague, simply enter the colleague’s  
4-digit extension. Your smartphone  
automatically dials the area code and  
555 plus the 4-digit extension. You can  
also create contact entries with just the  
extension number and then dial the  
number from your Contacts list.  
5
6
Select one of the following:  
5
Select OK.  
Location ON: Enables the network to  
determine your longitude and latitude  
position at any time in order to provide  
location-specific services.  
Choosing your privacy settings  
To maintain privacy, you can encrypt  
conversations when you place or receive  
calls, provided that this feature is  
supported by the network. You can also  
choose whether your longitude and latitude  
position are available to the network and  
third-party applications at all times or only  
during an emergency call.  
911 Only: Restricts your location  
information to emergency services only.  
Select OK.  
When Voice Privacy is enabled, a voice  
privacy icon appears in Active Call View.  
The voice privacy icon does not appear  
when a call is not in progress or if Voice  
Privacy service is not available in your area.  
1
2
3
Press Phone  
.
Press Menu  
.
When Location ON is selected, the  
location  
appears in Applications View. When 911  
Only is selected, the radiating waves  
disappear from the location icon.  
Select Options, and then select Phone  
Preferences.  
icon with radiating waves  
4
Check the Enable Voice Privacy box  
(voice conversations will be encrypted).  
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E  
Download froSmE TWTwI NwG.SSomanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
72  
                         
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
Enabling TTY  
5
Select OK. A red TTY icon appears in  
the title bar of the Phone application  
whenever TTY is enabled.  
TTY (also known as a TDD or Text  
Telephone) is a telecommunications device  
that enables you to communicate by  
telephone if you are deaf, hard of hearing,  
or have speech or language disabilities.  
Turning on the HAC Setting  
CAUTION Do not turn on the Hearing Aid  
Compatibility setting unless you use a  
hearing aid with a telecoil. Using this  
setting without a hearing aid or with a  
hearing aid without a telecoil may be  
harmful to your hearing.  
Your device is compatible with select TTY  
devices. You can connect a TTY/TDD  
machine to your device through the  
headset jack while this mode is enabled.  
Please check with the manufacturer of your  
TTY device for connectivity information and  
to ensure that the TTY device supports  
digital wireless transmission.  
When the HAC (Hearing Aid Compatibility)  
setting is on, your smartphone sends the  
audio from your phone calls to the telecoil  
rather than to the microphone of your  
hearing aid. You are likely to hear calls  
much better because volume is increased  
and background noise and feedback are  
diminished. The HAC setting improves only  
the calls you listen to through the earpiece.  
It does not affect calls heard on the  
speakerphone or with a car kit or headset.  
HAC requires extra battery power, so watch  
your battery consumption when it's turned  
on.  
1
2
3
Press Phone  
.
Press Menu  
.
Select Options and then select Phone  
Preferences.  
4
Select the TTY/TDD pick list and select  
one of the following settings:  
TTY Full: Sends and receives text.  
TTY + Talk: Sends voice and receives  
text.  
TTY + Hear: Sends text and receives  
voice.  
Off: Sends and receives voice.  
P H O N E S E T T I N G S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals CSUeaSrTcOhMAInZdI NDGownload.  
73  
                 
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
1
2
3
Press Phone  
Press Menu  
.
4
Select a new band, if available.  
.
Select Options and then select Phone  
Preferences.  
4
5
Check the Hearing Aid Compatibility  
box.  
Select OK.  
Manually selecting the wireless band  
5
Select OK.  
You can use Select Band to search for  
service in a different frequency.  
What are all those  
icons?  
IMPORTANT You should only change this  
setting if a customer service representative  
from Verizon Wireless recommends that  
you do so.  
You can monitor the status of several items  
using icons in the title bar of the Phone  
application:  
1
2
3
Press Phone  
.
Press Menu  
.
Select Options and then select Select  
Band.  
W H A T  
A L L  
I C O N S ?  
A R E DownTloHaOdSfrEom Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
74  
                     
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
Your phone is off.  
Your phone is on and you are in a  
Verizon Wireless coverage area.  
If you are outside a coverage  
area, No Service, Extended  
Network, or Roaming appears  
instead. No Service means that  
there is no coverage at all and  
Roaming means that another  
wireless service provider’s  
network is available. When  
you turn off your phone, Phone  
Off appears.  
You are in an area that supports  
NationalAccess (1xRTT) data  
services.  
You are in an area that supports  
BroadbandAccess (EVDO) data  
services.  
Your phone is on and connected  
to a NationalAccess network, but  
you are not actively transmitting  
data. You can still make and  
answer calls.  
You are outside a Verizon  
Wireless coverage area and are  
roaming on another wireless  
service provider’s network. This  
icon appears in addition to the  
word Roaming. The icon may  
flash if the provider is not on the  
Verizon Wireless preferred  
roaming list.  
Your phone is on and connected  
to a BroadbandAccess network,  
but you are not actively  
transmitting data. You can still  
make and answer calls.  
Your phone is on and a  
NationalAccess data connection  
is active. You can still make calls,  
but you cannot answer calls  
(incoming calls go to voicemail).  
When you make a call the data  
transmission is automatically  
interrupted.  
Your phone is on. The bars  
display the signal strength. The  
stronger the signal, the more  
bars that appear. If you are  
outside a coverage area, no bars  
appear.  
W H A T A R E  
T H O S E I C O N S ?  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And DAowL Lnload.  
75  
                               
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
Your phone is on and a  
BroadbandAccess data  
Voice Privacy is enabled, you are  
in a service area that supports  
this feature, and a call is in  
progress. When this feature is  
active, voice calls are encrypted  
for added privacy.  
connection is active. You can still  
make or answer calls. When you  
make or answer a call, the data  
transmission is automatically  
interrupted, and then it resumes  
when you end the call.  
The Location setting is on and  
your longitude and latitude  
position are available to the  
network and third-party  
applications. When you select  
the 911 Only setting, the  
radiating waves disappear from  
this icon and your location is  
available only during emergency  
calls.  
You have new voicemail  
messages. You can select this  
icon to retrieve your messages.  
You have a new alert, such as a  
Calendar alarm or a new text  
message. To view the alert,  
press and hold Center  
select the icon. See Viewing and  
using the alerts.  
or  
®
The Bluetooth wireless  
technology icon appears in gray  
when this feature is off, in blue  
when this feature is on, and in  
reverse blue when your  
smartphone is communicating  
with another Bluetooth device.  
TTY/TDD Mode is active. Use  
this mode to communicate by  
telephone if you are deaf or hard  
of hearing or if you have speech  
or language disabilities.  
W H A T  
A L L  
I C O N S ?  
A R E DownTloHaOdSfrEom Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
76  
                     
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
This icon replaces the Bluetooth  
icon when your smartphone is  
connected to a Bluetooth  
Your battery is fully charged and  
your smartphone is not  
connected to the charger.  
headset or car kit. This icon  
appears in dark blue when a call  
is in progress and in light blue  
when a call is not in progress.  
You have new text or multimedia  
messages. The numbers next to  
the icon indicate the number of  
unread messages in your Inbox.  
You can select this icon to  
This icon replaces the Bluetooth  
icon when a dial-up networking  
connection using Bluetooth  
wireless technology is active.  
retrieve your messages.  
Displays the current (or next)  
event from the Calendar  
Your battery is partially drained.  
When the battery drains to 20%  
of its capacity, the icon changes  
from blue to red. At 10% of its  
capacity, you begin to receive  
warning messages, and at 5% of  
its capacity, the smartphone  
application. If you have an event  
conflict during the current time  
period, a red bar appears next to  
the event description. To jump to  
the current event in the Calendar  
application, select the Calendar  
status line (see Displaying your  
calendar for details).  
beeps (if the Ringer switch is set  
to Sound On  
) and the icon  
changes from red to clear.  
Your battery is charging. The  
lightning bolt turns from red to  
green when the battery is fully  
charged and your smartphone  
remains connected to the  
charger.  
W H A T A R E  
T H O S E I C O N S ?  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And DAowL Lnload.  
77  
                 
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
KEY TERM 1xRTT (Single carrier [1x] radio  
transmission technology): A wireless  
technology that can provide fast data transfer  
and Internet access with average speeds of  
60–80Kbps and bursts up to 144Kbps.  
KEY TERM EVDO (Evolution Data Optimized): A  
wireless broadband technology that is  
designed for very high-speed data transfer  
with average download speeds of 400–  
700Kbps, capable of reaching speeds up  
to1.8Mbps, and upload speeds up to 156Kbps.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can tap the Bluetooth icon  
to quickly turn Bluetooth wireless features on  
and off.  
TIP To display the remaining battery power, tap  
the battery icon at the top of the screen.  
W H A T  
A L L  
I C O N S ?  
A R E DownTloHaOdSfrEom Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78  
CHAPTER  
4
Your email and other  
messages  
You already know how efficient email and messaging are for  
staying in touch. Now your Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone  
brings you a new level of convenience: email on the go. Enjoy  
the ease and speed of communicating with friends, family, and  
colleagues anywhere you can access the Verizon Wireless data  
network.  
You can send photos to your friends and family, or create  
Microsoft® Word or Excel® files and send them to your  
colleagues. You can also receive attachments to view and edit  
at your convenience.  
Benefits  
•
Access email on the go  
•
Save messages from your  
computer to view at a convenient  
time  
•
Send and receive photos, sound  
files, Word and Excel files, and  
more  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
In this chapter  
Which application should I use?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
The Wireless Sync application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
The VersaMail® application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
Which application  
should I use?  
TIP An email application is not an email  
provider. It works with an account from a  
provider to transfer messages to  
your smartphone.  
KEY TERM Email provider The service you  
use to send and receive email. Your email  
provider’s name appears between the @  
symbol and the dot symbol in your email  
address.  
Your smartphone includes two email  
applications: the VersaMail® application  
(called Email in Applications View), and the  
Wireless Sync application. You can also  
access web-based email, like Yahoo! Mail  
or Hotmail, from the web browser on your  
smartphone.  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN You must activate  
data services on your Verizon Wireless  
account before you can use email on your  
smartphone.  
I want to…  
Use this app…  
Check free web mail, such as Hotmail, Gmail, or Yahoo! Web browser  
Check fee-based Internet mail, such as Yahoo! Mail Plus Wireless Sync or VersaMail  
Sync my email and organizer info with my company’s  
Exchange server  
Wireless Sync or VersaMail  
Sync my email with my company’s Domino server  
Wireless Sync or VersaMail  
VersaMail  
Push my email and organizer info from my company’s  
Exchange server using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®  
Check messages from multiple email addresses  
VersaMail  
W H I C H  
I
U S E ?  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals SeAarPcPhLAI CnAdTDI oOwNnSloHaOd.U L D  
81  
               
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
I want to…  
Use this app…  
Sync my email and organizer info with my company’s  
Lotus Notes/Domino server  
Wireless Sync  
Connect to my company’s Wireless Sync server  
Wireless Sync  
Access email on my smartphone, my computer, and the Wireless Sync  
Verizon Wireless website  
Use the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) while  
sending and receiving messages  
Wireless Sync  
learn how to send and receive mail, see the  
documentation at the following location:  
http://www.wirelesssync.vzw.com.  
The Wireless Sync  
application  
How do I get started?  
In addition to sending and receiving email  
messages, you can also use Wireless Sync  
to sync your email and other personal  
information when you’re away from your  
computer.  
1
If you are setting up a personal email  
account, or if your corporate email  
account does not use a Microsoft  
Exchange Server or a Domino server,  
gather the following info, and then  
follow the steps in Setting up Wireless  
Sync to work with Internet email.  
The sections that follow cover how to enter  
your email account settings in the Wireless  
Sync application. To use the Wireless Sync  
application, you must subscribe to the  
Wireless Sync feature from Verizon  
• Wireless Sync password (if you have  
one)  
• Mobile phone number  
Wireless (additional charges may apply).  
For more info on Wireless Sync and to  
• Email address and password  
T H E  
S Y N C  
W I R E LDEoSwS nload frAomP PWL IwCwA.TSIoOmNanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
82  
           
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
• Incoming mail server name  
• Incoming mail server port number  
• Mail protocol: POP or IMAP  
Setting up Wireless Sync to work with  
Internet email  
In the Wireless Sync application, all  
personal email accounts, such as Earthlink,  
AOL, or Yahoo! Mail Plus, are considered  
Internet email accounts. In addition, any  
corporate email account that does not use  
a Microsoft Exchange or Domino server is  
referred to as an Internet email account.  
2
If your corporate email account uses a  
Microsoft Exchange Server or a Domino  
server, gather the following info, and  
then follow the steps in Setting up  
Wireless Sync to work with corporate  
email.  
1
2
Press Wireless Sync  
.
• Wireless Sync password (if you have  
one)  
Select Start to download the Wireless  
Sync software to your smartphone. (The  
download takes a few minutes.)  
• Mobile phone number  
• Email address and password  
3
4
When asked if your company has a sync  
server, leave the box unchecked, and  
then select Next.  
3
If your corporate email account uses a  
Wireless Sync server which connects to  
a Microsoft Exchange Server or a  
Domino server, gather the following  
info, and then follow the steps in Setting  
up Wireless Sync to work with a  
Select Ye s , No, or Forgot to indicate  
whether you have a Wireless Sync  
password. If you select No, your  
smartphone’s web browser opens and  
you are taken through a series of steps  
to create an account. If you select  
Forgot, Verizon Wireless sends a  
temporary password to your  
corporate Wireless Sync server.  
• The URL for the Wireless Sync server  
• Your corporate login and password  
smartphone.  
DID YOU KNOW? Depending on your service  
agreement and rate plan, data fees may apply  
when downloading the Wireless Sync  
software.  
5
Set the following Account Setup info,  
and then select Next:  
T H E W I R E L E S S  
A P P L I C A T I O N  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And DSoYwNnCload.  
83  
                     
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
Mobile number: Enter your  
smartphone’s phone number, if it is not  
already filled in.  
8
Set the following Email Setup info, and  
then select Next:  
Set up Internet email: Select this  
setting to set up Wireless Sync to work  
with your existing Internet email  
account.  
Password: Enter the password for your  
Wireless Sync account.  
Read Terms & Conditions: Select this  
button to read about your Wireless Sync  
account.  
Email Address: Enter the email address  
you want Wireless Sync to access.  
Password: Enter the password you use  
to access this email address.  
I agree to the terms & conditions:  
Check the box to indicate that you agree  
to the terms and conditions. You cannot  
continue unless you check this box.  
9
If Wireless Sync recognizes your mail  
settings, the first sync begins and you  
are done with the setup process.  
NOTE You are prompted to scribble on the  
screen to create a random number for  
encryption.  
If Wireless Sync does not recognize  
your mail settings, enter the following  
information, and then select Next:  
6
Set the following Account Setup info,  
and then select Next:  
Server name: Enter the name of your  
incoming mail server, such as  
mail.myisp.com.  
Confirm home time zone: Select the  
pick list and select the time zone where  
you live.  
Port: Enter the port number for your  
incoming mail server, such as 110 (POP)  
or 143 (IMAP).  
Enable weather info for my ZIP code:  
Enter the ZIP code where you live if you  
want to receive local weather reports.  
POP: If you are connecting to a POP  
server, check the POP box. If you are  
connecting to an IMAP server, leave this  
7
Select OK to continue.  
T H E  
S Y N C  
W I R E LDEoSwS nload frAomP PWL IwCwA.TSIoOmNanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
84  
       
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
box empty. If you are not sure which  
type of server you’re connecting to,  
contact your email provider.  
TIP The Wireless Sync and VersaMail  
applications require the correct protocol,  
server, and security settings to send and  
receive email. Your email provider can easily  
provide these settings.  
Leave messages on server: Check this  
box if you want to leave a copy of your  
messages on the mail server after you  
download them to your smartphone. If  
you want to delete the messages from  
your mail server after downloading  
them to your smartphone, leave this box  
empty.  
Setting up Wireless Sync to work with  
corporate email  
If your company uses a Microsoft  
Exchange Server or a Domino server,  
follow these steps to set up your email  
account settings in the Wireless Sync  
application. If your company uses a  
different type of mail server, see Setting up  
Wireless Sync to work with Internet email  
or Setting up Wireless Sync to work with a  
corporate Wireless Sync server for  
instructions.  
10 When the Congratulations message  
appears, select Done.  
11 During the first sync you are prompted  
to select one of the following:  
Refresh: Replaces Calendar and  
Contacts on your smartphone with  
information on the server. (Not  
recommended for POP and IMAP  
users.)  
1
2
Press Wireless Sync  
.
Select Start to download the Wireless  
Sync software to your smartphone. (The  
download takes a few minutes.)  
Merge: Merges items on your  
smartphone with items on the server.  
3
4
When asked if your company has a sync  
server, leave the box unchecked, and  
then select Next.  
The first sync can take several minutes;  
once complete, Wireless Sync is ready to  
keep you up-to-date.  
Select Ye s , No, or Forgot to indicate  
whether you have a Wireless Sync  
T H E W I R E L E S S  
A P P L I C A T I O N  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And DSoYwNnCload.  
85  
         
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
password. If you select No, your  
smartphone’s web browser opens and  
you are taken through a series of steps  
to create an account. If you select  
Forgot, Verizon Wireless sends a  
temporary password to your  
smartphone.  
6
Set the following Account Setup info,  
and then select Next:  
Confirm home time zone: Select the  
pick list and select the time zone where  
you live.  
Enable weather info for my ZIP code:  
Enter the ZIP code where you live if you  
want to receive local weather reports.  
5
Set the following Account Setup info,  
and then select Next:  
7
Set the following Email Setup info, and  
then select Next:  
Mobile number: Enter your  
smartphone’s phone number, if it is not  
already filled in.  
Set up Exchange or Domino email:  
Select this setting to set up Wireless  
Sync to work with your corporate email  
account.  
Password: Enter the password for your  
Wireless Sync account.  
Read Terms & Conditions: Select this  
button to read about your Wireless Sync  
account.  
Email Address: Enter the email address  
you want Wireless Sync to access. For  
example, if you want Wireless Sync to  
access your work email, enter the email  
address you use at work, such as  
[email protected].  
I agree to the terms & conditions:  
Check the box to indicate that you agree  
to the terms and conditions. You cannot  
continue unless you check this box.  
8
9
When the Congratulations message  
appears, select Done.  
NOTE You are prompted to scribble on the  
screen to create a random number for  
encryption.  
On your computer, go to  
www.wirelesssync.vzw.com/monitor to  
install the software that lets Wireless  
Sync work with your server.  
T H E  
S Y N C  
W I R E LDEoSwS nload frAomP PWL IwCwA.TSIoOmNanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
86  
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
10 During the first sync you are prompted  
4
5
Enter the URL for your company’s  
Wireless Sync server, and then select  
Next.  
to select one of the following:  
Refresh: Replaces Calendar and  
Contacts on your smartphone with  
information on the server.  
Select Ye s or No to indicate whether  
you have a Wireless Sync password. If  
you select No, your smartphone’s web  
browser opens and you are taken  
through a series of steps to create an  
account.  
Merge: Merges items on your  
smartphone with items on the server.  
The first sync can take several minutes;  
once complete, Wireless Sync is ready to  
keep you up-to-date.  
6
Set the following Account Setup info,  
and then select Next:  
Mobile number: Enter your corporate  
login in this field. This may be your  
username or may include your  
corporate domain information. Contact  
your Wireless Sync administrator for  
more information.  
Setting up Wireless Sync to work with a  
corporate Wireless Sync server  
If your company uses a Wireless Sync  
server to connect to your Microsoft  
Exchange Server or a Domino server,  
follow these steps to set up your email  
account settings in the Wireless Sync  
application.  
Password: Enter the corporate  
password.  
Read Terms & Conditions: Select this  
button to read about your Wireless Sync  
account.  
1
2
Press Wireless Sync  
.
Select Start to download the Wireless  
Sync software to your smartphone. (The  
download takes a few minutes.)  
I agree to the terms & conditions:  
Check the box to indicate that you agree  
to the terms and conditions. You cannot  
continue unless you check this box.  
3
Check the box asking if your company  
has a Wireless Sync server, and then  
select Next.  
T H E W I R E L E S S  
A P P L I C A T I O N  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And DSoYwNnCload.  
87  
         
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
7
Set the following Account Setup info,  
and then select Next:  
The VersaMail®  
application  
Confirm home time zone: Select the  
pick list and select the time zone where  
you live.  
Before you can use the VersaMail  
application, you need to install the  
VersaMail software and enter your email  
account settings. If you have multiple email  
accounts, you must enter settings for each  
email account.  
Enable weather info for my ZIP code:  
Enter the ZIP code where you live if you  
want to receive local weather reports.  
8
9
When the Congratulations message  
appears, select Done.  
After you install the VersaMail software,  
you can find additional information on using  
and customizing the VersaMail application  
in the User Guide for the VersaMail  
Application at www.palm.com/mypalm/  
755pverizon.  
During the first sync you are prompted  
to select one of the following:  
Refresh: Replaces Calendar and  
Contacts on your smartphone with  
information on the server.  
Merge: Merges items on your  
smartphone with items on the server.  
NOTE Your smartphone comes with the  
VersaMail application version 3.5.4. If you  
are using the VersaMail application version  
4.0 or higher, the instructions in this  
section do not apply to you. Follow the  
instructions that came with the VersaMail  
application version 4.0 instead.  
The first sync can take several minutes;  
once complete, Wireless Sync is ready to  
keep you up-to-date.  
®
T H E  
A P P L I C A T I O N  
V E R S ADMoAwInLload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
88  
       
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
How do I get started?  
• BellSouth  
1
Download the VersaMail application  
from www.palm.com/mypalm/  
755pverizon-bonus and install it on your  
smartphone. See Installing applications  
for details.  
• Cablevision  
• Charter  
• Comcast  
• CompuServe  
• Concentric  
• Covad  
2
If either of the following is true, read the  
User Guide for the VersaMail  
Application:  
• Cox Central  
• Cox East  
• Cox West  
• EarthLink  
• Gmail  
• You used the VersaMail application on  
®
your previous Palm OS device, and  
you want to transfer those settings to  
your smartphone.  
• You plan to use the VersaMail  
application to access an email account  
on a Microsoft Exchange server, a  
Lotus Notes server, or a Microsoft  
MAPI server.  
• Juno  
• Mail.com  
• NetZero  
• RCN  
3
If your email provider is listed here, then  
skip to Setting up the VersaMail  
application to work with common  
providers.  
• SBC/PacBell  
• SBC/Prodigy  
• Speakeasy  
• USA.net  
• Verizon DSL  
• Yahoo!  
• AOL  
• Apple.Mac  
• AT&T Global  
• AT&T Worldnet  
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
4
If your email provider’s name is not  
listed, then you need to obtain the  
following info from your system  
administrator or ISP, and then skip to  
Setting up the VersaMail application to  
work with other providers:  
Setting up the VersaMail application to  
work with common providers  
1
Press Applications  
and select  
Email  
to open the VersaMail  
application.  
2
3
If the Initial Setup dialog box appears,  
select Continue.  
• Mail protocol: POP or IMAP  
• Incoming and outgoing mail server  
names, such as mail.myisp.com  
Make up a name that describes this  
account and enter it in the Account  
Name field. For example, Work Email.  
• Incoming and outgoing mail server  
port numbers, such as 110 (incoming  
POP), 143 (incoming IMAP), or 25  
(outgoing POP or IMAP)  
4
Select the Mail Service pick list, select  
your email provider (such as Earthlink),  
and then select Next.  
• (If necessary) Security settings: APOP,  
ESMTP, SSL  
TIP The correct protocol, server, and security  
settings are required for the VersaMail  
application to be able to send and receive  
email for your account. Your email provider  
can easily provide these settings. You may be  
able to find this account setup info on your  
email provider’s website.  
5
Enter the username for your email  
account. Your username appears before  
the @ symbol in your email address.  
NOTE For some email providers, such as  
Gmail, your username is your entire email  
®
T H E  
A P P L I C A T I O N  
V E R S ADMoAwInLload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
90  
     
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
address. Check with your email provider if  
you are not sure what to enter as your  
username.  
your system administrator or ISP), and  
then select Next.  
6
Select the Password box, enter your  
email account password, select OK, and  
then select Next.  
7
Select Next, and then select Done.  
TIP To enter settings for another email  
account, open the Accounts menu and select  
Account Setup.  
6
Enter the username for your email  
account. Your username appears before  
the @ symbol in your email address.  
Setting up the VersaMail application to  
work with other providers  
NOTE For some email providers, such as  
Gmail, your username is your entire email  
address. Check with your email provider if  
you are not sure what to enter as your  
username.  
1
Press Applications  
and select  
Email  
to open the VersaMail  
application.  
2
3
If the Initial Setup dialog box appears,  
select Continue.  
Make up a name that describes this  
account and enter it in the Account  
Name field. For example, Work Email.  
7
8
9
Select the Password box, enter your  
email account password, select OK, and  
then select Next.  
4
5
Select the Mail Service pick list, and  
then select Other.  
Enter your email address and the  
names of the incoming and outgoing  
mail servers, and then select Next.  
Select the Protocol pick list, select POP  
or IMAP (based on the info you got from  
If your system administrator or ISP  
provided port numbers or security  
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
settings, select Advanced, and then  
4
Select one of the following:  
enter those settings.  
Send: Connects and sends all  
messages immediately. If the message  
cannot be sent for any reason, the  
message is stored in your Outbox.  
TIP You can also select Advanced to set more  
options for incoming and outgoing messages.  
Outbox: Stores the message to be sent  
later.  
10 Select Done.  
Creating and sending email messages  
Drafts: Saves the message so you can  
continue working on it at another time.  
1
2
From the Inbox, select New.  
Begin entering one of the following for  
the addressee:  
Cancel: Returns to the message list  
without saving the message.  
• Email address  
• First name  
• Last name  
TIP If you enter address info that matches one  
or more of your contacts, the VersaMail  
application displays the matching contacts. To  
accept a suggestion, select the correct  
contact. To send to a different address, keep  
entering the email address or name.  
DID YOU KNOW? The VersaMail application  
makes up to five attempts to send a message;  
if it is still not successful, an alert message  
appears and you must try to manually send  
the message again.  
3
Enter the subject and message text.  
TIP To move between fields, press Up or  
Down on the 5-way.  
®
T H E  
A P P L I C A T I O N  
V E R S ADMoAwInLload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
92  
                     
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
Adding attachments to your email  
messages  
4
5
On the Select Media screen, select the  
Album pick list to go to the album  
containing the photo or video you want,  
and then check the box to the left of the  
photo or video.  
You can attach several types of files to your  
email messages.  
Select Done.  
TIP To remove an attachment, select the file in  
the Attachments box, and then select  
Delete.  
TIP To attach more than one file to a message,  
repeat steps 3 and 4.  
Attaching photos and videos  
Attaching ringtones  
1
Create the message to which you want  
to attach the photo or video.  
1
Create the message to which you want  
to attach the ringtone.  
2
On the New Message screen, select  
2
On the New Message screen, select  
the red paper clip  
icon in the  
the red paper clip  
upper-right corner.  
icon in the  
upper-right corner.  
3
From the Type pick list, select Photo/  
3
From the Type pick list, select Sounds.  
Video.  
TIP Ringtones that are copy-protected appear  
in the Sounds application with a lock icon. You  
can use these ringtones on your phone, but  
you cannot send them as attachments.  
4
5
Select the ringtone you want, and then  
select Insert.  
Select Done.  
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
Attaching Word, Excel®, PowerPoint®, and Receiving and viewing email messages  
PDF files  
1
2
From any mailbox, select Get or Get &  
Send.  
1
Create the message to which you want  
to attach the file.  
From the Inbox, select the message you  
want to view.  
2
On the New Message screen, select  
the red paper clip  
icon in the  
upper-right corner.  
3
4
5
From the Type pick list, select  
Documents.  
Select the file you want on the  
Documents screen.  
Select Done.  
Attaching other types of files  
1
Create the message to which you want  
to attach the item.  
2
On the New Message screen, select  
the red paper clip  
icon in the  
upper-right corner.  
3
From the Type pick list, select the type  
of file to attach—for example, Address,  
Appointment, or Memo/Text.  
4
5
Select the item you want from the list in  
the Type box.  
3
If a large incoming message is  
truncated, select More  
.
Select Done.  
®
T H E  
A P P L I C A T I O N  
V E R S ADMoAwInLload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
94  
                 
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
2
Tap the attachment name at the bottom  
of the message screen to view it in the  
default viewer on your smartphone.  
TIP When viewing a message, tap the scroll  
arrows at the top of the screen to view the  
previous or next message.  
TIP You can also tap the folder icon to the left  
of the attachment name to open a menu of  
tasks you can do with the attachment,  
4
Select Done.  
including View, Install, or Unzip, depending  
on the attachment file type; Save to card to  
save the attachment to an expansion card; or  
select Viewer to select the application you  
want to use to view the attachment.  
Viewing attachments  
There are a number of attachment types  
you can open with the built-in software  
on your smartphone (for example,  
Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint  
files; PDF files; ringtones, and photos).  
3
When you finish with the attachment,  
select Done to return to the  
Attachments dialog box.  
1
From any folder, open the message with  
the attachment you want to view.  
Messages with downloaded  
NOTE If there is no Done button, press  
Applications and select Email  
attachments appear with a paper clip  
icon to the left of the message icon.  
to  
return to the account’s Inbox.  
TIP If an attachment is not downloaded  
because it is larger than your maximum  
message size, the paper clip icon does not  
appear, and the attachment does not display  
at the bottom of the message screen. Select  
More to download and display any  
attachments.  
Replying to or forwarding email  
messages  
When you respond to messages, you can  
select whether to include the original text  
(see Customizing your email settings).  
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
The message includes a meeting  
invitation.  
DID YOU KNOW? The VersaMail application  
sends all messages as plain text only, with all  
HTML tags stripped, even if you are  
forwarding or replying to a message that was  
originally received as HTML.  
This message has high priority.  
You can rearrange the message list to  
make it easier to find and view messages.  
1
2
From the Inbox or another folder, open  
the message you want to respond to.  
•
In the Inbox, select Sort, and then  
select one of the following: Sort by  
Date, Sort by Name, or Sort by  
Subject.  
In Message View, select Reply. Select  
whether to reply to just the sender or to  
reply to both the sender and all  
addressees on the message.  
•
To quickly switch between folders in list  
view, select the folder pick list at the  
top of the screen and select the desired  
folder.  
3
4
Enter your reply.  
Select Send.  
Managing your messages  
Deleting selected messages from the  
Inbox  
The status icons that appear near the  
messages in your Inbox indicate the  
following:  
When you delete a message from the  
Inbox, it moves to the Trash folder.  
The message is unread when the  
subject appears in bold.  
1
Select the bullet next to the icon of each  
message that you want to delete. To  
select adjacent messages, drag the  
stylus so it touches the bullet to the left  
of each message. Lift the stylus and  
drag again to select more adjacent  
messages.  
The message includes an  
attachment.  
®
T H E  
A P P L I C A T I O N  
V E R S ADMoAwInLload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
96  
                   
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
2
3
4
Press Menu  
.
Switching accounts  
Select Delete on the Message menu.  
If you create more than one email account  
in the VersaMail application, you need to  
switch from account to account to get,  
send, and otherwise manage the  
messages in each account.  
If a confirmation dialog box appears,  
select OK to confirm deletion.  
TIP To delete a single message, select the  
envelope icon next to the message, and then  
select Delete from the list.  
1
2
Press Menu  
.
Select Accounts, and then select an  
account.  
Deleting messages by date  
You can quickly delete a group of  
messages by selecting a range of dates.  
DID YOU KNOW? If you assign the VersaMail  
application to a quick button, you can press  
that button repeatedly to switch between your  
different email accounts.  
1
2
Press Menu  
.
Select Delete Old on the Message  
menu.  
Customizing your email settings  
3
Select the folder and a date range for  
the messages you want to delete.  
You can customize the VersaMail settings  
for each individual email account on your  
smartphone. The preferences you set apply  
only to the email account you are currently  
viewing. If you have multiple accounts,  
configure each account separately.  
4
5
Select OK.  
If a confirmation dialog box appears,  
select OK to confirm deletion.  
TIP To empty (or purge) the Trash folder, open  
the Message menu and select Empty Trash.  
For example, settings you can customize  
include the following:  
•
Set a schedule to automatically retrieve  
email messages  
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
•
•
Set preferences for how and when  
messages are retrieved  
3
Select Auto Sync.  
Add a signature to an outgoing message  
For complete information on all of the  
email settings you can customize, see the  
User Guide for the VersaMail Application at  
www.palm.com/mypalm/755pverizon.  
Scheduling Auto Sync  
4
5
Check the Auto-sync box.  
You can set up the VersaMail application to  
automatically download new email  
messages to your smartphone with the  
Auto Sync feature.  
Select the Every pick list and select the  
time interval, from 5 minutes to  
12 hours.  
NOTE If you set a more frequent interval,  
you may need to recharge your Treo battery  
more often.  
TIP You need to set up a separate Auto Sync  
schedule for each email account. This feature  
may not work with email accounts that require  
VPN connection. For additional info on using  
the VersaMail application with a VPN  
connection, see Connecting to a virtual private  
network (in this guide) and the User Guide for  
the VersaMail Application at www.palm.com/  
mypalm/755pverizon.  
6
Select the Start Time and End Time  
boxes, and then select the hour, the  
minute, and AM or PM to enter the time  
for the first and last Auto Sync to take  
place. Select OK.  
7
8
Select the days you want the schedule  
to be active. You can choose any  
number of days, but you can set up only  
one schedule for each email account.  
1
2
Press Menu  
.
Select Options, and then select  
Preferences.  
Select OK, and then select Get Mail.  
®
T H E  
A P P L I C A T I O N  
V E R S ADMoAwInLload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
98  
     
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
Setting preferences for getting messages  
TIP After you set up a scheduled Auto Sync  
and select Get Mail, from then on, only new  
messages are retrieved during Auto Sync.  
1
2
3
From any mailbox screen, press  
Menu  
.
Select Options, and then select  
Preferences.  
Selecting alert tones  
Select Incoming.  
When you schedule Auto Sync for a given  
account, you can choose a sound—such as  
a bird, a phone, or an alarm—to let you  
know when new email arrives.  
1
From any mailbox screen, press  
Menu  
.
2
Select Options, and then select  
Preferences.  
3
4
Select Alerts.  
Check the Alert me of new mail box.  
4
Set any of the following preferences,  
and then select OK:  
TIP To receive notifications of successful Auto  
Sync retrievals only, uncheck the Alert me of  
auto sync failures box. Leave the box  
checked if you want to receive notifications of  
both successful and failed Auto Sync  
retrievals.  
Get: Indicates whether to get message  
subjects only or entire messages.  
Ask Every Time: Indicates if you want  
to see a dialog box for selecting  
subjects only or entire messages each  
time you retrieve email. If the box is  
unchecked, messages are retrieved  
according to the option you select in the  
Get pick list.  
5
6
Select the Alert Sound pick list, and  
then select a sound. Your Treo plays a  
brief demo of the sound.  
Select OK.  
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
Unread messages (IMAP accounts  
only): Downloads only unread mail to  
your smartphone. If you don’t check this  
box and you select Get & Send, all the  
messages on your mail server are  
downloaded to your Inbox, including  
messages you’ve read.  
including attachments. The maximum  
message size that you can retrieve is  
60KB for the body text and  
approximately 5MB of total data for any  
attachments.  
Message Format: Sets the format for  
messages you retrieve.  
HTML: Displays messages sent in  
HTML format with basic formatting  
intact and displays other messages as  
plain text.  
TIP The POP protocol does not support  
retrieval of only unread mail from the server. If  
you have a POP email account, the VersaMail  
application downloads all messages  
regardless of whether you have read them,  
and regardless of whether the Unread  
messages box is checked.  
Text: Displays all messages as plain  
text, regardless of the format in which  
they were sent.  
Mail from last: Gets messages sent  
within the number of days you specify.  
Attaching a signature to a message  
You can attach a personal signature, with  
info like your company’s address and  
phone numbers, to the bottom of all  
messages you send.  
Download attachments: Automatically  
downloads files attached to email,  
except for attachments that exceed the  
maximum message size.  
1
From any mailbox screen, press  
Menu  
Maximum message size: Sets the  
maximum size of an incoming email  
message. Enter the size in kilobytes  
(KB). The default is 5KB, but you can  
enter any size up to 2048KB  
.
2
Select Options, and then select  
Preferences.  
[approximately 2 megabytes (MB)],  
®
T H E  
A P P L I C A T I O N  
V E R S ADMoAwInLload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
100  
   
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
3
4
5
Select Signature.  
continues to synchronize with Outlook on  
your computer.  
Check the Attach Signature box.  
Enter your signature information, and  
then select OK.  
For complete info on using a Microsoft  
Exchange ActiveSync account, see the  
User Guide for the VersaMail Application at  
www.palm.com/mypalm/755pverizon.  
Working with Microsoft Exchange  
ActiveSync  
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync works with  
the VersaMail application, Calendar, and  
Contacts on your smartphone to directly  
access corporate groupware information  
on a Microsoft Exchange 2003 or 2007  
server. Information in these applications is  
pushed directly from the server to your  
smartphone or wirelessly synchronizes  
directly with the server fro your  
Messaging  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your  
phone is turned on (see Turning your phone  
on and off) and that you are in a coverage  
area.  
You can use the Messaging application to  
exchange brief text messages (SMS) and  
multimedia messages (MMS) with other  
devices and email addresses that support  
these forms of messaging. Before you use  
your smartphone to send or receive  
messages, refer to your service plan for  
pricing and availability of messaging  
services.  
smartphone without using a desktop  
computer.  
When you create a Microsoft Exchange  
ActiveSync account in the VersaMail  
application, your email, calendar, and  
contact info is pushed from or syncs  
directly with the server; information does  
not sync with Microsoft Outlook® (sold  
separately) on your computer. Other  
information that is stored on your  
computer, such as tasks and memos,  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And DownloadM. E S S A G I N G  
101  
                                   
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
• If the recipient is in your Contacts list,  
enter the first initial and last name (no  
spaces), and then select the  
recipient’s phone number or email  
address, depending on where you  
want to send the message.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can address messages to  
multiple recipients by separating the  
addresses with a comma. If you address a  
single message to three people, you may be  
billed for three messages (depending on your  
Verizon Wireless service plan).  
• If the recipient’s name isn’t in the list  
of recent addresses or your Contacts  
list, enter the phone number, email  
address, or a Verizon Wireless alias.  
Creating and sending a text message  
Each text message can hold up to 160  
characters. Messages with more than 160  
characters are automatically split into  
several messages. (If you send a text  
message to an email address, the email  
address is deducted from the  
TIP If you see numbers when you expect to  
see letters (or the other way around), you  
need to turn Option Lock on by pressing  
Option twice or turn it off by pressing Option  
once.  
160-character count.)  
DID YOU KNOW? You can page someone to call  
you by sending them a blank text message.  
4
Enter your message or select  
QuickText  
to insert predefined  
phrases. To insert emoticons, select  
.
1
Press Applications  
and select  
Messaging  
.
TIP To add a new QuickText phrase, select  
Edit QuickText from the list.  
2
3
Select New.  
Select the To field to address the  
message:  
NOTE Some symbols can’t be used in text  
messages. The Messaging application  
automatically replaces invalid characters.  
• Press Center  
If the recipient’s  
name appears in the list of recent  
addresses, select it from the list.  
M E S S A G I N G  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                               
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
Creating and sending a multimedia  
message  
KEY TERM Slide A collection of text, pictures,  
videos, and sounds that are grouped together  
within a multimedia message. During  
playback, all the items within a particular slide  
appear on the same screen. If a multimedia  
message contains multiple slides, you can  
view each slide separately during playback.  
5
6
(Optional) Press Menu  
select High Priority from the Compose  
menu to mark the message as urgent.  
, and then  
KEY TERM Pix Place The companion website  
for Verizon Wireless picture and video  
messaging services.  
Select Send.  
Multimedia messages consist of text,  
photos, videos, and sounds presented as  
one or more slides. Even if your  
smartphone does not include a camera,  
you can still send, receive, and view photos  
and videos. You can include any of the  
following items:  
TIP Select Save as Draft to save a draft of the  
message without sending it. To access the  
draft, select the folder list in the title bar and  
select Drafts.  
Item  
Supported File Types  
JPEG, GIF, BMP  
MPEG4, 3GP2  
MIDI  
Pictures  
Videos  
Ringtones  
Sound clips  
WAV, QCELP  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And DownloadM. E S S A G I N G  
103  
                                 
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
1
Press Applications  
and select  
Messaging  
.
2
3
4
Select New.  
Select Add Media.  
Select the To field to address the  
message with up to 25 addresses:  
• Press Center  
. If the recipient’s  
name appears in the list of recent  
addresses, select it from the list.  
Attach image: Insert one or more  
photos or videos from your smartphone  
or an expansion card.  
• If the recipient is in your Contacts list,  
enter the first initial and last name (no  
spaces), and then select the  
recipient’s phone number or email  
address.  
Take new picture: Take a picture with  
the built-in camera and add it to the  
message.  
• If the recipient’s name is not in the list  
of recent addresses or your Contacts  
list, enter the phone number, email  
address, or alias.  
Take new video: Capture a video of up  
to 14 seconds with the built-in  
camcorder and add it to the message.  
• If you want to upload a picture or  
video to your Verizon Wireless PIX  
TIP When creating a message, you can  
preview or delete an item. Highlight the item,  
press Center on the 5-way, and then select  
Remove, View, or Play.  
Place account, press Center  
, and  
then select PixPlace.  
5
6
Enter a subject.  
(Optional) Select the image  
placeholder, and then select one of the  
following:  
7
(Optional) Select Sound , and then  
select one of the following:  
M E S S A G I N G  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
Record new: Record a sound clip of up smartphone to automatically download  
to 1 minute.  
new messages or to notify you that a  
message is ready for you to download (see  
Customizing your Messaging settings). You  
can also configure how your smartphone  
notifies you when a new message arrives  
(see Selecting Messaging alert tones).  
Attach voice memo: Select a memo  
you recorded in the Voice Memo  
application.  
Attach ringtone: Select a ringtone.  
8
9
Enter a text message or caption.  
Select Add slide to insert additional  
slides.  
10 (Optional) Select Preview to view the  
message as the recipient will see it.  
11 (Optional) Press Menu  
, and then  
select High Priority from the Compose  
menu to mark the message as urgent  
12 Select Send.  
The new message alert may include any of  
the following buttons:  
DID YOU KNOW? You can send a contact or  
calendar entry. Select the entry, open the  
Record menu, select Send, and then select  
Messaging.  
OK: Dismisses the alert and places the  
message in your Inbox.  
Reply: Opens Chat View, where you can  
reply with a text message. To send an  
MMS reply, select Add Media from the  
Chat View.  
Receiving messages  
When your phone is turned on and in a  
wireless coverage area, you automatically  
receive new text messages. For  
Call Back: Dials the sender’s phone  
number.  
multimedia messages, you can set your  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And DownloadM. E S S A G I N G  
105  
                         
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
Go To Msg: Opens the message so you  
can view its full contents.  
3
Select the phone number, email  
address, or URL (appears as underlined  
blue text).  
Delete: Removes the message from your  
smartphone.  
Your smartphone automatically launches  
the appropriate application from the link.  
TIP When you receive a message, you can  
also press Send to call the sender.  
Viewing/playing a multimedia message  
1
Press Applications  
Messaging  
and select  
TIP If you have multiple alerts, the Alert  
screen displays all your pending alerts. Select  
an item’s description to jump to that item, or  
check the box to clear that item. To view all  
your pending alerts from any screen on your  
smartphone, press and hold Center on the  
5-way.  
.
2
3
Select the message you want to view.  
If there are sounds or multiple slides,  
playback begins immediately.  
4
Do any of the following:  
• Use the onscreen controls to scroll to  
other slides and messages.  
Using links in messages  
When you receive a text message that  
contains a telephone number, email  
address, or URL, you can dial the number,  
send an email message, or go to the web  
page immediately.  
1
Press Applications  
Messaging  
and select  
.
2
Select the message that contains the  
link you want to use.  
• To play a sound, select audio clip  
.
M E S S A G I N G  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
• To save a sound, press Menu  
and select Save Sound from the  
Message menu.  
,
Arranging your messages  
You can rearrange the messages in any  
folder by using the Sort command.  
• To save a picture, press Menu  
and select Save Picture from the  
Message menu. You can access  
saved pictures later by pressing  
,
1
Press Applications  
Messaging  
and select  
.
Applications  
Pics&Videos  
and selecting  
.
• To save a calendar or contact entry,  
select it. You can access saved entries  
later by pressing Applications  
and selecting Calendar  
or  
Contacts (depending on the type  
of entry you saved).  
2
Select the folder list in the title bar and  
select the folder you want to sort.  
• To select the text, position the cursor  
in the text area, and then press  
3
4
Press Menu  
.
Center  
.
Select View, and then select Sort by  
Name or Sort by Date.  
• To stop playback of a message, select  
Play/Stop.  
• To view message details, press  
Deleting messages  
Menu  
and select Message  
You can delete several messages at once  
from any folder by using the Purge  
command.  
Details from the Message menu.  
5
Select Done.  
1
Press Applications  
Messaging  
and select  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And DownloadM. E S S A G I N G  
107  
                                 
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
2
Select the folder list in the title bar and  
select the folder that contains the  
messages you want to delete.  
You can carry on multiple chats at the same  
time and easily switch between them,  
using the pick list at the top of the screen.  
3
4
5
Press Menu  
.
1
Press Applications  
Messaging  
Do one of the following:  
and select  
Select Purge from the Message menu.  
.
Select the Purge pick list, and then  
select older than 1 week, older than 2  
weeks, older than 1 month, or all.  
2
Start a new chat: Select a message  
and reply to it.  
6
Select OK.  
Continue an existing chat: Select a  
message with the chat  
icon.  
Chatting with Messaging  
DID YOU KNOW? You can send and receive text  
messages even while you are on a phone call.  
This is easiest when using a hands-free  
headset or the speakerphone.  
When you exchange more than one  
message with a single contact, the  
messages you exchange with that person  
are grouped into a chat session. When you  
select a chat session from your message  
list, the upper part of Chat View displays all  
messages you’ve exchanged with this  
contact, and the lower part provides an  
entry area.  
3
4
Enter your message.  
TIP Pale gray text indicates that a message is  
pending or enroute.  
Select Send.  
M E S S A G I N G  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
Customizing your Messaging settings  
SMS Receipts: Indicate whether you  
want to receive a confirmation when an  
outgoing SMS message is delivered.  
1
Press Applications  
and select  
Messaging  
.
2
3
Press Menu  
.
Confirm message deletions: Indicate  
whether you want deletion confirmation  
prompts to appear.  
From the Options menu, select  
Preferences.  
4
On the Messages tab, set any of the  
following preferences for your individual  
messages:  
Privacy Mode (hide text): Indicate  
whether you want the body text to  
appear in the alert when you receive a  
new message, or if you want the alert  
to hide the text and prompt you to go to  
the message.  
5
Select the Chat tab and set any of the  
following preferences for chat sessions.  
New message: Indicate whether you  
want to default to text or multimedia  
messages when you create a new  
message.  
MMS Receipts: Indicate whether you  
want to receive a confirmation when an  
outgoing MMS message is delivered.  
Create chats from messages: Indicate  
when you want to group messages  
from the same person into a chat.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And DownloadM. E S S A G I N G  
109  
                               
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
Show timestamps in chats: Indicate  
whether you want to see the local date  
and time the message was sent next to  
each message.  
Automatically collect MMS  
messages: Indicate whether you want  
to download multimedia messages  
automatically.  
Display my name in chat window as:  
Enter the name you want to use as the  
label for your messages in Chat View.  
Even when roaming: Indicate whether  
you want to automatically receive  
multimedia messages while roaming.  
Label color: Select a color to  
7
Select OK.  
differentiate your messages from the  
sender’s messages while in Chat View.  
Selecting Messaging alert tones  
Use color for: Indicate whether you  
want both your name and message text  
in the selected label color, or only your  
name.  
DID YOU KNOW? Your smartphone includes a  
silent alert that can vibrate even when the  
Ringer switch is set to Sound Off.  
6
Select the Network tab and set any of  
the following preferences for network  
connections.  
1
Press Applications  
and select  
Messaging  
.
2
3
Press Menu  
.
Select Options, and then select Alerts.  
M E S S A G I N G  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
What are all those icons?  
TIP By default, the Messaging app shows the  
Inbox folder. To view a different folder, select  
the folder list in the title bar and select a  
different folder from the list.  
The message descriptions in the Inbox,  
Outbox, and Sent folders show the  
message status:  
4
5
6
Select the Application pick list and  
select Messaging.  
•
•
•
Unread messages appear in bold.  
Read messages appear in plain text.  
Select the Volume pick list and select  
the volume level.  
Urgent messages appear with a red  
exclamation point (!).  
Select the Vibrate pick list and select  
how you want your smartphone to  
vibrate upon an incoming message.  
The following icons show the message  
type and additional status info:  
7
8
Select the Message Tone pick list and  
select a tone for incoming message  
alerts.  
A text message  
A chat session  
A voicemail page  
Check the boxes if you want to see  
onscreen alerts when a new message  
arrives and when a message you sent is  
received.  
An incoming message with an error  
A message that is waiting to be sent  
9
Select Done.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And DownloadM. E S S A G I N G  
111  
                         
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
A message that was successfully  
sent  
A message that was sent to multiple  
recipients, and only some of the  
recipients received the message  
An outgoing message with an error  
DID YOU KNOW? If you are outside a coverage  
area or if your phone is turned off, outgoing  
messages go into the Outbox. When you  
return to a coverage area or turn your phone  
back on, your pending messages are sent  
automatically and transferred to the Sent  
folder.  
M E S S A G I N G  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
CHAPTER  
5
Your connections to the web  
and wireless devices  
You use the web for many things: driving directions, shopping,  
news, web-based email. Now, with the Verizon Wireless  
network and the built-in web browser, you can take the web  
with you almost anywhere.  
The built-in Bluetooth® feature of your Palm® Treo™ 755P  
smartphone helps you easily set up wireless connections to a  
number of devices, so you can enjoy the convenience of  
cable-free connectivity. You can also use your smartphone to  
connect your computer to the Internet and to share contacts or  
your favorite photos with other people.  
Benefits  
•
Carry the web with you  
•
•
Connect to Bluetooth devices  
•
Store web pages for offline  
viewing  
Connect your computer to the  
Internet through your smartphone  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
In this chapter  
Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
BroadbandAccess Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
Connections with Bluetooth® devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
pages into a single column and resizes  
images on your screen. This way, you can  
see most content without scrolling left or  
right.  
Web browser  
The Blazer® web browser on your  
smartphone provides quick and easy  
access to web pages. You can view most  
sites you use on your computer, including  
those with security and advanced features,  
such as JavaScript and frames. To browse  
the web, you must activate data services  
from Verizon Wireless.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can send email from a web  
page on your smartphone. Email addresses  
appear as links on web pages. After you  
configure an email application on your  
smartphone, you can select an email address  
link to create a message to the selected  
address.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can visit secure websites.  
The security certificates and 128-bit Secure  
Sockets Layer (SSL) encryption let you  
browse secure sites, such as online shopping,  
banking, and email. Remember: Some secure  
sites also require specific browsers and may  
not work with the web browser application.  
DID YOU KNOW? The web browser supports  
JavaScript, SSL strong encryption, and  
cookies, but does not support plug-ins (such  
as Flash or Shockwave) or Java applets.  
1
2
Make sure your phone is turned on (see  
Turning your phone on and off) and that  
you are in a coverage area.  
Viewing a web page  
The web browser uses patent-pending  
technology to optimize web pages for your  
smartphone. By default, the browser is in  
Optimized Mode, which reformats web  
Press Applications  
Web  
and select  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And DownlWoaEdB. B R O W S E R  
115  
                                               
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
NOTE Trouble connecting to the Internet?  
See My smartphone won’t connect to the  
Internet for troubleshooting tips.  
page. In Wide Page mode, use the  
stylus to select a link.  
Submit a form: Enter the info and then  
select the onscreen button to submit  
the form. If the form doesn’t have an  
3
Enter a web page address (URL) in the  
Address Bar and select Go.  
onscreen button, press Return  
.
NOTE If you browse to a secure web  
page, a lock  
Address Bar.  
icon appears in the  
TIP To adjust the font size, open the Options  
menu and select Font. To fit more text on the  
screen, select Small. To make the text easier  
to read, select Large.  
4
Do any of the following to navigate  
within the web page:  
5
Use the 5-way  
the following icons in the title bar:  
to access any of  
View a page in wide layout format (as  
on your computer): Press Menu  
,
select Options, and then select Wide  
Page Mode.  
Goes to the previous web page.  
Goes to the next web page.  
Scroll through the page: In Optimized  
Mode (the default format which is  
optimized for your smartphone screen),  
Refreshes the page with the  
latest content from the Internet.  
press Up  
or Down . In Wide Page  
Mode, press Up , Down , Left  
,
Opens a list where you can  
or Right to scroll in all directions.  
select Fast Mode (no images or  
style sheets) or Normal Mode  
(with images and style sheets).  
Follow a link to another web page: In  
Optimized Mode, highlight the link by  
pressing Left or Right and then  
press Center  
to go to the selected  
W E B  
B R O WDSoEwRnload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
116  
                                       
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
Opens a dialog box where you  
to 100 bookmarks or saved pages, allowing  
you to open your favorite web pages  
quickly. Note that a bookmark is different  
from a favorite (see Defining favorite  
buttons).  
can enter a web address you  
want to go to or view a list of  
recently viewed web pages.  
Goes to your home page.  
Displays a list of your  
bookmarks and saved pages.  
DID YOU KNOW? The predefined bookmarks  
take you to pages that are optimized for your  
smartphone.  
1
2
3
Go to the page you want to bookmark.  
Press Menu  
TIP To find a recent page or search, select the  
Address Bar pick list and select the item from  
the list.  
.
Select Add Bookmark from the Page  
menu.  
TIP Want to get to the icons faster? Press  
Space to jump to the Address Bar and then  
press Up on the 5-way to scroll to the icons.  
You can also press Menu to access the same  
commands from the menus.  
4
5
(Optional) Change the entries in the  
Name and Description fields.  
Select OK, and then select OK again.  
TIP You can customize the Fast Mode  
settings. See Customizing your web browser  
settings for details.  
TIP Tap and hold the Back or Forward buttons  
or select these buttons with the 5-way to pop  
up a list of sites you’ve visited.  
Creating a bookmark  
With bookmarks you can instantly access a  
web page without entering the address  
every time. The web browser can store up  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And DownlWoaEdB. B R O W S E R  
117  
                                 
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
Saving a page  
You can use the web browser to save a  
page for offline viewing, so you don’t need  
a wireless connection to view it later.  
1
2
3
4
Go to the page you want to save.  
Press Menu  
.
Select Save Page from the Page menu.  
Select OK, and then select OK again.  
TIP To go back to the last web page you  
viewed without selecting a bookmark, select  
Page View.  
Viewing bookmarks or saved pages  
Bookmarks and saved pages both appear in  
Bookmarks View. Saved pages are  
indicated by a small triangle in the  
upper-right corner of the bookmark.  
Editing or deleting a bookmark or saved  
page  
1
2
3
From Bookmarks View, press  
Menu  
.
DID YOU KNOW? You can make Bookmarks View  
the default view when you open the browser.  
Open the Options menu and select  
Preferences. Select the Start With pick list  
and select Bookmarks.  
Select Edit Bookmarks on the  
Bookmarks menu.  
Select the bookmark you want to edit or  
delete.  
TIP If you can’t edit, delete, or beam a  
bookmark, it is probably locked and these  
actions are prohibited.  
1
2
Select the Bookmarks View  
icon.  
Select the bookmark or saved page you  
want to view.  
4
5
Enter the desired changes.  
Select OK.  
W E B  
B R O WDSoEwRnload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
118  
                         
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
Arranging bookmarks and saved pages  
Downloading files from a web page  
Bookmarks View includes ten pages for  
bookmarks so that you can arrange  
The web browser lets you download files  
that are recognized by one of the  
bookmarks and saved pages in a logical  
fashion. For example, you can store travel  
applications on your smartphone. When  
you download a file, you can open it in the  
links on one bookmark page, stock links on application that recognizes the file. For  
another, and business links on a third page. example, download an MP3 file so you can  
listen to it later in the Pocket Tunes™  
1
From Bookmarks View, press  
application. If a file is not recognized by any  
of the applications on your smartphone,  
you can download the file to an expansion  
card, but you cannot open it on your  
smartphone.  
Menu  
.
2
Select Edit Bookmarks from the  
Bookmarks menu.  
You can download files such as new  
applications, and choose to play or save  
music and video files in many popular  
formats—provided that the website  
permits the downloading of files:  
Item  
Supported File Types  
JPEG, WBMP, GIF  
MP4, 3G2, ASF, WMV  
MIDI, AAC  
3
4
Enter a title for this page of bookmarks.  
Pictures  
Videos  
Ringtones  
Music  
Use the stylus to drag and drop a  
bookmark into the desired slot. You can  
move a bookmark within the current  
page or move it to a different bookmark  
page by dragging and dropping it on the  
MP3, WMA  
Bookmark Page  
icon.  
TIP You can also access software and other  
downloads using the Downloads bookmark.  
5
Select OK.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And DownlWoaEdB. B R O W S E R  
119  
                                           
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
1
2
Go to the page with the link to the file  
you want to download.  
TIP The web browser recognizes streamed  
content that is not supported by any of the  
applications on your smartphone, and it  
displays a Media type not supported  
message.  
Press Left or Right to highlight the  
link to the file, and then press Center  
.
3
4
If prompted, select what you want to do  
with the file: Play, Save To Device, or  
Save To Card.  
2
Once streaming begins, playback starts  
automatically. Use the following  
controls when viewing or listening:  
Select Yes.  
• Select  
to return to the web page  
TIP You can also save an image from a web  
page by tapping and holding it with the stylus.  
containing the streamed content.  
• Select  
pause playback.  
or press Center  
to  
to  
Streaming files from a web page  
• Select  
or press Center  
The web browser lets you stream files that  
are recognized by one of the applications  
on your smartphone. For example, you can  
choose to play music and video files in  
many popular formats (MP3, WMA, WMV).  
resume playback after pausing.  
• A few seconds after playback begins,  
the toolbar is hidden and you can view  
the content on the full screen. Press  
Up  
or Down  
to display the  
toolbar; press Up  
again to hide the toolbar again.  
or Down  
1
When the web browser recognizes  
streamed content on a web page, it  
displays a Play  
listen to the streamed content, select  
Play  
icon. To view or  
• Press the Volume button on the side  
of your smartphone to adjust the  
volume.  
.
W E B  
B R O WDSoEwRnload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
120  
               
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
Copying text from a web page  
3
4
Press Down to navigate through the  
list.  
You can copy text from a web page and  
paste it into other applications.  
Select the web page you want to load.  
1
Use the stylus to highlight the text you  
want to copy.  
Finding text on a web page  
1
2
From Page View, press Menu  
.
2
3
4
Press Menu  
.
Select Find Text on Page from the  
Select Edit, and then select Copy.  
Page menu.  
Go to the app in which you want to  
paste the text and use the stylus or  
3
4
Enter the text you want to find.  
Check or uncheck the Wrap Search box  
to indicate whether you want the search  
to wrap from the end of the page to the  
beginning when the end is reached.  
5-way  
where you want to paste the text.  
Press Menu  
to position the cursor  
5
6
.
Select Edit, and then select Paste.  
5
Select Find to start the search.  
DID YOU KNOW? If the web browser does not  
recognize a phone number as dialable, you  
can copy the phone number (as text) and  
paste it into the Dial Pad (see Dialing from a  
web page or message).  
Customizing your web browser settings  
1
2
From Page View, press Menu  
.
Select Options, and then select  
Preferences.  
3
Select Page and set any of the following  
preferences:  
Returning to recently viewed pages  
The History list stores the addresses of the  
last 100 pages you visited. Items in the  
History list are sorted chronologically.  
Start With: Determines which view  
appears when you open the browser.  
1
2
From Page View, press Menu  
.
Select History from the Page menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And DownlWoaEdB. B R O W S E R  
121  
                                       
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
Home Page: Sets the page that appears  
when you select  
Auto-complete: Determines whether  
the web browser suggests text, based  
on your previous entries, when you  
begin entering info.  
.
Restore Default: Selects the original  
home page, if you changed it.  
Disable cookies: Determines whether  
websites can store personalized info on  
your Treo smartphone. Some sites do  
not work properly if you select this  
option.  
Show Address Bar: Sets whether the  
web address appears in Page View.  
When it is visible, you can select the  
pick list to go to a previously viewed  
page or enter a URL directly from Page  
View.  
Disable JavaScript: Bypasses  
JavaScript elements on the web pages  
you view.  
4
Select General and set any of the  
following preferences:  
Tap and Drag: Determines whether  
dragging the stylus selects text or  
scrolls through the content of the page.  
Normal mode/Fast mode: Determines  
whether you want to hide selected  
items so that web pages load faster.  
W E B  
B R O WDSoEwRnload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
122  
                                     
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
When you select Fast mode, you can  
set the following options:  
Disable cascading style sheets:  
Determines whether style sheets are  
applied when you load a web page.  
When style sheets are disabled, pages  
download faster, but you may lose  
some of the formatting.  
Cookies: Indicates how much memory  
is being used by cookies. To free up this  
memory, select Clear Cookies.  
KEY TERM Cascading style sheets A method  
used to describe the presentation of a web  
page or document written in a markup  
language, such as HTML or XML.  
Cache: Indicates how much memory is  
being used by your cache to store  
recent pages and history. To free up this  
memory, select Clear Cache.  
Don’t download images! Determines  
whether images appear when you load  
a web page. If you select not to view  
images, then web pages load faster. You  
can still see any image by tapping and  
holding its placeholder box.  
Clear cache on exit: Determines  
whether the cache clears each time you  
exit the web browser.  
Set Proxy: Sets up a proxy server to  
access the Internet. If your connection  
requires a proxy server, please contact  
your Internet service provider or IT  
administrator for this information.  
5
Select Advanced and set any of the  
following preferences:  
Set memory limit for storing pages:  
Sets the memory available for your  
cache. Pages are cached so that they  
load faster the next time you view  
them.  
6
Select OK.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And DownlWoaEdB. B R O W S E R  
123  
                           
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
BroadbandAccess  
TIP Certain smartphone application features,  
such as synchronizing or automatic retrieval of  
email messages, do not work when you have  
a BroadbandAccess Connect connection  
between your smartphone and your  
computer. To use these features, terminate  
the BroadbandAccess Connect connection.  
Connect  
The BroadbandAccess Connect service  
lets you convert your smartphone into a  
wireless modem so that you can access  
the Internet from your computer. You can  
set up BroadbandAccess Connect using  
the USB sync cable between your  
smartphone and your Windows computer.  
If you have a Mac computer enabled with  
Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can  
set up a wireless connection to use  
TIP You may need to use a virtual private  
network (VPN) to access corporate email.  
Check with your system administrator and  
see Connecting to a virtual private network for  
more information.  
Installing the VZAccess Manager software  
To use the BroadbandAccess Connect  
service, you must install the VZAccess  
Manager software on your computer.  
BroadbandAccess Connect using your  
smartphone’s built-in Bluetooth technology.  
The VZAccess Manager software helps you  
set up and manage your BroadbandAccess  
Connect connections.  
WINDOWS ONLY  
1
2
Insert the Palm Software Installation CD  
in your computer’s CD drive.  
On the Additional Resources screen,  
select Connect to the Internet with  
VZAccess Manager.  
3
4
Follow the instructions to begin  
installation.  
On the Welcome screen, click Next.  
C O N N E C T  
B R O A D B A NDDoAwCnCloEaSdSfrom Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
124  
                   
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
5
6
Select the option to accept the License  
Agreement, and then click Next.  
4
5
On the Welcome screen, click Next.  
Select the option to accept the License  
Agreement, and then click Next.  
Select whether you want to use  
VZAccess Manager with one  
smartphone only or with all  
smartphones you use on this computer,  
and then select whether or not to create  
a desktop shortcut. Click Next.  
6
Select the device name for each device  
you want to use with VZAccess  
Manager, and then select whether or  
not to create a desktop shortcut. Click  
Next.  
7
8
9
Select the folder where you want to  
store the VZAccess Manager  
application files, or select Next to  
accept the default location.  
Getting help with VZAccess Manager  
software  
You can learn how to use VZAccess  
Manager software from within the  
application itself.  
Select whether to do a Typical or a  
Custom installation (we recommend  
Typical), and then click Next to begin  
the installation process.  
1
If you chose to install a desktop  
shortcut, click the VZAccess Manager  
icon on your desktop. Otherwise, use  
the Start menu on your Windows  
computer to navigate to and select the  
VZAccess Manager software.  
On the Installation Complete screen,  
click Finish.  
MAC ONLY  
1
2
3
On your computer, go to  
www.palm.com/mypalm/  
755pverizon-bonus.  
Click the link to download the Mac  
version of the VZAccess Manager  
software.  
2
Click Help at the top of the screen and  
Follow the onscreen instructions to  
begin installation.  
select a topic to learn more.  
B R O A D B A N D A C C E S S C O N N E C T  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
Accessing the Internet using a  
BroadbandAccess Connect connection  
DID YOU KNOW? When the BroadbandAccess  
Connect service is on, you cannot use any of  
the wireless features on your smartphone  
that require a data connection, such as web  
browsing and sending and receiving email  
and MMS messages. You can still use all the  
nonwireless features of your smartphone. If  
you choose to make a call, you automatically  
interrupt the BroadbandAccess Connect  
connection. When you receive a call in a  
BroadbandAccess coverage area, the call  
interrupts the BroadbandAccess Connect  
connection. In a NationalAccess coverage  
area, incoming calls go to voicemail.  
1
Connect your smartphone to your  
computer with the sync cable (see  
Connecting your Treo smartphone to  
your computer).  
2
3
4
Click the VZAccess Manager icon on  
your computer desktop.  
Click the connection you want to use,  
such as BroadbandAccess.  
Click Connect.  
You can now use the BroadbandAccess  
Connect service to access the Internet  
from your computer.  
Terminating a BroadbandAccess Connect  
Internet session  
1
On your computer, go to the VZAccess  
Manager window.  
2
Click Disconnect.  
Creating a Bluetooth partnership between  
your smartphone and your computer  
1
Make sure that your computer’s  
Bluetooth setting is on and that your  
computer is ready to create a Bluetooth  
partnership. Check the documentation  
that came with your computer to find  
and change these settings.  
C O N N E C T  
B R O A D B A NDDoAwCnCloEaSdSfrom Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
126  
                 
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
2
3
On your smartphone, press  
5
Select Add Device. The discovery icon  
appears, indicating that the discovery  
process is active.  
Applications  
Bluetooth  
and select  
.
Select Bluetooth On if it is not  
selected, and then select Setup  
Devices.  
6
7
Select your computer from the Trusted  
Devices list, and then select OK.  
Enter a passkey on the Bluetooth  
Security screen, and then select OK.  
The passkey can be any number of up  
to 16 characters.  
IMPORTANT You must enter the same  
passkey on your smartphone and your  
computer. We recommend that you use a  
passkey of 16 digits where possible to  
improve the security of your smartphone.  
The longer the passkey, the more difficult it  
is for the passkey to be deciphered.  
4
Select Trusted Devices.  
8
9
Enter the same passkey number on  
your computer when prompted.  
Select Done, and then select Done  
again to return to the Bluetooth screen.  
B R O A D B A N D A C C E S S C O N N E C T  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
When you configure a headset as  
Connections with  
Bluetooth® devices  
described in Connecting to a Bluetooth®  
hands-free device, the headset is  
automatically added to your trusted device  
list. Follow the steps in this section to add  
other devices to your trusted device list,  
such as a friend’s handheld.  
With your smartphone’s built-in Bluetooth  
wireless technology, you can connect to a  
number of Bluetooth devices, such as a  
headset, car kit, printer, or GPS receiver, as  
well as to other smartphones and  
handhelds that are equipped with  
Bluetooth wireless technology. If your  
computer is enabled with Bluetooth  
wireless technology, you can also  
synchronize wirelessly or use your phone  
as a wireless modem.  
DID YOU KNOW? Your Treo smartphone does not  
support wireless connections to Bluetooth  
keyboards and stereo headphones.  
Requesting a connection with another  
Bluetooth device  
1
Press Applications  
Bluetooth  
Select Bluetooth On.  
and select  
.
You can create a list of Bluetooth devices  
that you trust to communicate with your  
Treo smartphone. When communicating  
with trusted devices, your Treo smartphone  
skips the discovery process and creates a  
secure link as long as the device is within  
range. Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet (10  
meters) depending on environmental  
conditions, including obstacles, radio  
interference from nearby electronic  
2
equipment, and other factors.  
C O N N E C T I O N S W I T H B L U E T O O T H ® D E V I C E S  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
3
(Optional) Enter a device name that  
identifies your smartphone when it is  
discovered by other Bluetooth devices.  
to receive a connection request (see the  
device’s documentation), and then  
select Find More on your smartphone  
to search again.  
NOTE Use the same device name for all  
your Bluetooth connections. If you change  
the device name, you need to recreate any  
partnerships you already created.  
9
Enter the same passkey on your  
smartphone and on the Bluetooth  
device, and select OK.  
IMPORTANT Some Bluetooth devices  
have a preset passkey; if so, you can find  
the passkey in the documentation for that  
device. Other devices provide a screen  
where you enter a passkey that you make  
up. In either case, you must use the same  
passkey on both your smartphone and the  
other Bluetooth device. We recommend  
that where possible, you make up a  
4
5
Select Setup Devices.  
Select Trusted Devices.  
passkey of 16 alphanumeric characters  
(letters and numerals only) to improve the  
security of your smartphone. The longer  
the passkey, the more difficult it is for the  
passkey to be deciphered.  
6
Select Add Device. The discovery icon  
appears, indicating that the discovery  
process is active.  
10 Select Done.  
7
8
Select the Show pick list and select  
Nearby devices.  
If the device you want to add doesn’t  
appear on the discovery results list,  
make sure that the other device is ready  
W I T H B L U E T O O T H ® D E V I C E S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. CAOll NMNaEnuCaTlIsOSNeSarch And Download.  
129  
               
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
Accepting a connection from another  
Bluetooth device  
4
Select the Visibility pick list and select  
one of the following:  
Visible: Enables Bluetooth devices that  
are not on your Trusted Device list to  
request a connection with your  
smartphone. Your smartphone remains  
accessible to other devices until you  
turn this option off. After you’re done  
using this setting, remember to change  
it back to Hidden.  
TIP For the smartphone to be visible to  
Bluetooth devices, the Bluetooth setting must  
be set to On and visibility must be set to  
Visible or Temporary.  
1
2
Press Applications  
Bluetooth  
Select Bluetooth On.  
and select  
.
TIP Use the Visible option only when you need  
your smartphone to be accessible for an  
extended period of time. For short term  
accessibility, use the Temporary option.  
Temporary: Enables Bluetooth devices  
that are not on your Trusted Device list  
to request a connection with your  
smartphone during the next two  
minutes. Your smartphone reverts to  
the Hidden setting and becomes  
inaccessible to other devices after two  
minutes.  
3
(Optional) Enter a device name that  
identifies your smartphone when it is  
discovered by other Bluetooth devices.  
NOTE Use the same device name for all  
your Bluetooth connections. If you change  
the device name, you need to recreate any  
partnerships you already created.  
Hidden: Allows only devices with which  
you have previously formed a  
partnership to request a connection  
C O N N E C T I O N S W I T H B L U E T O O T H ® D E V I C E S  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
with your smartphone. New devices  
cannot request a connection.  
other Bluetooth device. We recommend  
that where possible, you make up a  
passkey of 16 alphanumeric characters  
(letters and numerals only) to improve the  
security of your smartphone. The longer  
the passkey, the more difficult it is for the  
passkey to be deciphered.  
5
Enter the same passkey on your  
smartphone and on the Bluetooth  
device.  
IMPORTANT Some Bluetooth devices,  
such as headsets and GPS receivers, have  
a preset passkey; if so, you can find the  
passkey in the documentation for that  
device. Other devices provide a screen  
where you enter a passkey that you make  
up. In either case, you must use the same  
passkey on both your smartphone and the  
6
(Optional) Check the Add to trusted  
device list box if you want to form a  
partnership with the requesting device.  
7
Select OK.  
W I T H B L U E T O O T H ® D E V I C E S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. CAOll NMNaEnuCaTlIsOSNeSarch And Download.  
131  
       
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
C O N N E C T I O N S W I T H B L U E T O O T H ® D E V I C E S  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER  
6
Your photos, videos, and  
music  
Do you have a wallet bulging with photos of friends, family, pets,  
and your most recent vacation? Are you tired of carrying both your  
MP3 player and your phone?  
Your Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone solves both problems. You can  
keep your favorite photos right on your smartphone—videos, too.  
And there's no need to carry an expensive MP3 player; you can  
play music on your smartphone. Simply transfer songs onto your  
smartphone or an expansion card (sold separately) and then listen  
through the included stereo headphones.  
Benefits  
•
Never be far from your favorite  
people, places, and songs  
•
No separate photo viewer, MP3,  
CD, or mini-disc player required  
•
Arrange your photos, videos, and  
songs  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
In this chapter  
Camera and Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
Pics & Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Pocket Tunes™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
Taking a picture  
Camera and  
Camcorder  
You can store pictures on your smartphone  
or on an expansion card.  
1
Press Applications  
Camera  
and select  
.
Your smartphone comes with an  
easy-to-use, built-in, 1.3-megapixel camera  
with 2x digital zoom (camera version only).  
You can use the camera to take and view  
pictures and videos and send them to your  
friends and family. To add a personal touch  
to your smartphone, use your pictures as  
your wallpaper in the Phone application’s  
Main View, and as caller ID images.  
2
By default, the Camera application  
stores pictures you take in the PALM  
folder on your smartphone. To store a  
picture in a different location, select one  
of the following from the pick list:  
<Album name>: Stores the picture in  
the selected album. The storage  
location is based on the location of the  
album (smartphone or expansion card).  
If your smartphone doesn’t have a built-in  
camera, the sections in this chapter about  
taking pictures and videos don’t apply to  
you. But you can still receive and view  
pictures and videos, send pictures and  
videos to other people as email  
attachments or multimedia messages  
(MMS), and use pictures to personalize  
your smartphone (such as wallpaper or  
picture caller ID; see Assigning a caller ID  
photo for details). You can also move  
pictures and videos to a computer by  
synchronizing your smartphone with your  
computer.  
New Albums: Opens a dialog box  
where you can enter an album name  
and select the storage location  
(smartphone or expansion card).  
A N D  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals SearcChAAMndE RDAownloaCd.A M C O R D E R  
135  
                                   
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
Saves the picture in the location  
you selected in step 2.  
TIP The camera defaults to 1.3 megapixel  
(1280 x 1024) resolution. The camera also  
supports VGA (640 x 480) and QVGA (320 x  
240) resolution. To view these settings before  
you take a picture, press Menu.  
Deletes the picture.  
Opens an MMS message, so  
you can send the picture to a  
phone number or email address  
that supports picture messages.  
3
4
Find your subject in the screen on your  
smartphone. (The lens is on the back of  
your smartphone.)  
Lets you add a voice caption.  
(Optional) To get a close-up of your  
subject, press Up  
to select 2x. Press  
Down  
to return to 1x.  
5
6
Press Center  
to capture the picture.  
TIP To add an audio caption later, open the  
picture and then select Audio Caption from  
the Photo menu.  
Do any of the following:  
DID YOU KNOW? You can personalize a picture.  
Open the Photo menu, select Draw on, and  
then use the drawing tools to add your own  
personal touch. When you save the picture,  
you can replace the original or save a copy.  
Recording a video  
You can store videos on your smartphone  
or on an expansion card.  
1
Press Applications  
Camcorder  
and select  
.
C A M E R A A N D C A M C O R D E R  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                               
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
New Albums: Opens a dialog box  
where you can enter an album name  
and select the storage location  
(smartphone or expansion card).  
TIP The video recording screen displays the  
approximate recording time you have left  
based on the space available on your  
smartphone or expansion card. Actual  
recording time may vary depending on how  
fast you are moving, how many colors you are  
recording, and so on.  
TIP The camcorder defaults to CIF (352 x 288)  
resolution and also supports QCIF (176 x 144)  
resolution. To view these settings before you  
capture a video, press Menu.  
2
By default, the Camcorder application  
stores videos you record in the PALM  
folder on your smartphone. To store a  
video in a different location, select one  
of the following:  
3
Find your subject in the screen on your  
smartphone. (The lens is on the back of  
your smartphone.)  
4
5
Press Center  
After you finish recording, press  
Center again to stop.  
Select any of the following:  
to start recording.  
<Album name>: Stores the video in the  
selected album. The storage location is  
based on the location of the album  
(smartphone or expansion card).  
6
A N D  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals SearcChAAMndE RDAownloaCd.A M C O R D E R  
137  
                 
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
appears. If you are in Camcorder View,  
the Video Settings screen appears.  
Plays the video, so you can  
review it.  
3
Set any of the following preferences:  
Saves the video in the location  
you selected in step 2.  
Effects: Sets the color palette for the  
current picture or video. You cannot  
change an item’s palette after you take  
the picture or video.  
Deletes the video.  
Opens an MMS message, so you  
can send the video to a phone  
number or email address that  
supports video messages.  
Prompt sound: (Pictures only) Sets the  
sound that plays before you take  
the picture.  
Opens a dialog box where you  
can adjust the volume during  
playback.  
Shutter sound: Determines whether a  
sound plays when you take a picture or  
video.  
Microphone: (Videos only) Turns the  
microphone on and off so that you can  
record videos with or without sound.  
TIP During playback, tap and drag the  
progress indicator bar to jump to a different  
section of the video. Select Pause to pause  
video playback.  
Resolution: Sets the default size for  
newly captured pictures or videos.  
Date stamp: (Pictures only) Determines  
whether the date the picture is taken  
appears on your pictures.  
Customizing your Camera settings  
You can customize the built-in camera’s  
settings for your Treo 755P smartphone.  
Review photos/videos: Determines  
whether you can review pictures or  
videos before saving them and how  
quickly they are automatically saved.  
1
2
Go to Camera View or Camcorder View.  
Press Menu . If you are in Camera  
View, the Photo Settings screen  
C A M E R A A N D C A M C O R D E R  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                               
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
Auto naming: Assigns a name to a  
series of pictures or videos to be  
captured, such as Seattle001,  
Seattle002, and so on.  
Pics & Videos  
Viewing a picture  
In addition to viewing the pictures you  
capture with the built-in camera, you can  
view pictures captured on many popular  
digital cameras or downloaded from the  
Internet. Your smartphone supports the  
following picture formats:  
•
•
•
•
1
JPG  
TIF  
BMP  
GIF  
Press Applications  
and select  
Pics&Videos  
.
2
Select the album that contains the  
picture you want to see.  
TIP To view an album from an expansion card,  
insert the card and select the album from the  
Album list. If the items on the card are not  
grouped into albums, select the card name  
from the list.  
4
Select Done.  
3
Select the picture you want to view.  
P I C S  
&
V I D E O S  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                 
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
4
Press Right or Left to scroll to the  
next item in the album.  
•
•
•
MPG  
M4V  
ASF (with MPEG-4 video and  
IMA-ADPCM audio)  
DID YOU KNOW? To see the outer edges of a  
picture that may not be visible, use the stylus  
to tap and drag the picture in any direction.  
•
AVI (with MJPEG video and PCM audio)  
1
Press Applications  
Pics&Videos  
and select  
5
6
If the picture has a voice caption, select  
to hear it.  
.
2
3
4
Select the album that contains the video  
you want to see.  
Tap the picture or press Center  
to  
return to Thumbnail View.  
Select the video you want to view.  
Playback begins automatically.  
TIP In Thumbnail View, you can group photos  
or videos to more easily locate them. Select  
one of the grouping options from the View  
menu.  
Hold down Right or Left to seek  
within the current video, or press Right  
or Left to scroll to the next item in  
the album.  
Viewing a video  
5
Press Center  
to return to  
In addition to viewing the videos you  
capture with the built-in camera, you can  
view videos captured on many popular  
digital cameras. Your smartphone supports  
the following types of video files:  
Thumbnail View.  
DID YOU KNOW? If you pause video playback  
and then close the video, the video starts  
where you left off the next time you play it.  
•
•
3GP  
3G2 (MPEG-4 video + QCELP audio +  
.3g2 file type)  
•
MP4  
P I C S  
&
V I DDEoOwSnload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
140  
                                   
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
Viewing a slide show  
1
From the Album list, select the album  
that contains the picture(s) or video(s)  
you want to send.  
1
2
3
Press Applications  
Pics&Videos  
and select  
.
2
3
Tap  
in the lower-right corner of the  
Highlight (or open) the album you want  
to view.  
screen.  
Select the pictures or videos to send, or  
select Select All to send the entire  
album.  
(Optional) Press Menu  
, select  
Options, and then select Auto-hide  
Toolbar Off if you want to see the  
toolbar.  
NOTE A + sign appears next to selected  
4
5
Press Space  
show.  
to start the slide  
items.  
Press Center  
previous view.  
to return to the  
DID YOU KNOW? You cannot send copyrighted  
pictures or videos that appear with a Lock icon  
in Thumbnail View or Picture list.  
TIP To set slide show options such as  
background music and transitions, open the  
Options menu and select Slideshow  
4
Select Share.  
Setting. Keep in mind that background music  
overrides audio captions when you’re running  
a slide show. Background music for a slide  
show also overrides any music that might be  
playing using the Pocket Tunes application on  
your smartphone if you start a slide show.  
Sending pictures or videos  
You can send pictures or videos to other  
devices that support picture and video  
messaging or to an email address.  
P I C S  
&
V I D E O S  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                       
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
4
Select the pictures or videos to copy, or  
select Select All to copy the entire  
album. (A + sign appears next to  
selected items.)  
5
6
Select Copy.  
Select the Copy items to pick list and  
select whether you want to copy the  
selected items to your device or to an  
expansion card.  
5
6
(Optional) Enter any text you want to  
add to the message.  
+ sign indicates  
a picture is  
selected  
Address and send the message.  
(See Creating and sending a multimedia  
message for details.)  
Copying a picture or video  
You can copy pictures or videos into  
another album. You can also copy pictures  
and videos between your smartphone and  
an expansion card.  
7
8
Select the Into album pick list and  
select the album you want to copy the  
selected items to.  
1
From the Album list, select the album  
that contains the picture(s) or video(s)  
you want to copy.  
Select Copy.  
TIP You can also move pictures and videos  
between albums. Open the Photo (or Video)  
menu and select Move to. The remaining  
steps are the same as copying pictures, but  
use the Move commands instead of the Copy  
commands.  
2
3
Press Menu  
.
Select Copy to from the Photo (or  
Video) menu.  
P I C S  
&
V I DDEoOwSnload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
142  
                   
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
Organizing pictures and videos  
Saving a picture as wallpaper  
1
2
3
Open the album you want to organize.  
Press Menu  
You can select a picture to use as wallpaper  
for the Phone application’s Main View.  
.
Select Album, and then select Add to  
album or Remove from album.  
1
Open the picture you want to save as  
wallpaper.  
4
5
Select the pictures or videos to add or  
remove, or select Select All to add or  
remove the entire album. (A + sign  
indicates that you want to add the item.  
An X sign indicates that you want to  
remove the item.)  
2
3
Press Menu  
.
Select Options, and then select Save  
as Wallpaper.  
4
When the confirmation message  
appears, confirm by selecting Yes or  
decline by selecting No.  
Select Add or Remove.  
Adding a picture to a contact entry  
DID YOU KNOW? You can also open the Album  
list from Camera View or Camcorder View by  
selecting the icon in the lower-right corner.  
1
Open the picture you want to add to a  
contact.  
2
3
Press Menu  
.
TIP Install the Palm® Files application to easily  
browse and manage files on an expansion  
card. Press Applications, select My Treo,  
select the Bonus tab, and then select Files.  
Select Options, and then select Save  
as Contact.  
4
Select the contact you want to add this  
picture to.  
TIP To change the name, add a caption, or  
view other picture or video information,  
highlight (or open) the item, open the Photo  
(or Video) menu, and select Details.  
Rotating a picture  
1
2
3
4
Open the picture you want to rotate.  
Press Menu  
.
Select Rotate from the Photo menu.  
Select the orientation.  
P I C S  
&
V I D E O S  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                     
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
Deleting a picture or video  
You can view and edit synchronized  
pictures and videos in the Palm Media  
desktop application. Open Palm® Desktop  
software and click the Media icon. For  
information about using the Palm Media  
desktop application, refer to the  
1
Open the album that contains the  
picture(s) or video(s) you want to delete.  
2
3
Press Menu  
.
Select Delete from the Photo (or  
Video) menu.  
Palm Desktop Online Help.  
4
Select the pictures or videos that you  
want to delete, or select Select All to  
delete the entire album. (An X sign  
appears next to selected items.)  
If you want to manage photos and videos  
directly from the location in which they're  
stored, you can find your pictures and  
videos in the following locations:  
5
6
Select Delete.  
Windows:  
Select Delete to confirm the deletion.  
•
•
•
•
My Documents\ My Photos\Palm  
Photos\ <user name>\Internal  
TIP You can also highlight a picture or video in  
Thumbnail View, and then press Backspace  
to delete the highlighted item.  
My Documents\ My Photos\Palm  
Photos\ <user name>\Expansion Card  
My Documents\ My Videos\Palm  
Videos\ <user name>\Internal  
Viewing pictures and videos on your  
computer  
My Documents\ My Videos\Palm  
Videos\<user name>\Expansion Card  
When you synchronize your Treo 755P  
smartphone, your pictures and videos are  
copied to your desktop computer. You can  
view pictures in JPEG format and videos in  
MPEG-4 format (3G2 file extension). You  
can email them to friends using your  
desktop email application.  
Mac:  
Mac HD : Users : <Mac user name> :  
•
Pictures : Palm Photos : <Palm device  
name> : Internal  
P I C S  
&
V I DDEoOwSnload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
144  
                                   
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
•
•
•
Mac HD : Users : <Mac user name> :  
Pictures : Palm Photos : <Palm device  
name> : Expansion Card  
card. After you transfer the music files, you  
can play them using the Pocket Tunes  
application on your smartphone.  
™
Mac HD : Users : <Mac user name> :  
Movies : Palm Videos : <Palm device  
name> : Internal  
TIP You can upgrade Pocket Tunes to a version  
that supports more music file formats (such  
as WMA), supports subscription music, and  
includes additional features. For more info,  
visit www.pocket-tunes.com/palm.  
Mac HD : Users : <Mac user name> :  
Movies : Palm Videos : <Palm device  
name> : Expansion Card  
DID YOU KNOW? If a call comes in when you’re  
listening to music, you can take the call and  
the music pauses automatically. After you  
finish the call, the music starts again.  
™
Pocket Tunes  
Setting up Windows Media Player for  
MP3  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Mac You need an  
expansion card (sold separately) to listen to  
music on your smartphone. You cannot  
transfer MP3 files from your Mac directly  
onto your smartphone.  
On a Windows computer, you need to set  
Windows Media Player to save your music  
files in MP3 format in order for the files to  
be compatible with Pocket Tunes.  
You can listen to music through the  
1
Connect your smartphone to your  
computer with the sync cable.  
speaker on the back of your smartphone or  
through the included stereo headphones.  
To listen to music on your smartphone, you  
need to convert the music files into MP3  
format using Windows Media Player  
(Windows computers) or iTunes (Mac  
computers), and then transfer the music  
files to your smartphone or an expansion  
2
On your smartphone, press  
Applications  
pTunes  
and select  
.
3
On your computer, open Windows  
Media Player, and then click the  
P O C K E T T U N E S ™  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
full-screen icon in the upper-right corner  
to maximize the window.  
4
5
Click Tools, and then click Options.  
Uncheck  
box  
Click the Rip Music tab, click the  
Format pick list, and then select mp3.  
Click OK.  
6
7
Click Tools, and then click Options.  
Click the Devices tab, select Palm  
Handheld from the Devices list, and  
then click Properties.  
9
Click OK, and then click OK again.  
You now have set up Windows Media  
Player to transfer MP3 files to the Pocket  
Tunes application on your smartphone.  
Select your  
smartphone  
Setting up iTunes for MP3  
On a Mac, use iTunes (included with OS X)  
to convert music from a CD to MP3 format.  
For more information on using the iTunes  
software, see the documentation that  
came with your Mac.  
Click  
Properties  
8
Click the Quality tab, uncheck the  
Convert files as required by this  
handheld (recommended) box. Click  
Apply.  
1
2
3
On your Mac, open iTunes.  
Select Preferences.  
Click the Advanced button at the top of  
the window, and then click Importing.  
™
P O C K E T  
T UDNoEwSnload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
146  
   
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
4
5
Click the Import Using pop-up menu  
and select MP3 Encoder.  
1
2
Connect your smartphone to your  
computer with the USB sync cable.  
(Optional) Click the Setting pop-up  
On your smartphone, press  
menu and select Good Quality.  
Applications  
pTunes  
and select  
.
TIP Mac If you want greater control over the  
file size and sound quality of your MP3 files,  
select Custom from the Setting pop-up  
menu.  
3
4
If you are transferring MP3 files from a  
Mac, insert an expansion card into your  
smartphone. This step is optional for  
Windows users.  
Do one of the following:  
Transferring MP3 files from your computer  
The Pocket Tunes software that comes  
with your smartphone is compatible with  
the popular MP3 audio file format. If your  
MP3 files are already on your computer’s  
hard drive, you need to transfer them to  
your smartphone to listen to them on your  
smartphone.  
WINDOWS ONLY Open Windows Media  
Player on your computer. Select the Sync  
tab, and then select Palm Handheld from  
the drop-down list. Select Start Sync. The  
files are transferred to your smartphone.  
If an expansion card is inserted into the  
smartphone, Windows Media Player  
copies the MP3 files to the expansion card.  
If you don’t have an expansion card  
inserted, the MP3 files are copied to your  
smartphone’s memory.  
NOTE Do not press the sync button on  
your cable. Windows Media Player  
transfers the files, so there’s no need to do  
anything.  
IMPORTANT You must synchronize your  
smartphone with your computer at least  
once before you can transfer MP3 files  
from your computer.  
MAC ONLY Drag and drop the MP3 files  
onto the Send To Handheld droplet in the  
Palm folder. Select your device name, the  
P O C K E T T U N E S ™  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
file name, and the destination (card). Click  
OK. Synchronize your smartphone with  
your computer. Be patient; transferring  
music to an expansion card can take  
several minutes.  
4
Select the tracks you want to convert to  
MP3.  
5
6
Select Rip Music.  
Transfer the MP3 files to your  
smartphone as described in Transferring  
MP3 files from your computer.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can also use a card reader  
accessory (sold separately) to transfer MP3  
files from your computer to your expansion  
card. Create a Music_Audio folder in the root  
directory of the card, and store your MP3 files  
in this folder.  
MAC ONLY  
1
2
On your Mac, open iTunes.  
Insert the music CD into the CD drive  
on your Mac.  
3
4
5
Check the boxes next to the tracks you  
want to convert to MP3.  
Transferring music from a CD to your  
smartphone  
Click the Import button in the  
upper-right corner of the iTunes window.  
If your songs are on a CD and you want to  
listen to them on your smartphone, you  
need to convert them to MP3 format on  
your computer before you transfer the files  
to your smartphone.  
When the songs are finished importing,  
click the Eject Disk button in the  
lower-right corner of the iTunes window.  
6
Transfer the MP3 files to your  
smartphone as described in Transferring  
MP3 files from your computer.  
WINDOWS ONLY  
1
2
3
On your computer, open Windows  
Media Player.  
Listening to music on your Treo  
smartphone  
Insert the music CD into your  
computer’s CD drive.  
CAUTION Protect your hearing. Listening  
to this device at full volume for a long  
period of time can damage your hearing.  
Select the Rip tab.  
™
P O C K E T  
T UDNoEwSnload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
148  
                 
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
1
2
Make sure the Ringer switch is set to  
Sound On . See Silencing sounds  
for more information.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can also press Space to  
pause and resume playback, as well as use  
the 5-way to navigate among songs or pause  
and resume playback.  
Press Applications  
and select  
pTunes  
.
TIP You can change the settings on your  
smartphone so that pressing and holding the  
Side button opens Pocket Tunes. See  
Reassigning buttons for details.  
Progress  
indicator  
Play/Pause  
Choose  
Song  
Previous  
song  
3
Do any of the following:  
• To play or resume playback of the  
current song, select Play  
• To play the next song, select Next  
Song  
• To play the previous song, select  
Previous Song  
• To play a different song, select  
.
Next song  
Volume  
.
Pocket Tunes continues playing until it  
reaches the end of your list or until you  
select Pause  
. Music continues to play  
.
even if you switch to another application or  
turn off your screen. If you want to stop  
playing music when you exit Pocket Tunes,  
, select Background Prefs  
from the Prefs menu, uncheck the Enable  
Choose Song  
and select a  
song from the list.  
press Menu  
• To adjust the volume during playback,  
press the Volume button on the side  
of your smartphone.  
background play box, and then select OK.  
• To pause playback select Pause  
.
P O C K E T T U N E S ™  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                   
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
Creating a playlist  
Editing a playlist  
If you want to play a group of songs in a  
particular order, you can create a playlist.  
1
Press Applications  
pTunes  
Press Menu  
and select  
.
2
3
.
1
Press Applications  
pTunes  
Press Menu  
and select  
.
Select Actions, and then select  
Manage Playlists.  
2
3
.
4
5
Highlight a playlist, and then select Edit.  
Select Actions, and then select  
Manage Playlists.  
Do any of the following:  
4
5
Select New, and then enter a name for  
the playlist.  
• To delete a song from the playlist,  
select the song and then select  
Remove.  
Select Add Song. Select the songs you  
want to include on the playlist.  
• To add a song, select Add Song,  
check a song’s box, and then  
select Done.  
• To move a song up or down one slot,  
select a song and then select Up or  
Down.  
6
Select Save List.  
TIP To delete a playlist, select Manage  
Playlists from the Actions menu, select the  
playlist, and then select Delete List. Select  
Yes to confirm the deletion.  
6
Select Save List.  
TIP To play songs from a playlist, open Pocket  
Tunes, select Choose Songs, and then select  
Playlists. Select the playlist you want to play,  
and then select All.  
™
P O C K E T  
T UDNoEwSnload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
150  
                                 
CHAPTER  
7
Your personal information  
organizer  
Say good-bye to paper calendars and throw away those  
scribbled to-do lists. Your Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone is all  
you need to organize your personal information and keep it with  
you wherever you go.  
You never lose your information, even if your battery is  
completely drained. All of your personal info is backed up each  
time you synchronize, and your info is kept private when you  
use the security features on your smartphone. Also, you can  
easily share info with others electronically.  
Benefits  
•
Track current, future, and past  
appointments  
•
•
Set reminders for appointments,  
birthdays, important tasks, and  
more  
•
Make to-do lists that get done  
Before you call your friend in  
London, check the time first  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
In this chapter  
Contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Calendar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
1
2
Press Phone  
.
Contacts  
Select the Contacts favorite button.  
Contacts is where you enter information  
about people you know. You can access  
this info from the Phone application to dial  
phone numbers and create favorites, and  
from the Messaging and email applications  
to send messages. When you create a  
contact, you can also assign a photo and  
ringtone ID to that contact, so you know  
when they call you.  
TIP You can also open Contacts from  
Applications View. Press Applications and  
select Contacts.  
3
4
Select New Contact.  
Use the 5-way  
to move between  
fields as you enter information.  
DID YOU KNOW? If your company uses  
Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 or 2007, you  
may be able to sync Contacts directly with the  
server. See Working with Microsoft Exchange  
ActiveSync for info.  
Adding a contact  
5
(Optional) Do any of the following:  
TIP If you have several contacts to enter, it’s  
more efficient to use the Palm® Desktop  
software (included) or Microsoft Outlook®  
(sold separately) on your computer and then  
sync your smartphone with your computer.  
For more info see Synchronizing information—  
the basics.  
Add a caller ID photo: Select the  
Picture box, and then do one of the  
following:  
• Select Camera to take a picture and  
add it to this contact when you  
save the picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download. C O N T A C T S  
153  
                       
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
• Select Photos to add an existing  
Viewing or changing contact information  
picture to this contact.  
1
In the Contacts list, begin entering one  
of the following for the contact you  
want to view or edit:  
Add a caller ID ringtone: Select the  
Ringtone pick list and select a ringtone  
from the list to give incoming calls from  
this contact a distinctive ring.  
• First name (JOH for John)  
• Last name (SMI for Smith)  
Place the entry in a category or mark  
it private: Select Details. (See Working  
with private entries for more info.)  
• First initial and last name (JSM for  
John Smith)  
2
3
Select the name of the entry you want  
to open.  
Add a note to an entry: Select Note  
.
Do one of the following:  
Display additional fields for this  
• Select Edit, make changes to the  
entry as necessary, and then select  
Done.  
contact: Select Plus  
.
6
After you enter all the information,  
• Select Map, wait for Google Maps to  
locate matching items. Select an item,  
select To to request directions to this  
location. In the From location field,  
enter or select your starting location,  
and then select OK. When the route  
summary appears, select OK to view  
the first step in the directions. Tap the  
select Done.  
TIP You can assign a ringtone to an entire  
category of contacts. For example, use a  
special ringtone for categories such as Family,  
Work, or Golf Buddies. Select the category  
pick list in the upper-right corner, select Edit  
Categories, and then select the category.  
Select the ringtone on the Edit Category  
screen.  
forward  
and back  
buttons at the bottom of the screen to  
view the next or previous step in the  
directions.  
C O N T A C T S Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
154  
               
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
• Select Map, wait for Google Maps to  
locate matching items. Select an item,  
Select From to request directions  
from this location. In the To location  
field, enter or select your destination,  
and then select OK. When the route  
summary appears, select OK to view  
the first step in the directions. Tap the  
3
4
Press Menu  
.
Select Business Card from the Record  
menu.  
TIP After you define your business card, you  
can beam it to other Palm OS® devices. In any  
Phone view or the Contacts application, open  
the Record menu and select Beam Business  
Card.  
forward  
and back  
buttons at the bottom of the screen to  
view the next or previous step in the  
directions.  
Calendar  
TIP In the Contacts list, press Up or Down on  
the 5-way to move to the previous or next  
Contacts record.  
Calendar is a powerful organizer application  
that helps you manage your schedule. You  
can view your calendar by day, week, or  
month, or as an agenda list that combines  
your Tasks list and email notifications with  
your appointments. Schedule repeating  
meetings or block out a vacation by  
creating one event set to repeat at an  
interval you specify. Color-code your  
appointments by category and add notes  
with helpful information.  
Deleting a contact  
1
2
3
Open the contact you want to delete.  
Press Menu  
.
Select Delete Contact from the Record  
menu, and then select OK.  
Defining your business card  
1
Create a new contact and enter your  
own business card info.  
2
Open the contact entry containing your  
business card info.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download. C A L E N D A R  
155  
                       
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
Week View: Shows your schedule for  
an entire week. The time frames are  
based on the Start Time and End Time  
settings in Calendar Preferences.  
DID YOU KNOW? If your company uses  
Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 or 2007, you  
may be able to synchronize Calendar events  
directly with the server. See Working with  
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync for details.  
Month View: Shows your schedule for  
a whole month.  
Displaying your calendar  
•
•
From any Calendar view, open the  
Options menu and select Year View to  
view a calendar for an entire year.  
•
Press Calendar  
repeatedly to  
cycle through the various views:  
Agenda View: Shows your daily  
schedule, the number of unread email  
messages, and any items on your Tasks  
list that are overdue or due today. If  
there’s room, Agenda View also lists  
events on future dates.  
From any Calendar view (except Agenda  
View), use the 5-way  
to go to  
another day, week, month, or year  
(based on the current view).  
•
From any Calendar view (except Agenda  
View), select Go To, and then select a  
date from the calendar.  
Day View: Shows your daily schedule  
one day at a time.  
TIP You can customize your smartphone to  
display the most current Calendar event in the  
Phone application’s Main View. Press Phone,  
open the Options menu, and then select  
Phone Display Options. Check the Show  
Calendar event box.  
C A L E N D A R Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
156  
                                           
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
Creating an event  
6
(Optional) To assign a time zone to the  
event, select the Time Zone pick list  
and select a city in the time zone you  
want.  
TIP If you have several appointments to enter,  
it’s more efficient to use Palm Desktop  
software (included) or Microsoft Outlook (sold  
separately) on your computer and then  
synchronize your smartphone with your  
computer. For more information, see  
7
8
Select OK.  
Enter a description for the event.  
IMPORTANT If you use Palm Desktop  
software, do not add time zones to your  
events. Palm Desktop does not support  
time zones.  
Synchronizing information—the basics.  
1
2
Press Calendar  
appears.  
until Day View  
Press Left or Right to select the  
If you use Microsoft Outlook, you can use  
the time zone feature, but you must install  
the conduit from the Palm Software  
Installation CD that came with your Treo  
755P smartphone (or a subsequent update)  
on all the computers with which you sync  
your smartphone. Chapura PocketMirror  
and other earlier Microsoft Outlook  
desired day.  
Selected  
date  
Selected  
day  
conduits do not support time zones.  
3
4
Select New.  
Using the keyboard, enter a starting  
hour and minute for the event, such as  
545 for 5:45.  
5
Select the End Time box and enter the  
ending hour and minute for the event.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download. C A L E N D A R  
157  
                           
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
4
Select OK.  
TIP To automatically assign a time zone to  
your events, open the Options menu, select  
Preferences, and check the New events use  
time zones box. All your new events will be  
assigned to your local time zone (existing  
events aren’t affected), and you can change  
the time zone setting for individual events.  
Type of time  
units  
Number of  
time units  
TIP If you want your events with time zones to  
stay at the same time in Calendar, regardless  
of the time zone you are in, go to Date & Time  
Preferences, select the Automatically Set  
pick list, and select Date and time. If you  
select Date, time and time zone, the event  
time shifts if you travel to a different time  
zone. See Setting the date and time for  
information.  
DID YOU KNOW? When an alarm occurs, the  
Alert screen displays all your pending alerts.  
Select an alert description to jump to that  
item, or check the box to clear that alert.  
Creating an untimed event  
Adding an alarm to an event  
An untimed event, such as a holiday or  
deadline, does not occur at a particular  
time.  
1
2
3
In Calendar, select the event.  
Select Details.  
Check the Alarm box and select the  
number of minutes, hours, or days  
before the event that you would like to  
receive the alarm.  
1
2
3
Press Calendar  
Day View.  
until you are in  
Press Left or Right to go to the  
date of the event.  
Make sure no times are highlighted.  
TIP The alarm for untimed events is defined by  
minutes, days, or hours before midnight of  
the date of the event.  
C A L E N D A R Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
158  
                       
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
4
Enter a description for the event.  
A diamond appears next to the  
description of an untimed event.  
select Other to define a custom  
interval.  
4
Select OK.  
Scheduling a repeating event  
This icon  
indicates a  
repeating  
event.  
TIP To enter a birthday or anniversary, add this  
info to the person’s Contacts entry and it  
automatically appears in your Calendar.  
TIP To enter a holiday, create an untimed  
event. Then, from the Details screen, select  
Every year as the repeat interval.  
1
2
3
Create an event, and then select it.  
DID YOU KNOW? If you sync with Microsoft  
Outlook and your events include other people,  
a With field appears in the Details dialog box  
and your attendee info appears in this field  
after you sync.  
Select Details.  
Select the Repeat pick list, and then  
select a repeat interval. If the interval  
you need doesn’t appear on the list,  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download. C A L E N D A R  
159  
                     
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
Color-coding your schedule  
Editing or deleting an event  
Use color-coding to quickly spot various  
types of events. For example, make  
appointments with family green,  
coworkers blue, and friends red. Follow  
these steps to create a category and  
assign it a color-code.  
1
Select the event you want to edit or  
delete.  
2
3
Select Details.  
In addition to the settings covered  
earlier in this chapter, you can also  
change any of the following settings:  
1
From Day View, select an event  
description or select an empty timeslot.  
Date and Time: Displays when the  
event takes place. Change these  
settings to reschedule the event.  
2
3
Select Details.  
Select the Category pick list and select  
Edit Categories.  
Location: Provides a description of  
where the event takes place.  
4
Do one of the following:  
Category: Sets the color-coded  
category for this event.  
• To create a new category, select New  
and then enter a category name.  
Note  
: Provides space for you to  
• To add a color to an existing category,  
select a category and select Edit.  
enter additional text.  
Delete: Removes the event from your  
calendar.  
5
6
7
Select the color you want to give this  
category, and then select OK.  
(Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add  
or edit more categories.  
4
Select OK.  
TIP To save memory, you can purge your old  
events. Open the Record menu and select  
Purge. Select the Delete events older than  
pick list and select a time frame. Select OK.  
Select OK two more times.  
Now that the categories are set up with  
colors, you can assign categories to your  
events to color-code them. See the next  
section for details.  
C A L E N D A R Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
160  
                       
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
Customizing display options for your  
calendar  
the Background box, select the image  
placeholder, and then select a photo.  
Adjust the fade setting so that the text  
is easy to read against the photo.  
1
2
Press Menu  
.
Select Options, and then select  
Display Options.  
5
Select Day and set any of the following  
Day View options:  
3
4
Select the Default View pick list and  
select the view you want to see when  
you open Calendar.  
Select Agenda and set any of the  
following options:  
Show Category List: The Category  
pick list appears in Day View.  
Show Time Bars: The time bars appear  
in Day View to show the duration of an  
event and to illustrate event conflicts.  
Show Due Tasks: The tasks that are  
due today and the tasks that are  
overdue appear in Agenda View.  
Compress Day View: When this box is  
unchecked, all time slots appear on the  
screen. When this box is checked, start  
and end times appear for each event,  
but blank time slots near the bottom of  
the screen disappear to minimize  
scrolling.  
Show Messages: The number of read  
and unread email messages displays in  
Agenda View.  
Background: A favorite photo becomes  
the Agenda View background. Check  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download. C A L E N D A R  
161  
                                                         
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
Show Category Column: The  
7
Select OK.  
color-coded category marker appears  
between the time and the description to Selecting alarm tones  
indicate the category under which the  
event is filed.  
1
2
Press Menu  
.
Select Options, and then select Sound  
6
Select Month and set any of the  
Preferences.  
following Month View options:  
3
4
5
Select the Application pick list and  
select Calendar.  
Select the Volume pick list and select  
the volume level.  
Select the Vibrate pick list and select an  
option for how you want your  
smartphone to vibrate for an event  
alarm.  
6
Select tones from any of the following  
pick lists:  
Show Category List: The Category pick  
list appears in Month View.  
Timed Events: The events that are  
scheduled for a specific time appear in  
Month View.  
Untimed Events: The events that are  
scheduled for a specific date but not a  
specific time appear in Month View.  
Daily Repeating Events: The events  
that repeat every day appear in Month  
View.  
Alarm Sound: The tone played the first  
time your alarm goes off.  
C A L E N D A R Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
162  
                                         
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
Reminder Sound: The tone played if an  
alarm is not acknowledged and  
the alarm repeats itself.  
World Clock  
World Clock displays the day and time in  
three cities anywhere around the globe.  
Whether you’re traveling or staying home,  
it’s easy to keep track of the best time to  
reach your business associates, friends,  
and family in faraway places.  
Repeat: The number of times the alarm  
repeats itself if the alarm is not  
acknowledged.  
Default Alarm: The default timeframe  
for the alarm field.  
7
Select Done.  
TIP If you did not select the option to get the  
date and time from the mobile network, then  
you can set the city at the top of the screen to  
a fixed location.  
TIP You can also record sounds and use them  
as alarms. Select Manage on the Sound &  
Alerts Preferences screen.  
•
•
To record a sound, select New.  
To play a sound, select it and press Center  
Selecting cities  
on the 5-way.  
To delete a sound, select it and press  
Backspace.  
To send a sound, select it and then select  
World Clock shows the system date and  
time above the world map. If you selected  
the option to get the date and time from  
the mobile network (see Setting the date  
and time), the Verizon Wireless network  
automatically updates the time display to  
match the local time when you travel.  
•
•
Send.  
DID YOU KNOW? Your smartphone includes a  
silent alarm that can vibrate even when the  
Ringer switch is set to Sound Off (see  
Silencing sounds).  
Below the world map you can view the  
time in two other cities. If you travel a lot,  
you may want to select your home city as  
one of these two cities, so that you always  
know what time it is at home.  
W O R L D C L O C K  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
1
2
Press Applications  
World Clock  
and select  
1
Select a City pick list and select Edit  
List.  
.
Select a City pick list, and select a city  
in the same time zone as the city you  
want to track.  
2
3
Select Add.  
Select a location in the same time zone  
as the city you want to add, and then  
select OK.  
4
5
Enter the name of the city.  
Select Location, select Map, select the  
location of the city, and then select OK.  
6
If the city does not observe Daylight  
Savings Time, uncheck this box. If  
Daylight Savings Time is observed,  
enter Start and End dates.  
7
Select OK.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can run your stylus over  
the map to see the time in other cities. The  
shadow over the map represents nighttime  
moving across the globe.  
Setting an alarm  
The next time you travel, don’t rely on a  
hotel alarm clock to get you to that  
important meeting. Use your smartphone  
instead. World Clock includes a built-in  
alarm feature that you can use as a travel  
alarm.  
TIP World Clock does not automatically update  
the system time for daylight savings time. To  
change the Daylight Savings Time setting,  
see Setting the date and time.  
1
2
Select Off in the upper-right corner.  
Adding cities  
Select the time you want the alarm to  
sound.  
If the city you want to display is not in the  
predefined list, you can add it.  
3
Select OK.  
W O R L D C L O C K  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
3
Enter a description of the task. The text  
can be longer than one line.  
TIP To customize the alarm sound and  
volume, open the Options menu and select  
Alarm Preferences.  
Setting task priority, due date, and other  
details  
TIP Make sure the Ringer switch is set to  
Sound On, so that you can hear the alarm.  
The Details dialog box enables you to  
assign a priority level, due date, category,  
privacy flag, and other details for each task.  
Tasks  
1
Select the task to which you want to  
assign details.  
You can use Tasks to remind you of tasks  
you need to complete and to keep a record  
of when you finish tasks.  
2
3
Select Details.  
Set any of the following:  
Priority: Select the priority number for  
this task (1 is most important). Later  
you can arrange your tasks based on the  
importance of each task.  
Adding a task  
1
Press Applications  
Tasks  
Select New to create a new task.  
and select  
.
2
TIP You can also select the priority from the  
Tasks list by selecting the number next to a  
task and then selecting a priority level.  
T A S K S  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
Private: Check this box to mark this  
task private. See Working with private  
entries for additional information.  
: Select this button to enter  
additional text that you want to  
associate with the task.  
4
Select OK.  
Category: Assign the task to a specific  
category. To add a new category, select  
Edit Categories and then select New.  
TIP Press Menu to access other features such  
as importing phone numbers into the Tasks  
list.  
Due Date: Select the Due Date pick list  
and select a due date for the task.  
Checking off a task  
1
2
Select the task you want to check off.  
TIP If you turn on the Show Due Dates option  
in the Tasks Preferences screen, you can  
change the due date later by selecting the  
task’s due date in the Tasks list.  
Press Center  
or tap the box to  
check off the task.  
Alarm: Set an alarm for this task.  
Repeat: Indicate whether the task  
occurs at regular intervals and how  
often it repeats. When you check off a  
repeating task, the next instance of this  
task automatically appears in your task  
list.  
T A S K S  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
Today, Last 7 Days, Next 7 Days, or  
Past Due.  
TIP If you accidentally check off a task and  
need to uncheck it, highlight the task again  
and press Center on the 5-way to uncheck it.  
TIP You can set Tasks to record the date that  
you completed a task, and you can select to  
show or hide completed tasks. Completed  
tasks remain in the memory of your  
smartphone until you purge them.  
DID YOU KNOW? Overdue tasks have an  
exclamation point (!) next to the due date.  
Organizing your tasks  
•
Category: Displays tasks that are  
assigned to the selected category.  
Select the Category pick list to select a  
different category.  
In the Tasks list, select one of these  
options:  
•
All: Displays all your tasks.  
•
Date: Displays tasks that are due in a  
specific time frame. Select the Date  
pick list (in the title bar) to select Due  
T A S K S  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
Deleting a task  
3
Set any of the following preferences:  
1
2
3
Select the task you want to delete.  
Press Menu  
Sort by: Indicates the order in which  
your tasks appear in the list.  
.
Select Delete Task from the Record  
Show Completed Tasks: Displays  
menu.  
tasks you’ve checked off.  
4
Select OK.  
Record Completion Date: Replaces  
due date with the completion date  
when you complete (check off) the task.  
TIP To save memory, you can purge all  
completed tasks. Open the Record menu and  
select Purge. Select OK.  
Show Due Dates: Displays task due  
dates and inserts an exclamation point  
(!) next to overdue tasks.  
Customizing Tasks  
Tasks Preferences enable you to control  
the appearance of the Tasks list.  
Show Priorities: Displays the priority  
setting for each task.  
1
In the Tasks list, press Menu  
.
Show Categories: Displays the  
category for each task.  
Alarm Sound: Sets the sound for the  
alarms you assign to your tasks.  
4
Select OK.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can display your tasks in  
your calendar. See Customizing display  
options for your calendar for details.  
2
Select Options, and then select  
Preferences.  
T A S K S  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                         
CHAPTER  
8
Your memos and documents  
With its ability to store large amounts of important information,  
your Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone lets you take your office  
with you—including your Microsoft® Office and PDF files. You  
can keep updated copies of the files on both your smartphone  
and your computer so that you can work on them in the most  
convenient location any time.  
Leave your note pad and voice recorder at home. Use Memos  
to type notes. Use Voice Memo to record notes, agenda items,  
and other important thoughts, and play them back, right on  
your smartphone. You can even send your notes and voice  
memos to a friend or colleague by attaching them to an email  
or multimedia message.  
Benefits  
•
Manage Word, Excel®,  
PowerPoint®, and PDF files on your  
smartphone  
•
•
Improve productivity by taking  
important docs, spreadsheets, and  
presentations with you  
Capture thoughts on the fly  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
In this chapter  
Documents To Go® Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Voice Memo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Memos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S  
8
www.dataviz.com/office2007 (additional  
fees may apply).  
Documents To Go®  
Professional  
Here are a few more examples of what you  
can do with Documents:  
NOTE On your smartphone, the  
companion application for Documents To  
Go® is named Documents.  
•
•
•
Send and receive email attachments in  
Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and Acrobat  
file formats (DOC, XLS, PPT, and PDF).  
View Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and  
Adobe® Acrobat® files (DOC, XLS, PPT,  
and PDF).  
With the Documents application on your  
smartphone, you can take your important  
office info with you. You can create, view,  
and edit Microsoft Word and Excel files  
directly on your smartphone. You can also  
view and manage PowerPoint and PDF  
files. For example, you can open email  
attachments, files you download with the  
web browser, and files stored on an  
Create or edit a Word-compatible  
document or Excel-compatible  
spreadsheet on your smartphone, and  
then save it in the native DOC or XLS  
format.  
•
Create a PowerPoint presentation on  
your computer, use the Documents To  
Go desktop application to optimize the  
file for your smartphone, and then sync  
the file onto your smartphone. View or  
edit the file on your smartphone, and  
then sync again to transfer the changes  
to the original PowerPoint file on your  
computer.  
expansion card (sold separately)—as long  
as the files are in a supported format.  
NOTE The version of Documents To Go  
that comes with your smartphone does not  
support Microsoft Office 2007. To access  
Office 2007 files on your smartphone, you  
must save the files in Office 2003 format.  
For information about an upgrade that  
supports Office 2007, go to  
T O G O ®  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All ManDuaOlCsUSMeaErNchT SAnd DownPloRaOd.F E S S I O N A L  
171  
                             
Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S  
8
NOTE The Documents application does  
not support some editing functions, such  
as multiple font sizes and spell checking.  
Opening a document  
In the Documents application, you can  
view and open any Word, Excel,  
PowerPoint, or Acrobat (PDF) file on your  
smartphone or an expansion card that is  
inserted in the expansion card slot.  
Go to www.palm.com/mypalm/  
755pverizon-bonus to download and install  
the Documents To Go desktop software. It  
enables you to synchronize Microsoft  
Office files so that changes you make to  
these files show up on both your  
smartphone and your computer. You can  
save files in their native Office format or  
make use of the optimized Documents To  
Go formats.  
1
Press Applications  
Documents  
and select  
.
TIP For more info on the Documents To Go  
desktop application, click the Documents To  
Go icon on your computer, and then click  
Help, or go to www.dataviz.com.  
2
Select the document you want from the  
list.  
TIP Download and install the Files application  
to easily browse and manage files on an  
expansion card. Press Applications, select  
My Treo, select the Bonus tab, and then  
select Files. See Installing bonus software  
from My Treo on your smartphone for more  
info on installing applications.  
TIP When you work on a file on your  
smartphone, you can save it to your  
smartphone or an expansion card. Open the  
File menu, select Save As, and then select  
the location where you want to save the file.  
D O C U M E N T S T O G O ®  
Download frPoRmOWF EwSwS.SI OoNmAaLnuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
172  
             
Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S  
8
Memos  
TIP You can assign categories to your memos.  
Open the memo you want to change, select  
the category pick list at the top of the screen,  
and select a category. To add a new category,  
select Edit Categories and then select New.  
Memos are a great way to store notes on  
your Treo 755P smartphone.  
DID YOU KNOW? Each memo can include 4,096  
characters of text.  
Deleting a memo  
1
2
3
Open the memo you want to delete.  
Press Menu  
.
Creating a memo  
Select Delete Memo from the Record  
1
2
3
Press Applications  
Memos  
and select  
menu.  
.
4
Select OK.  
Enter the text you want to appear in the  
memo.  
Select Done.  
Voice Memo  
Voice Memo provides a place for you to  
record and play back notes and other  
important thoughts directly on your  
smartphone.  
NOTE Voice memos are not updated or  
backed up during synchronization.  
M E M O S  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                 
Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S  
8
Creating a voice memo  
DID YOU KNOW? You can assign the Side button  
to the Voice Memo app so that you can  
simply press and hold the Side button to  
begin recording (see Reassigning buttons).  
When recording a voice memo, face your  
smartphone’s screen while speaking.  
1
Press Applications  
Voice Memo  
and select  
TIP If you need to pause while recording,  
press and hold Center on the 5-way. Release  
the button to resume recording.  
.
2
Do either of the following:  
• Press and hold the Side button on  
your smartphone while recording your  
memo. After you finish recording,  
release the Side button.  
DID YOU KNOW? Your recording pauses  
automatically when you receive a call. If you  
ignore the call, you can press Center on the  
5-way to resume recording. If you answer the  
call, recording stops and saves; you cannot  
resume a previous recording; you must start  
another voice memo.  
• Press and release the Side button on  
your smartphone. After you finish  
recording, press the Side button  
again.  
Listening to a voice memo  
The memo is automatically saved to  
your smartphone.  
1
Press Applications  
Voice Memo  
and select  
.
3
(Optional) Enter a title for the voice  
memo.  
2
In the Voice Memo list, navigate to the  
voice memo title and then press  
Center  
to select it. The voice  
memo begins to play.  
V O I C E M E M O  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S  
8
TIP To adjust the volume level, press the  
Volume button on the side of your  
smartphone.  
TIP To change a voice memo title, open the  
Voice Memo menu and select Rename  
Memo.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can send a voice memo in  
an email or MMS message (see the  
documentation for your email application, or  
Creating and sending a multimedia message).  
You can also use Bluetooth® wireless  
technology to send a voice memo to a nearby  
Bluetooth device (see Sending info over a  
Bluetooth wireless connection).  
3
Press Center  
playback.  
to pause or stop  
V O I C E M E M O  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S  
8
V O I C E M E M O  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER  
9
Your application and  
info management tools  
Synchronization is a great way to transfer, update, and back up  
info on your Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone. Synchronizing  
simply means that info you entered or updated in one place  
(your smartphone or your computer) is automatically updated in  
the other. There’s no need to enter info twice.  
Expansion cards (sold separately) provide a compact and  
limitless storage solution. When one card becomes full, simply  
use another card to carry your extra music and video clips and  
to install and run cool games and other software, from  
dictionaries to travel guides.  
Benefits  
•
Locate info in your applications  
with the Find feature  
•
•
Quickly enter, update, and protect  
your info on your computer and  
your smartphone  
•
Install applications, games, and  
other software  
Store, carry, and exchange info  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
In this chapter  
Using Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
Viewing and using the alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
Installing applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
Removing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
Viewing application info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
Sending information with Bluetooth® wireless technology . . . . . . . 186  
Beaming information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
Synchronizing information—advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191  
Using expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
4
In the search results, select the text you  
want to review, or select Find More to  
continue the search.  
Using Find  
The Find feature locates any text in the  
built-in applications and databases and  
in some third-party applications. The Find  
feature searches for the group of  
characters you specify, including characters  
that are part of a word. Find is not  
case-sensitive.  
Find also includes Google Maps links that  
help you find a location, business, or  
directions to the word you’re searching for.  
For example, to find a nearby pizza place,  
enter pizza followed by a space and your  
zip code, such as “pizza 95060.”  
Viewing and using  
the alerts  
DID YOU KNOW? Find locates any word that  
begins with the text you enter. For example,  
entering “plan” finds “planet,” but not  
“airplane.”  
The Alert screen on your smartphone  
shows info about incoming items such as  
new email messages and Calendar events.  
The Alert screen also notifies you if you  
miss a phone call.  
1
Press Option  
, and then press Shift/  
Find to open the Find dialog box.  
To view the Alert screen, tap the blinking  
bell  
corner of any screen, or press and hold  
Center when the blinking bell appears.  
when it appears in the upper-left  
2
3
Enter the text you want to find.  
Select OK to start the search.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And DownloadU. S I N G F I N D  
179  
                                 
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
You can do any of the following:  
2
3
Press Menu  
.
Select Options, and then select  
Advanced Mode or Basic Mode.  
•
Check the box to clear an alert from the  
list.  
•
Select the alert to open the  
corresponding application and view the  
alert item (message, event, missed call,  
and so on).  
Basic  
Mode  
•
•
Select Done to close the Alert screen  
and return to whatever you were doing  
on your smartphone before you opened  
the Alert screen. The bell continues to  
blink in the upper-left corner of the  
screen.  
Advanced  
Mode—Math  
Select Clear All to delete all alerts on  
the Alert screen.  
Calculator  
Calculator includes a basic calculator, plus  
an advanced calculator with scientific,  
financial, and conversion functions.  
TIP In Basic Mode, you can also press Right  
on the 5-way to switch to Advanced Mode.  
In Advanced Mode, press Right on the 5-way  
to cycle between functions, and press Left on  
the 5-way to return to Basic Mode.  
Switching between Basic and Advanced  
Calculator Modes  
DID YOU KNOW? You can tap the onscreen  
number pad or use the keyboard to input  
numbers.  
1
Press Applications  
Calc  
and select  
.
C A L C U L A T O R  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
Selecting functions in Advanced  
Calculator Mode  
Area: Area conversions for metric,  
traditional, and English values.  
1
Switch to Advanced Mode (see the  
preceding procedure).  
Volume: Volume conversions for metric  
and English values.  
2
3
Press Menu  
.
4
5
Press Menu  
.
Select Options, and then select the  
type of function you want to use:  
Select Pref, and then select the decimal  
display format: Float, Fixed(x), Sci(x),  
or Eng(x).  
Math: Advanced mathematical  
functions such as exponents, roots, and  
logarithms.  
6
7
Press Menu  
.
Select Pref, and then select the number  
display format: Degrees, Radians, or  
Grads.  
Trig: Trigonometric functions such as  
sine, cosine, tangent, and variants.  
Finance: Financial calculator functions  
such as APR and amortization.  
TIP Select Sto to store a number in one of ten  
memory slots. Select Rcl to recall a stored  
number.  
Logic: Hexadecimal characters in  
keypad, plus logic functions such as  
And, Not, Or, and Xor.  
TIP Select Con to access a list of  
mathematical constants such as Avogadro’s  
number or the speed of light.  
Statistics: Statistical functions such as  
sum, factorial, and random number  
generator.  
Installing applications  
Weight/Tmp: Weight and temperature  
conversions for metric and English  
values.  
Your smartphone comes with several  
built-in and ready-to-use applications. You  
can also install free bonus software, such  
as business software, games, and more.  
Length: Length conversions for metric  
and English values.  
I N S T A L L I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                 
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
You can install the bonus software  
download the software to your computer  
wirelessly using the My Treo application on first. See Installing bonus software from  
your smartphone. You can also download  
the bonus software from www.palm.com/  
mypalm/755pverizon-bonus to your  
My Palm on your computer for info on  
installing software that includes a desktop  
component.  
computer and then synchronize to install it  
on your smartphone. You can also use the  
web browser on your smartphone or your  
computer to purchase other third-party  
1
Press Applications  
My Treo  
Select the Bonus tab.  
and select  
.
2
3
®
Palm OS apps. To learn about applications  
Select the Install link below the name  
you can purchase for your smartphone, go  
to www.palm.com/mypalm/755pverizon.  
of the application you want to install.  
4
Repeat step 3 to install additional  
applications.  
NOTE The instructions in this section tell  
you how to install basic PRC (Palm OS  
application) and PDB (Palm OS database)  
Installing applications from the Internet  
files on your Treo smartphone. Some Palm You can use the web browser on your  
OS software uses an installer or wizard to smartphone to install Palm OS files (PRC or  
guide you through the process. For details, PDB) directly from the Internet. When you  
consult the documentation that came with download a PRC or PDB file, it is  
the software.  
automatically installed on your  
smartphone. If a file is compressed (ZIP or  
SIT files), you need to download it to your  
computer and expand the file before  
installing it on your smartphone.  
Installing bonus software from My Treo  
on your smartphone  
My Treo lets you download and install  
software that you can use on your  
smartphone. If the software has both a  
desktop component in addition to a  
smartphone component, you need to  
1
Open the web browser (see Viewing a  
web page).  
2
Go to the page that contains the link to  
the application you want to download.  
I N S T A L L I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
3
4
Press Left or Right to highlight the Palm® Desktop software on your computer  
link to the file, and then press  
(see Installing the desktop synchronization  
software).  
Center  
to initiate the download  
process.  
When you download an application to your  
computer, it is probably in a compressed  
format such as a ZIP or SIT file. If the file is  
compressed, you need to use a  
Follow the onscreen instructions to  
accept and install the application.  
Installing bonus software from My Palm  
on your computer  
decompression utility on your computer,  
such as WinZip or Allume Stuffit Expander,  
before you install the application on your  
smartphone.  
1
2
3
4
On your computer, go to  
www.palm.com/mypalm/  
755pverizon-bonus.  
1
Windows: Drag and drop  
the file(s) onto the Palm  
Quick Install icon on the  
Windows desktop.  
Follow the onscreen instructions to  
download the application(s) you want to  
install.  
When prompted to select either Save or  
Run, select Run to place the app(s) in  
the install queue.  
Mac: Drag and drop the file(s) onto the  
Send To Device droplet in the Palm  
folder.  
Synchronize your smartphone with your  
computer to install the application(s) on  
your smartphone.  
2
3
Select your device name from the User  
list, and then click OK.  
Synchronize your smartphone with your  
computer to install the application(s) on  
your Treo smartphone.  
Installing other third-party applications  
from a computer  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN To install an app  
from your computer to your Treo  
smartphone, you must first install  
I N S T A L L I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
Removing  
applications  
TIP You can open a window to select whether  
to install files on your smartphone or on an  
expansion card.  
Windows: Double-click the Palm Quick  
Install icon.  
If you decide that you no longer need an  
application, or you want to free up  
Mac: Open the HotSync menu and select  
Install Handheld files.  
memory, you can remove apps from your  
smartphone or an expansion card (for more  
on expansion cards, see Using expansion  
cards). You can remove only apps, patches,  
and extensions that you install; you cannot  
remove the built-in apps that reside in the  
ROM portion of your Treo smartphone.  
TIP On a Windows computer, you can also  
access Palm™ Quick Install by selecting the  
Quick Install icon in Palm® Desktop software  
or from the Programs folder in the Start  
menu.  
Getting help with third-party applications  
If you encounter a problem with a  
third-party application (such as an error  
message), contact the application’s author  
or vendor. For general troubleshooting of  
third-party applications, see Third-party  
applications.  
DID YOU KNOW? Some applications are  
factory-installed on your smartphone and  
cannot be deleted. These are listed with a  
Lock icon next to them.  
DID YOU KNOW? Applications deleted from your  
smartphone are kept on your computer in the  
Archive folder of your user folder. If you’re  
having trouble locating your user folder, see I  
can’t find my user folder.  
1
2
Press Applications  
.
If you want to remove an application  
from an expansion card, insert the card  
into your smartphone.  
A P P L I C A T I O N S  
R E M O V I N GDownload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
184  
                       
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
3
4
5
Press Menu  
.
If you upgraded from a previous version  
of Palm Desktop software, your Backup  
subfolder may be located in the  
Select Delete on the App menu.  
Select the Delete From pick list and  
select the location of the application you  
palmOne or Handspring folder.  
want to remove: Phone or Card.  
2
3
If you find a PRC or PDB file for the  
application you just removed, delete the  
file from the Backup subfolder.  
6
7
8
Select the application that you want to  
remove.  
Delete the file from your device again.  
Select Delete, and then select Yes to  
confirm deletion.  
Synchronize to remove the application  
from the Backup folder on your  
computer.  
Viewing application  
info  
Manually deleting applications  
The Info screens display basic statistics  
about the applications on your Treo  
smartphone.  
If an app you delete reappears on your  
smartphone, you may need to manually  
delete the app from your computer.  
1
2
3
4
Press Applications  
Press Menu  
.
1
Locate your Backup subfolder on your  
computer.  
.
Windows: C:\Program  
Files\Palm\<device name>.  
Select Info on the App menu.  
Select the Device pick list and select  
the location of the app you want to view  
info for: Phone or <card name>.  
Mac: Mac  
HD\Applications\Palm\Users\<device  
name>.  
A P P L I C A T I O N I N F O  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals SeaVrcIhE WAnI NdGDownload.  
185  
                       
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
Sending information  
with Bluetooth®  
wireless technology  
The range of Bluetooth® wireless  
technology is up to 30 feet (10 meters) in  
optimum environmental conditions.  
Performance and range may be affected by  
physical obstacles, radio interference from  
nearby electronic equipment, and other  
factors.  
Version: The version numbers of  
applications on your smartphone.  
Size: The size (in kilobytes) of  
applications and information on your  
smartphone.  
TIP Check your battery level before  
Records: The number of entries in  
various applications on your  
smartphone.  
establishing a Bluetooth wireless connection.  
If the battery level is very low, you can’t make  
a Bluetooth wireless connection.  
5
6
Scroll to the application you want to see  
info about.  
Sending info over a Bluetooth wireless  
connection  
Select Done.  
In most applications you can send an  
individual entry or item such as a contact or  
a picture. You can also send all the entries  
in a category, such as all contacts in the  
Business category.  
S E N D I N G I N F O R M A T I O N  
B L U E T O O T H ® W I R E L E S S  
Download fromWWIwTwH .Somanuals.com. All ManuaTlsESCeHaNrcOhLAOnGdYDownload.  
186  
                       
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
1
Press Applications  
Bluetooth  
and select  
6
7
Select the Send From pick list and  
select the location of the app you want  
to send: Phone or <card name>.  
.
2
3
4
Select Bluetooth On.  
Select the application you want to  
transfer. You cannot send an item that  
Open an application.  
Select the entry or category you want to  
send. You cannot send an item that has  
has a lock  
next to it.  
8
9
Select Send.  
a lock  
next to it.  
Select Bluetooth, and then select OK.  
5
6
7
8
Press Menu  
.
10 Select the receiving device(s) on the  
Discovery Results screen, and then  
select OK.  
Select Send from the leftmost menu.  
Select Bluetooth, and then select OK.  
Select the receiving device(s) in the  
Discovery Results list, and then select  
OK.  
11 Wait for a message to indicate that the  
transfer is complete before you  
continue using your smartphone.  
9
Wait for a message to indicate that the  
transfer is complete before you  
continue using your smartphone.  
Receiving info over a Bluetooth wireless  
connection  
1
Press Applications  
Bluetooth  
Select Bluetooth On.  
and select  
Sending an app over a Bluetooth wireless  
connection  
.
2
3
1
Press Applications  
Bluetooth  
and select  
Select the Visibility pick list and select  
one of the following:  
.
2
3
4
5
Select Bluetooth On.  
Visible: Enables Bluetooth devices that  
are not on your Trusted Device list to  
request a connection with your  
smartphone. Your smartphone remains  
accessible to other devices until you  
Press Applications  
.
Press Menu  
.
Select Send from the App menu.  
B L U E T O O T H ® W I R E L E S S T E C H N O L O G Y  
Download fSroEmN DWI NwGw.ISNoFmOaRnMuaAlsT.IcOoNm.WAIlTl HManuals Search And Download.  
187  
                             
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
turn this option off. After you’re done  
using this setting, remember to change  
it back to Hidden.  
5
Select Ye s to receive the information or  
No to refuse it.  
TIP The Device Name in the Bluetooth app is  
the name other devices with Bluetooth  
wireless technology see when they connect  
to your smartphone. The default name is the  
name you gave your device during setup. You  
can change this name if you want to.  
Temporary: Enables Bluetooth devices  
that are not on your Trusted Device list  
to request a connection with your  
smartphone during the next two  
minutes. Your smartphone reverts to  
the Hidden setting and becomes  
inaccessible to other devices after two  
minutes.  
DID YOU KNOW? When you receive an  
application over a Bluetooth connection, you  
can store the application on your smartphone  
or send it to an expansion card inserted into  
the expansion card slot.  
4
Use the other device to discover your  
smartphone and send information to it:  
• See the other device’s documentation  
to learn how to discover and send  
information over a Bluetooth wireless  
connection.  
Beaming information  
Your Treo 755P smartphone is equipped  
with an IR (infrared) port so that you can  
• If the Ringer switch is set to Sound  
On  
your smartphone beeps to  
®
beam information to another Palm OS  
notify you of the connection, and then  
prompts you to accept the info. Select  
a category or expansion card to  
specify where you want to store the  
item. If you don't select a category,  
the item goes into the Unfiled  
category.  
device with an IR port. The IR port is  
located on the side of your smartphone,  
above the expansion card slot door, behind  
the small dark shield.  
B E A M I N G  
IDNoFwOnRlMoaAdTfIrOomN Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
188  
               
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
TIP For best results, the path between the  
two devices must be clear of obstacles, and  
both devices must be stationary. If you have  
difficulty beaming, shorten the distance and  
avoid bright sunlight.  
DID YOU KNOW? If you beam a bookmark or  
saved page from the web browser, it beams  
the URL, not the contents of that page.  
4
5
When the Beam Status dialog box  
appears, point the IR port on your  
smartphone directly at the IR port on  
the receiving device.  
Beaming an entry  
You can beam an individual entry or item  
such as a contact or a picture. You can also  
beam all the entries in the selected  
category, such as all the contacts in the  
Business or Family category.  
Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to  
indicate that the transfer is complete  
before you continue using your  
smartphone.  
TIP Beam your business card in two key  
presses: From the Phone application’s Main  
View, press Menu, and then press the M key.  
1
Select the entry or category you want to  
beam. You cannot beam an item that  
has a lock  
next to it.  
2
3
Press Menu  
.
Beaming an application  
Select Record, and then select one of  
the following:  
Not all applications can be beamed. A lock  
icon  
appears on the Beam screen next  
Beam: Sends an individual entry.  
to applications that cannot be beamed.  
Beam Category: Sends all entries in  
the current category.  
1
2
Press Applications  
Press Menu  
.
.
B E A M I N G I N F O R M A T I O N  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
3
4
Select Beam from the App menu.  
5
Select Ye s to receive the information or  
No to refuse it.  
Select the Beam From pick list, and  
select whether the application you want  
to beam is located on your Treo  
TIP If you do not select a category upon  
receiving a beamed item, the item is placed in  
the Unfiled category.  
smartphone or on an expansion card.  
5
Select the application you want to  
transfer.  
TIP If you can’t receive beamed information,  
make sure the Beam Receive option is turned  
on (see Optimizing power settings), and that  
you are not running a third-party application  
that disables beaming. If you still can’t receive  
a beam, try a soft reset (see Resetting your  
smartphone).  
6
7
Select Beam.  
When the Beam Status dialog box  
appears, point the IR port on your  
smartphone directly at the IR port on  
the receiving device.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can store a beamed  
application on your smartphone, or send it to  
an expansion card inserted into the expansion  
card slot.  
8
Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to  
indicate that the transfer is complete  
before you continue using your  
smartphone.  
Receiving beamed information  
1
2
Turn on your screen.  
Select the beam command on the  
transmitting device.  
3
Point the IR port on your smartphone  
directly at the IR port on the  
transmitting device to open the Beam  
Status dialog box.  
4
When the Beam Status dialog box  
appears, select a category for the entry.  
B E A M I N G  
IDNoFwOnRlMoaAdTfIrOomN Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
190  
                   
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
WINDOWS ONLY  
Synchronizing  
information—  
advanced  
1
Click HotSync manager  
in the  
taskbar in the lower-right corner of your  
screen.  
2
3
Select Custom.  
Select your device name from the User  
Changing which applications sync  
list at the top of the screen.  
By default, information from Calendar,  
Contacts, Memos, Pics&Videos, and Tasks  
is updated each time you synchronize your  
smartphone with Palm Desktop software  
(included) or Microsoft Outlook® (sold  
separately). You can change which  
applications synchronize. For example, if  
you don’t use the Memos application and  
you want to speed up synchronization, you  
can turn off synchronization for Memos.  
4
5
Select the application for which you  
want to turn synchronization on or off,  
and then click Change.  
Select Synchronize the files to turn on  
synchronization for an app.  
Select Do nothing to turn off  
synchronization for an app that currently  
synchronizes (for example, to turn off  
synchronization for Memos if you do not  
use this app).  
TIP Windows If you set up your  
smartphone to sync with Outlook, you can  
learn how to change which applications  
synchronize, by doing the following: Click the  
HotSync® manager icon in the taskbar and  
select Custom. Select a conduit that syncs  
with Outlook, click Change, and then click  
Help.  
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
NOTE Select one of the two overwrite  
options if you want the information in one  
location (smartphone or computer) to  
completely replace the information in the  
other location for that app. For example, if  
the Calendar info on your smartphone is  
accurate but the info on your computer has  
become corrupted, select Handheld  
overwrites Desktop for the Calendar app  
to have your smartphone info replace your  
computer info. Note that “handheld” refers  
to your smartphone and “desktop” refers  
to your computer.  
MAC ONLY  
1
2
3
4
Double-click the Palm Desktop  
in the Palm folder.  
icon  
From the HotSync menu, select  
Conduit Settings.  
From the User pop-up menu, select  
your device name.  
Select the application for which you  
want to turn synchronization on or off,  
and then click Conduit Settings.  
5
Select Synchronize the files to turn on  
synchronization for an app.  
Select Do nothing to turn off  
synchronization for an app that currently  
synchronizes (for example, to turn off  
synchronization for Memos if you do not  
use this app).  
6
(Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 for  
each application for which you want to  
turn synchronization on or off.  
7
Click OK, and then click Done.  
TIP Windows To keep the current sync  
setting on an ongoing basis, check the Set as  
default box. If you do not check this box, the  
option you select applies only the next time  
you synchronize. Thereafter, info is updated  
according to the default setting.  
I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D  
S Y N C H R O NDI ZoIwNnGload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
192  
 
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
NOTE Select one of the two overwrite  
options if you want the information in one  
location (smartphone or computer) to  
completely replace the information in the  
other location for that app. For example, if  
the Calendar info on your smartphone is  
accurate but the info on your computer has  
become corrupted, select Handheld  
overwrites Macintosh for the Calendar  
app to have your smartphone info replace  
your computer info. Note that “handheld”  
refers to your smartphone.  
Setting up a Bluetooth connection for  
synchronization  
If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth  
wireless technology, you can synchronize  
wirelessly over a Bluetooth connection.  
1
Press Applications  
Bluetooth  
Select Bluetooth On.  
and select  
.
2
6
(Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 for  
each application for which you want to  
turn synchronization on or off.  
7
Click OK, and then close the Conduit  
Settings window.  
3
4
Enter a device name for your  
smartphone. This is the name that  
appears on the other Bluetooth device’s  
screen when it connects to your  
smartphone.  
TIP Mac To keep the current setting on an  
ongoing basis, select Make Default. If you do  
not select this button, the option you select  
applies only the next time you synchronize.  
Thereafter, info is updated according to the  
default setting.  
Select the Visibility pick list and select  
Visible or Temporary.  
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
8
After you finish the HotSync Setup,  
select Done to return to Applications  
View.  
TIP After you form a partnership with a device,  
you can change the Visibility setting to  
Hidden. That way only devices with which  
you’ve already formed a partnership can find  
your smartphone. New devices cannot  
request a connection.  
You’re now ready to sync your smartphone  
with your Bluetooth computer.  
Synchronizing over a Bluetooth  
connection  
5
6
Select Setup Devices.  
When you synchronize using your  
smartphone’s Bluetooth wireless feature,  
you don’t need your sync cable. This is  
especially useful if you travel with a laptop  
enabled with Bluetooth wireless  
technology.  
Select HotSync Setup.  
1
Press Applications  
and select  
HotSync  
.
7
Follow the onscreen instructions to  
create a partnership between your  
smartphone and your computer.  
In some cases you may need to  
perform setup steps on your computer  
before you can complete this step.  
Check your computer’s documentation  
for specific setup instructions.  
2
Select Local.  
I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D  
S Y N C H R O NDI ZoIwNnGload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
194  
                 
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
3
4
Select the pick list below the HotSync  
icon, and then select the name of the  
PC you set up for Bluetooth  
synchronization (see Setting up a  
Bluetooth connection for  
cable. This is especially useful if you travel  
with an IR-enabled laptop.  
WINDOWS ONLY  
1
On your computer, click HotSync  
manager in the taskbar in the  
synchronization).  
lower-right corner of your screen. Make  
sure that Infrared is selected.  
Select the HotSync  
icon on your  
smartphone.  
When synchronization is complete, a  
message appears at the top of your  
smartphone screen. Be patient;  
synchronization may take a few minutes.  
Synchronizing over an infrared  
connection  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Your computer must  
include the following items:  
2
On your smartphone, press  
•
An enabled IR port and driver or have an  
IR device attached to it. Check your  
computer’s documentation to see if it  
supports IR communication.  
Applications  
HotSync  
and select  
.
3
4
Select Local.  
•
HotSync manager must be active. On a  
Windows computer, you know HotSync  
manager is active when its icon appears  
in the lower-right corner of your screen.  
Select the pick list below the HotSync  
icon and select IR to a PC/Handheld.  
5
Position the IR port on your smartphone  
within a few inches (centimeters) of the  
IR port on your computer.  
When you synchronize using your  
smartphone’s IR port, you don’t need a  
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
6
Select the HotSync  
smartphone.  
icon on your  
When synchronization is complete, a  
message appears at the top of your  
smartphone screen. Be patient;  
When synchronization is complete, a  
message appears at the top of your  
smartphone screen. Be patient;  
synchronization may take a few minutes.  
Synchronizing using Wireless Sync  
synchronization may take a few minutes.  
In addition to allowing you to send and  
receive email messages, the Wireless  
Sync application works with the Calendar,  
Contacts, Tasks, and Memos applications  
on your smartphone to directly access  
corporate groupware information on a  
Microsoft Exchange or Lotus Domino  
server. You can wirelessly synchronize  
business email, calendar info, and contact  
info on the server from your smartphone  
without using a desktop computer.  
MAC ONLY  
1
2
3
4
5
Double-click HotSync manager  
the Palm folder.  
in  
Click the HotSync Controls tab, and  
then select Enabled.  
Click the Connection Settings tab, and  
then check the On box next to IR port.  
Close the HotSync Software Setup  
window.  
On your smartphone, press  
Wireless Sync interacts with your desktop  
software as follows:  
Applications  
HotSync  
and select  
.
•
Microsoft Outlook® (sold separately):  
Info in Calendar, Contacts, Tasks,  
Memos, and the Wireless Sync  
6
7
Select Local.  
Select the pick list below the HotSync  
icon and select IR to a PC/Handheld.  
application on your smartphone does  
not sync directly with Outlook on your  
desktop. However, if the Exchange  
server synchronizes with Outlook on  
your desktop, any new or updated info  
you enter in these applications on your  
8
9
Position the IR port on your smartphone  
within a few inches (centimeters) of the  
IR port on your computer.  
Select the HotSync  
icon on your  
smartphone.  
I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D  
S Y N C H R O NDI ZoIwNnGload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
196  
                   
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
smartphone also appears in Outlook  
after the next server sync.  
Synchronizing using Microsoft Exchange  
ActiveSync®  
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® works  
with the VersaMail® application, Calendar,  
and Contacts applications on your  
NOTE The Memos application is called  
Notes in Outlook.  
smartphone to directly access corporate  
groupware information in Microsoft  
Exchange 2003 or 2007 server. If you  
install the VersaMail application (available  
as a free download from www.palm.com/  
mypalm/755pverizon-bonus) and your  
company uses Microsoft Exchange Server  
2003 or 2007, you may be able to  
wirelessly synchronize info in these  
applications on the server from your  
smartphone without using a desktop  
computer.  
•
Lotus Notes: Info in Calendar,  
Contacts, and the Wireless Sync  
application on your smartphone does  
not sync directly with Notes on your  
desktop. However, if the Domino server  
synchronizes with Notes on your  
desktop, any new or updated info you  
enter in these applications on your  
smartphone also appears in Notes after  
the next server sync.  
NOTE Depending on how your company  
has set up its Lotus Notes environment,  
info in the Tasks and Memos applications  
on your server may synchronize directly  
with Notes on your computer, or it may  
sync with the server.  
A Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account  
interacts with your desktop software as  
follows:  
•
Microsoft Outlook (sold separately):  
Info in Calendar, Contacts, and the  
VersaMail application on your  
•
Palm Desktop software: Info in  
Calendar, Contacts, Tasks, Memos, and  
the Wireless Sync application on your  
smartphone does not sync with and  
does not appear in Palm Desktop  
software on your desktop.  
smartphone is pushed from or syncs  
with the server; it does not sync directly  
with Outlook on your desktop. However,  
if the server pushes info to or syncs  
with Outlook on your desktop, any info  
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
you enter in these applications on your  
smartphone also appears in Outlook  
after the next server push or sync.  
Using expansion  
cards  
NOTE Push is a feature provided by  
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync that  
pushes email messages, Calendar events,  
meeting invitations, and updated contact  
information it receives onto your  
smartphone.  
The expansion card slot on your Treo  
smartphone enables you to add mini-SD  
cards (sold separately) to extend the  
storage capacity of your smartphone. For  
example, expansion cards can store the  
following:  
•
Palm Desktop software: Info in  
Calendar, Contacts, and the VersaMail  
application does not sync with and does  
not appear in Palm Desktop software on  
your computer.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Photos  
MP3 audio files  
Email attachments  
Games  
NOTE Info in other apps, such as Tasks  
and Memos, continues to sync with and  
appear in the desktop software on your  
computer (Outlook or Palm Desktop  
software).  
eBooks  
Microsoft Office files  
Adobe® Acrobat® files  
Applications  
Databases  
For complete information on using a  
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account,  
see the User Guide for the VersaMail  
Application at www.palm.com/mypalm/  
755pverizon.  
Inserting an expansion card  
The expansion card slot on your  
smartphone has a push-push mechanism:  
push in gently to insert a card; push in  
gently to remove it.  
U S I N G  
C A R D S  
E X PDA oNwSnI OloNad from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
198  
               
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
1
Open the door of the expansion card  
slot.  
DID YOU KNOW? If the Ringer switch is set to  
Sound On, you hear a confirmation tone when  
you insert or remove an expansion card.  
4
Close the door of the expansion card  
slot.  
Removing an expansion card  
1
Open the door of the expansion card  
slot.  
2
3
Hold your smartphone with the screen  
facing you, and hold the card with the  
label facing you. The notch on the card  
should be in the lower-left corner next to  
the keyboard.  
Insert the card into the expansion card  
slot until you feel the card lock into  
place.  
2
3
Press the card into the expansion card  
slot to release it from the slot.  
After you feel the expansion card slot  
eject the card, remove the card  
from the slot.  
Notch  
U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
4
Close the door of the expansion card  
slot.  
2
3
Select the icon for the application you  
want to open.  
Opening applications on an expansion  
card  
Press Center  
to open the  
application.  
After you insert an expansion card into the  
expansion card slot, you can open any of  
the applications stored on the expansion  
card.  
TIP Install the Palm® Files application to easily  
browse and manage files on an expansion  
card. Press Applications, select My Treo,  
select the Bonus tab, and then select Files.  
1
Insert the expansion card into the  
expansion card slot. Applications View  
automatically appears.  
Accessing items stored on an expansion  
card  
When an expansion card contains items,  
such as pictures or songs, you can access  
those items directly from the card.  
1
Insert the expansion card into the  
expansion card slot. Applications View  
automatically appears.  
U S I N G  
C A R D S  
E X PDA oNwSnI OloNad from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
200  
             
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
2
3
Select the category pick list in the title  
bar, and select All.  
1
Press Applications  
.
Select the icon for the application in  
which you want to open the item. For  
example, to view a picture, select  
Pics&Videos.  
Copying applications between an  
expansion card and your smartphone  
TIP Before you copy an application to an  
expansion card, make sure that it is  
compatible with Palm OS software version  
5.4.5 or later. Some applications do not work  
with expansion cards and do not allow you to  
store files in a location that is separate from  
the application.  
2
3
4
Press Menu  
.
Select Copy from the App menu.  
Select the Copy To pick list and select  
the destination: Phone or <card  
name>.  
5
Select the From pick list and select the  
location of the application you want to  
copy: Phone or <card name>.  
You can copy applications from your Treo  
smartphone to your expansion card and  
vice versa.  
6
7
Highlight the application you want to  
copy.  
Select Copy.  
U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
Viewing expansion card information  
Renaming an expansion card  
If you change the contents of an expansion  
card, you can rename the card to better  
match its contents and to make it easy to  
identify wherever you insert it.  
1
Insert the expansion card into the  
expansion card slot. Applications View  
automatically appears.  
2
Select the category pick list at the top  
of the screen and select All.  
The Card Info application displays general  
information about the expansion card that  
is currently in the expansion card slot. It  
also enables you to rename and format a  
card.  
3
4
5
Select Card Info  
.
Press Menu  
.
Select Rename Card from the Card  
menu.  
6
7
Enter a new name for the card.  
Press Applications  
Card Info  
and select  
.
Select Rename.  
Formatting an expansion card  
TIP Before copying information to, renaming,  
or formatting an expansion card, make sure  
the card is not write-protected. See the  
instructions that came with your card for  
details.  
Formatting an expansion card is similar to  
formatting a disk on a computer. When  
you format an expansion card, you erase all  
the information stored on the card.  
1
Insert the expansion card into the  
expansion card slot. Applications View  
automatically appears.  
U S I N G  
C A R D S  
E X PDA oNwSnI OloNad from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
202  
                   
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
2
Select the category pick list at the top  
of the screen and select All.  
3
4
5
6
Select Card Info  
.
Press Menu  
.
Select Format Card from the Card menu.  
Select OK.  
U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
U S I N G  
C A R D S  
E X PDA oNwSnI OloNad from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
204  
CHAPTER  
10  
Your personal settings  
Customizing your Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone is great way to  
make it match your lifestyle and work even harder for you.  
On your smartphone, you can easily customize the sounds,  
fonts, screen colors, and more. Take advantage of different  
levels of security. Prevent making an accidental (and expensive)  
phone call by locking the keyboard. Some settings can help  
extend the life of your smartphone battery. There are lots of  
ways to make your smartphone work better for you.  
Benefits  
•
Access applications quickly  
•
•
Conserve power  
•
Make your screen easy to read  
Enjoy your smartphone more  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
In this chapter  
System sound settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207  
Display and appearance settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208  
Applications settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210  
Locking your smartphone and info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213  
System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220  
Connection settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
When you slide the Ringer switch back to  
System sound  
settings  
Sound On  
, it restores the previous  
sound settings.  
Silencing sounds  
You can immediately silence all alerts,  
ringtones, music that plays through the  
built-in speaker, and system sounds by  
sliding the Ringer switch to Sound Off  
This does not mute the audio during a  
phone call.  
.
Sound On  
Sound Off  
Setting system volume levels  
DID YOU KNOW? Your smartphone includes a  
silent alarm that can vibrate even when the  
Ringer switch is set to Sound Off. For info on  
setting the vibrate option, see the section on  
setting alert tones in the chapters that  
describe the individual applications.  
You can set the volume level for system  
sounds, such as the tone that plays when  
you synchronize.  
TIP If the Ringer switch is set to Sound Off,  
the ringer setting overrides the sound settings  
and all sounds are turned off.  
1
2
Slide the Ringer switch to Sound  
Off . Your smartphone vibrates once  
to let you know that you’ve turned  
sounds off.  
1
2
3
Press Applications  
Sounds  
and select  
.
Select the Application pick list and  
select System.  
To hear all sounds again, slide the  
Ringer switch to Sound On  
.
Select the System Volume and Game  
Volume pick lists and select the volume  
levels.  
S Y S T E M S O U N D S E T T I N G S  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                               
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
2
3
Press Left and Right to adjust the  
brightness.  
Select Done.  
TIP To automatically set the backlight to the  
preset low setting, press Option + Menu.  
TIP You can also adjust the backlight and set  
the brightness duration during a call in Power  
Preferences. See Optimizing power settings.  
4
Select Done.  
Changing the screen font  
You can change the screen font in  
Calendar, Contacts, Memos, Messaging,  
Tasks, and Web. The font styles may vary  
between applications and some  
Display and  
appearance settings  
applications may offer fewer choices.  
Adjusting the brightness  
1
Open the application in which you want  
to change the font.  
Depending on the lighting conditions in  
which you’re using your smartphone, you  
may need to adjust the brightness of the  
screen and keyboard backlight.  
2
3
4
Press Menu  
.
Select Options, and then select Font.  
Select a font style. (In the web browser,  
select the Font size pick list and select  
Large or Small.)  
1
Press Option  
, and then press  
Backlight  
.
Backlight  
D I S P L A Y A N D A P P E A R A N C E  
Download from WwSwE.ST oTmI NaGnSuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
208  
                               
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
Small  
Large  
Large bold  
Small bold  
Select OK.  
5
Setting display formats  
Formats Preferences enable you to select  
number conventions based on geographic  
regions. For example, in the United  
Time: The time format. Select HH:MM  
to display a 24-hour clock.  
Kingdom, time often is expressed using a  
24-hour clock. In the United States, time is  
expressed using a 12-hour clock with an  
AM or a PM suffix. Many of the built-in  
applications on your Treo smartphone use  
the Formats Preferences settings.  
Date: The date format.  
Week starts: The first day of the week  
(usually Sunday or Monday).  
Numbers: The format for numbers with  
decimal points and commas.  
1
Press Applications  
Prefs  
Select Formats.  
and select  
4
Select Done.  
.
Aligning the screen  
2
3
Occasionally, your smartphone screen may  
need to be readjusted. If this occurs, you  
may see the wrong feature being activated  
when you tap the screen. To fix the  
problem, you can align the screen at any  
time.  
Set any of the following preferences:  
Preset to: The standard number  
conventions for your country. When you  
select a country, the other Formats  
Preferences are automatically set to  
that country’s conventions. You can also  
edit each option individually.  
D I S P L A Y A N D  
S E T T I N G S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search AAnPdPDEoAwRnAloNaCdE.  
209  
                   
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
1
Press Applications  
Prefs  
Select Touchscreen.  
and select  
.
2
3
Follow the onscreen instructions and  
tap the screen where indicated.  
4
Select Done.  
TIP You can also set the wallpaper for the  
Phone application’s Main View (see  
Customizing the Phone application’s  
Main View) and the background for the  
Calendar Agenda View (see Customizing  
display options for your calendar).  
4
Select Done.  
Changing the system color scheme  
1
Press Applications  
Prefs  
Select Color Theme.  
Select a color scheme from the list.  
and select  
Applications settings  
.
2
3
You can change the Applications settings  
on your smartphone so that you can easily  
access the applications you use most  
often. You can arrange and display your  
applications by category, reassign  
the buttons on your smartphone, and  
A P P L I C A T I O N S S E T T I N G S  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
select default applications for specific  
tasks.  
Displaying applications by category  
Do one of the following:  
•
Press Applications  
cycle through the categories.  
repeatedly to  
Arranging applications by category  
You can assign an application to a category  
and then display a specific category of  
applications in Applications View.  
•
Select the category pick list at the top  
of the screen and select a category.  
Select All to display all of your  
applications.  
1
2
3
4
Press Applications  
Press Menu  
.
.
Changing Applications View  
Select Category on the App menu.  
By default, Applications View displays each  
application as an icon. As an alternative,  
you can view a list of applications. The list  
view is particularly useful when you have  
so many applications in a category that the  
applications fill up more than one screen.  
Select the pick list next to each  
application and select a category.  
5
Select Done.  
TIP To create a new category, select the  
category pick list and select Edit Categories.  
Select New, and then enter the category  
name. Select OK to close the dialog box, and  
then select OK.  
1
2
3
Press Applications  
Press Menu  
.
.
Select Options, and then select  
Preferences.  
DID YOU KNOW? If there is an expansion card in  
the expansion card slot, the card appears in  
the category pick list and is treated as a  
category when you press Applications  
repeatedly.  
4
5
Select the View By pick list and select  
List.  
Select OK.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search AAPndP LDI oCwAnTlIoOaNdS. S E T T I N G S  
211  
                       
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
Reassigning buttons  
With Buttons Preferences you can select  
which applications are associated with the  
quick buttons and the Side button on your  
Treo smartphone. You can assign a primary  
and secondary application to each of the  
three quick buttons that open an  
application.  
NOTE We recommend that you keep the  
primary button assignments on the factory  
settings until you become comfortable with  
the features of your smartphone. If you do  
change the primary button assignments,  
remember that the instructions in this  
guide and in the other help features refer to  
the original button settings.  
4
Select Done.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can also choose an  
application to open with the sync button on  
the USB sync cable. To change this setting,  
select HotSync on the Buttons Preferences  
screen.  
TIP To restore all the buttons and key  
combinations to their factory settings, select  
Default.  
1
Press Applications  
Prefs  
Select Buttons.  
Select the pick list next to the button,  
Option + button, or Side button that  
and select  
.
DID YOU KNOW? Some third-party applications  
automatically take over a button when you  
install the application.  
2
3
Changing default applications  
you want to reassign, and then select  
an application.  
Sometimes one application looks for  
another application to handle information  
(for example, a mail application might open  
a browser when you select a link in an  
email message). Your smartphone comes  
A P P L I C A T I O N S S E T T I N G S  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
with a set of predefined applications to  
handle email, messaging, and browser  
requests from other applications. If you  
have more than one application to handle  
these requests on your smartphone, you  
can specify which application you want to  
use for each function.  
Locking your  
smartphone and info  
Your Treo smartphone includes several  
features to protect your smartphone  
from inadvertent use and keep your  
information private. You can lock any of the  
following features on your smartphone:  
Keyboard (Keyguard): You can use the  
Keyguard feature to disable the keyboard  
and all buttons to prevent accidental  
presses in your bag or pocket.  
Screen: You can disable the screen’s  
touch-sensitive feature during an active call  
or call alert.  
1
Press Applications  
Prefs  
Select Default Apps.  
and select  
Phone (Phone Lock): You can set your  
phone to require a password to make calls.  
The built-in security software lets you  
make emergency calls even if your phone  
is locked.  
.
2
3
Select each pick list and select the  
application you want to associate with  
that function.  
Smartphone: You can set your  
smartphone to require a password for you  
to see any information on your  
smartphone.  
4
Select Done.  
L O C K I N G  
S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals SYeaOrUchR And Download.  
213  
                           
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
Entries: You can mask or hide entries  
marked as private and set your smartphone  
to require a password for viewing them.  
TIP If you disabled Keyguard, you can turn  
Keyguard on manually by pressing Option +  
Power/End when the screen is on.  
Locking your keyboard (Keyguard)  
You can change how quickly Keyguard turns  
on, or you can disable this feature  
altogether. To change the Keyguard  
settings, do the following:  
The Keyguard feature locks the keyboard so  
that you don’t accidentally press buttons or  
activate items on the screen while your  
smartphone is in a pocket or bag.  
1
Press Applications  
Prefs  
Select Keyguard.  
and select  
By default, Keyguard turns on whenever  
the screen is off. Each time you wake up  
the screen, you must turn off Keyguard to  
unlock the keyboard and use your  
smartphone.  
.
2
3
Select the Auto-Keyguard pick list, and  
then do one of the following:  
• Select how quickly you want Keyguard  
to turn on: When power is turned  
off, 5 seconds after power off, or 30  
seconds after power off.  
To turn off Keyguard, do the following:  
1
When the screen is off, press Power/  
End to wake up the screen.  
Press Center to turn off Keyguard.  
2
• Select Disable to completely disable  
the Keyguard feature until you turn it  
on again.  
4
Select Done.  
L O C K I N G  
S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O  
YDOoUwRnload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
214  
                     
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
Locking your screen  
DID YOU KNOW? When you check the boxes to  
You can set your smartphone to  
automatically lock the screen’s  
touch-sensitive features in certain  
situations.  
disable the touchscreen during a call, the  
touchscreen is automatically enabled again  
after you end the call.  
Locking your phone (Phone Lock)  
1
Press Applications  
Prefs  
Select Keyguard.  
and select  
.
You can lock your phone to prevent  
unauthorized calls and use of other  
wireless features. When your phone is  
locked, you must enter the correct code to  
unlock it. You can still place emergency  
calls when your phone is locked, however.  
2
3
Check any of the following boxes:  
Incoming calls received: Disables the  
screen when the phone rings. You must  
use the 5-way  
to select the  
onscreen Answer and Ignore buttons,  
TIP When Phone Lock is turned on, other  
people can still see the info on your  
smartphone, but they cannot make calls or  
use the other wireless features without your  
password.  
or press Send  
or Power/End  
to answer the call  
to ignore the call.  
On a call: Disables the screen after  
you answer a call. You must use the  
5-way  
to select the onscreen  
1
2
3
Press Phone  
.
buttons during the call. Use this setting  
to avoid accidentally pressing onscreen  
buttons while you’re holding your  
Press Menu  
.
Select Options, and then select Phone  
Lock.  
smartphone near your ear to speak.  
4
Select Done.  
4
(Optional) Select Advanced, enter up  
to three numbers that you can dial  
when your phone is locked, and then  
select OK. You do not need to enter 911  
L O C K I N G  
S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals SYeaOrUchR And Download.  
215  
                           
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
as one of the three numbers, because  
this number is always available.  
If you selected Immediately in step 5, your  
phone locks right away. If you selected On  
phone power off, your phone locks the next  
time you press and hold Power/End  
to turn off your phone.  
5
Select one of the following Phone Lock  
options:  
On phone power off: Locks your phone  
each time you turn it off. When this  
setting is active, you must enter your  
lock code each time you turn your phone  
on again.  
TIP If you want to lock your phone once in a  
while, use the Immediately option to lock your  
phone on demand.  
Immediately: Locks your phone when  
you select OK. The next time you dial a  
number, you must enter your lock code  
to unlock your phone. After that, you  
can continue to make calls without  
entering your lock code, unless you  
select one of these Phone Lock options.  
To disable the current Phone Lock settings:  
1
2
Press Menu  
.
Select Options, and then select Phone  
Lock.  
3
4
Uncheck the On phone power off box.  
Enter your lock code to change this  
setting.  
6
When prompted, enter the lock code,  
and then select OK. (Unless you  
changed your lock code, the lock code is  
the last four digits of your phone  
number.)  
5
Select OK twice.  
Locking your smartphone  
To protect your personal information, you  
can lock your smartphone. When your  
smartphone is locked, you need to enter  
your password to access any of your  
information or use any of the features on  
your smartphone, including the phone. You  
7
8
If you want to change the lock code,  
select Change Lock Code, enter a new  
lock code, and then select OK. Repeat  
this step to verify the new lock code.  
Select OK.  
L O C K I N G  
S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O  
YDOoUwRnload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
216  
                     
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
can, however, still make emergency calls  
when your smartphone is locked.  
5
6
When prompted, enter your password  
and select OK.  
Select one of the following options:  
IMPORTANT If you lock your smartphone,  
you must enter the exact password to  
unlock it. If you forget the password, you  
need to perform a hard reset to resume  
using your smartphone. Performing a hard  
reset deletes all the entries in your  
smartphone. However, you can restore all  
previously synchronized info the next time  
you sync (see Synchronizing information—  
the basics).  
Never: Prevents your smartphone from  
locking automatically.  
1
2
Press Applications  
Security  
and select  
.
On power off: Locks your smartphone  
when you turn off the screen, or when it  
shuts off with the Auto-off feature.  
Select the Password box.  
At a preset time: Locks your  
smartphone at a specific time of day.  
After a preset delay: Locks your  
smartphone after a period of inactivity.  
7
Select OK.  
3
4
Assign a password and a password hint.  
Select the Auto Lock Device box.  
L O C K I N G  
S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals SYeaOrUchR And Download.  
217  
                           
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
8
Do one of the following:  
After you enable the mask or hide setting,  
any entries marked as private are  
• Select Lock & Turn Off to lock your  
immediately hidden or masked. If you  
define a password, you must enter it to  
display private entries. If you do not define  
a password, you (or anyone else) can reveal  
private entries without a password.  
smartphone immediately.  
• Press Applications  
your settings and continue using your  
smartphone.  
to accept  
TIP After you create a password, you can lock  
your system manually. Press Applications  
and select Security. Select Lock & Turn Off,  
and then select Off & Lock.  
1
Display the entry that you want to mark  
private.  
2
3
4
Select Details.  
Check the Private box.  
Select OK.  
TIP To change your password, select the  
Password box, enter your current password,  
and then enter the new password. To delete  
your password, select the Password box and  
then select Unassign.  
Hiding or masking all private entries  
Make sure the entries you want to mask or  
hide are marked private.  
Working with private entries  
1
Press Applications  
Security  
and select  
In most applications you can mark  
individual entries as private. All private  
entries remain visible and accessible until  
you select the Security setting. You have  
two Security setting options:  
.
2
Select the Current Privacy pick list and  
select either Hide Records or Mask  
Records.  
3
If prompted for your password, enter it  
and then select OK.  
•
Hide Records: Private entries do not  
appear anywhere in the application.  
•
Mask Records: Private entries are  
replaced with a visual placeholder  
where the entry would normally appear.  
L O C K I N G  
S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O  
YDOoUwRnload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
218  
                               
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
Viewing all private records  
Follow these steps to recover from a lost  
password:  
You can reveal all the entries you’ve hidden  
or masked.  
1
Press Applications  
Security  
and select  
.
1
2
3
Press Applications  
Security  
and select  
.
2
3
4
Select the Password box.  
Select Lost Password.  
Select Ye s .  
Select the Current Privacy pick list and  
select Show Records.  
If prompted for your password, enter it  
TIP If you want additional security for  
Palm Desktop files, you may want to  
purchase a third-party solution.  
and then select OK.  
TIP You can also access the system-wide  
security settings while you’re in an  
application, such as Calendar. Press Menu,  
select Options, and then select Security.  
Entering owner information  
You can use Owner Preferences to record  
information that you want to associate with  
your Treo smartphone, such as your name,  
company name, and home phone number.  
If you lock your smartphone (see Locking  
your smartphone), the Owner Preferences  
information appears on the screen that  
requests your password to unlock it, and  
you must also enter your password to  
change the Owner Preferences  
Security and Palm® Desktop software  
(Windows)  
The Windows version of Palm® Desktop  
software observes the security password  
for your Treo smartphone. If you forget  
your password, you cannot view your  
information in Palm Desktop software. If  
your smartphone is unlocked, you can  
change your password on your  
information.  
smartphone, but all entries marked as  
private are deleted. You can restore your  
private entries the next time you sync.  
1
Press Applications  
Prefs  
and select  
.
2
Select Owner.  
L O C K I N G  
S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals SYeaOrUchR And Download.  
219  
                                 
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
3
4
If you assigned a password with the  
set the date, time, and location (time zone)  
setting for your smartphone.  
Security application, select Unlock,  
enter your password, and then select  
OK to continue.  
1
Press Applications  
Prefs  
Select Date & Time.  
and select  
.
Enter the text that you want to appear in  
the Owner Preferences screen.  
2
3
Select the Automatically set pick list  
and select one of the following settings:  
5
Select Done.  
NOTE The options that appear on the  
screen vary based on the setting you select  
in step 3.  
System settings  
Setting the date and time  
Nothing: No info is acquired from the  
Verizon Wireless network. You must set  
the date, time, and time zone yourself.  
By default, your smartphone synchronizes  
the date, time, and time zone with the  
network when your phone is on and you  
are inside a coverage area. Date & Time  
Preferences also enable you to manually  
Date and time: The date and time are  
acquired from the Verizon Wireless  
network. You must set the time zone  
yourself.  
S Y S T E M S E T T I N G S  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
Date, time, and time zone: The date,  
time, and time zone are acquired from  
the Verizon Wireless network. You  
cannot change any of the settings.  
1
Press Applications  
Prefs  
Select Power.  
and select  
.
2
3
Set any of the following preferences:  
4
If the Location pick list appears, select  
it, and then select a city in your time  
zone.  
Brightness: Sets the intensity of the  
screen and keyboard backlights. Drag  
the slider or press Left and Right  
to adjust the brightness level.  
TIP Don’t see a city in your time zone? Select  
Edit List, select Add, select a city in your  
time zone, and then select OK. If necessary,  
modify any of the settings in the Edit  
Location dialog box, and then select OK.  
5
6
If the Date and Time fields appear,  
select the Date field and select the  
date, and then select the Time field and  
select the time.  
Select Done.  
Auto-off after: Determines how long  
your screen stays on during a period of  
inactivity. When there is no interaction  
with the keyboard or screen for the  
specified time period, your smartphone  
turns off automatically.  
TIP You can also set time zones for Calendar  
events. See Creating an event.  
Optimizing power settings  
Power Preferences enable you to adjust  
settings to maximize your smartphone’s  
battery performance.  
On a call, dim backlight after:  
Determines how long the backlight  
stays on at normal intensity during a  
phone call. After the specified time  
S Y S T E M S E T T I N G S  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
period, the backlight dims to conserve  
power during a long phone call.  
(security layer). You need a VPN client on  
your smartphone if your smartphone and  
your company’s server are located on  
opposite sides of the firewall.  
Beam Receive: Determines whether  
your Treo smartphone is ready to  
receive information over an infrared  
Check with your company’s system  
beam. If you leave this option turned off, administrator to see if a VPN is required to  
you must return to this screen to turn access the corporate server. If a VPN is  
on this option the next time you want to necessary, you must purchase and install a  
receive a beam.  
third-party VPN client on your smartphone  
to use this feature.  
4
Select Done.  
TIP For information about third-party VPN  
client software, visit www.palm.com/  
mypalm/755pverizon.  
TIP You can also access the brightness setting  
by pressing Option + P. To temporarily dim  
the screen’s brightness, press Option +  
Menu.  
1
2
Install your third-party VPN client. See  
Installing applications for details.  
Press Applications  
Prefs  
Select VPN.  
and select  
Connection settings  
.
3
4
Connecting to a virtual private network  
Enter the settings provided by your  
corporate system administrator.  
If you want to use your Treo smartphone to  
access your corporate email account or  
other files on your corporate server, you  
may need to set up a virtual private  
network (VPN) on your smartphone. A VPN  
enables you to log in to your corporate  
server through the company’s firewall  
C O N N E C T I O N S E T T I N G S  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
CHAPTER  
11  
Common questions  
Although we can’t anticipate all the questions you might have,  
this chapter provides answers to some of the most commonly  
asked questions. For additional information and answers to  
other common questions, visit www.palm.com/  
treo755pverizon-support.  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
In this chapter  
Upgrading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225  
Desktop software installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227  
Resetting your smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228  
Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230  
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231  
Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232  
Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240  
Hands-free devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243  
Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244  
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244  
Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245  
Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248  
Making room on your Treo™ smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249  
Third-party applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250  
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
•
•
•
Set data connection features, such as  
activating or ending data connections  
Upgrading  
Provide web clipping features, such as  
PQA files  
If you experience problems with your  
Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone after  
performing the upgrade steps in Upgrading  
from another Palm OS® device of this  
guide, you may have incompatible  
applications or settings that were not  
quarantined during the installation process.  
These incompatible applications or settings  
can lead to numerous issues, including  
system resets and freezes. If you  
experience a problem after upgrading,  
follow the steps in this section to remove  
the incompatible apps from your  
smartphone and to transfer your other info  
to your new smartphone.  
Provide instant messaging features  
If you want to continue using these types  
of applications, please contact the  
third-party developer for software updates  
and info about compatibility with your Treo  
755P smartphone.  
WINDOWS ONLY  
1
On your computer, click  
Start>Programs>Palm>Safe HotSync.  
2
3
Follow the instructions on the screen.  
Locate the Old_Apps folder on your  
computer. This folder is usually located  
inside one of the following folders:  
C:\Program Files\Palm\  
C:\Program Files\palmOne\  
C:\Program Files\Handspring\  
NOTE If you have trouble installing a  
third-party application, contact the  
developer for assistance.  
4
To help you identify the app that is  
causing the problem, move one app at a  
time from the Old_Apps folder to the  
Backup folder, and then sync.  
We recommend that you do not install  
apps that do any of the following:  
•
•
Modify phone functions, such as  
ringtones, dialing, or caller ID  
Replace organizer features, such as  
Contacts or Calendar  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And DownloadU. P G R A D I N G  
225  
                         
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
If the problem recurs, delete the last  
app you installed and report the  
problem to its developer.  
3
Confirm that your copy includes the  
Backup subfolder and that all the files in  
the original Backup subfolder are also in  
the copy of the Backup subfolder.  
5
Repeat step 4 for each of the apps in  
the Old_Apps folder.  
4
5
Delete all files from the original Backup  
subfolder.  
NOTE If you have trouble moving apps  
from the Old_Apps folder to the Backup  
folder, or determining which files to move,  
try reinstalling the app using the original  
third-party developer files.  
Perform a hard reset on your Treo 755P  
smartphone. See Resetting your  
smartphone for instructions.  
6
7
Sync your new smartphone with your  
new desktop software and be sure to  
select your existing device name from  
the User list.  
TIP Need more info on the Backup folder? See  
What is the backup folder?.  
To help you identify the app that is  
causing the problem, move one  
third-party app from the copy of the  
Backup subfolder to the original  
Backup subfolder, and then sync.  
MAC ONLY  
1
Locate your user folder on your  
computer.  
If the problem recurs, delete the last  
app you installed and report the  
problem to its developer.  
NOTE Your user folder name is the same  
as your device name and is usually found in  
this location: <Mac hard drive> : Users :  
<your Mac username> : Documents :  
Palm : Users  
8
Repeat step 7 for each of the third-party  
apps in the copy of the Backup folder.  
2
Select your user folder and Option-drag  
it to your Mac desktop to make a copy  
of that folder.  
U P G R A D I N G  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
2
3
Restart your computer.  
Desktop software  
installation  
Quit any active applications, including  
virus scanners and Internet security  
applications.  
4
Make sure you’re installing the software  
from the Palm Software Installation CD  
that came with your new smartphone.  
Other versions of the desktop software  
may not work with this Treo  
If you are having trouble installing the  
desktop software, you may have the wrong  
version of the software or some of your  
computer’s resources may be unavailable.  
smartphone.  
TIP The Palm Software Installation CD installs  
software that lets you synchronize using  
Palm® Desktop software (included) or  
Microsoft® Outlook® for Windows (sold  
separately). If you want to synchronize using a  
different personal information manager (PIM),  
you must install a third-party solution. Contact  
the PIM’s vendor to learn if software is  
available for your smartphone.  
5
Insert the Palm Software Installation CD  
to restart the installation.  
IMPORTANT Always use the same  
language for your Treo smartphone, your  
operating system, and your desktop  
software. Otherwise, you may lose  
information or have difficulty with  
synchronization. Support is not provided for  
mismatched language setups.  
Follow these steps to retry the installation:  
1
Make sure your computer profile  
includes administrator rights to install  
software. In large organizations, these  
are usually granted by the system  
administrator.  
D E S K T O P S O F T W A R E I N S T A L L A T I O N  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
loading any system extras. If your  
Resetting your  
smartphone  
smartphone loops or freezes during or after  
a soft reset, a system reset may help.  
Performing a system reset can release your  
smartphone from an endless loop so that  
you can uninstall a third-party application  
that may be causing the looping.  
Performing a soft reset  
A soft reset is similar to restarting a  
computer. If your smartphone is not  
responding or you have trouble  
synchronizing with your computer, a soft  
reset may help. All your info is retained  
when you perform a soft reset.  
1
Remove the battery from your  
smartphone.  
2
Press and hold Up  
while reinserting  
the battery.  
Don’t know how? See Replacing the  
battery.  
1
Remove the battery from your  
smartphone, and then reinsert it.  
3
4
5
When Date & Time Preferences  
Don’t know how? See Replacing the  
battery.  
appears, then release Up  
.
Delete the third-party application that  
you suspect is causing the problem.  
NOTE The reset begins when you reinsert  
the battery.  
Perform a soft reset. The wireless  
features of your smartphone are not  
available until you complete this step.  
2
At the end of the soft reset, Date &  
Time Preferences appears. Select  
Done.  
Performing a hard reset  
A hard reset erases all information and  
third-party software on your Treo  
smartphone. Never perform a hard reset  
without first trying a soft reset, a system  
reset, and trying to resolve third-party  
Performing a system reset  
A system reset, also called a safe or warm  
reset, tells your smartphone to stop what  
it’s doing and start over again without  
Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
R E S E T T I N GDownload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
228  
                           
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
software issues. (See Third-party  
applications for suggestions on diagnosing  
third-party software issues.) After a hard  
reset, you can restore previously  
synchronized information the next time you  
sync.  
1
Remove the battery from your  
smartphone, and then reinsert it.  
Don’t know how? See Replacing the  
battery.  
2
3
When the Access Powered logo  
appears, press and hold Power/End  
for ten seconds, and then  
IMPORTANT If you set a password on  
your smartphone, performing a hard reset  
reformats your smartphone. This is a more  
severe form of a hard reset, which  
removes all your information, and restores  
your formats, preferences, and other  
settings to the factory default settings.  
release Power/End  
.
When the Erase all data? prompt  
appears, press Up  
to confirm the  
hard reset.  
IMPORTANT If a Reformatting in  
progress message appears, do not touch  
your smartphone until the process is  
complete. This may take up to 10 minutes.  
TIP Some third-party applications do not  
create a backup on your computer when you  
synchronize. If you perform a hard reset, you  
may lose data in these applications and you  
will need to reinstall the application after the  
hard reset. Please contact the application’s  
developer to find out which data is backed up  
during synchronization.  
4
When the language selection screen  
appears, select the same language you  
selected for your desktop software.  
IMPORTANT Always use the same  
language for your Treo smartphone, your  
operating system, and your desktop  
software. Otherwise, you may lose  
information or have difficulty with  
synchronization. Support is not provided for  
mismatched language setups.  
R E S E T T I N G Y O U R  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And DownloSaMd.A R T P H O N E  
229  
           
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
5
6
Follow the onscreen instructions to  
align the screen and set the date and  
time.  
(Optional) If you want to confirm that  
the hard reset was successful, press  
Applications  
HotSync  
and select  
. If you see your device  
name in the upper-right corner, the hard  
reset was not successful.  
Battery door  
release  
Replacing the battery  
3
4
Place a finger in the notch next to the  
battery, and lift up the old battery at a  
45-degree angle to remove it from the  
compartment.  
Your Treo 755P smartphone comes with a  
replaceable battery. Be sure to use a  
replacement battery that is recommended  
or sold by Palm and is compatible with the  
Treo 755P smartphone. Failure to use the  
proper battery may result in a risk of  
personal injury or product damage, and it  
voids your smartphone warranty.  
Align the metal contacts on the new  
battery with the contacts inside the  
battery compartment.  
1
Press Power/End  
to turn off the  
screen.  
2
Press the battery door release, and  
slide the battery door downward  
to remove it from your smartphone.  
R E P L A C I N G  
B A T T E R Y  
DToHwEnload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
230  
   
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
Battery  
contacts  
Screen  
Smartphone  
contacts  
The screen appears blank  
1
When a call lasts longer than the limit  
specified in Power Preferences, the  
screen dims automatically. In certain  
lighting conditions, the screen may  
appear blank when this occurs.  
Press any key except Power/End to  
restore the screen to normal brightness.  
Pressing Power/End hangs up the call.  
Notch  
2
3
When a period of inactivity lasts longer  
than the limit specified in Power  
Preferences, the screen turns off. Press  
5
Insert the new battery into the  
compartment at a 45-degree angle,  
pressing it into place. Slide the battery  
door onto the back of the smartphone  
until it clicks into place.  
and release Power/End  
to  
wake up the screen.  
Look closely at the screen. If you can  
see a dim image, try adjusting the  
screen brightness (see Adjusting the  
brightness).  
6
7
Connect your smartphone to the  
charger or sync cable.  
Wait for your Treo smartphone to turn  
on, and then enable the network time or  
set the date and time when prompted.  
4
5
If the screen is still blank, perform a soft  
reset (see Performing a soft reset).  
TIP Be sure to dispose of your old battery  
properly. In some areas, disposal in household  
or business trash is prohibited.  
If the problem persists, connect your  
smartphone to the charger (see  
Charging the battery) and perform a soft  
reset again.  
S C R E E N  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
6
If that doesn’t work, perform a hard  
reset (see Performing a hard reset).  
There’s a blinking bell in the upper-left  
corner  
The blinking bell in the upper-left corner of  
the screen is the Alert screen symbol. It  
appears when you have alarms or  
TIP To find carrying cases that protect the  
screen and other useful accessories, visit  
www.palm.com/mypalm/755pverizon.  
messages that you haven’t acknowledged.  
1
Press and hold Center  
blinking bell with your stylus.  
or tap the  
The screen doesn’t respond accurately to  
taps or it activates wrong features  
2
When the list of pending alerts appears,  
do any of the following:  
1
2
3
Press Applications  
and use the  
5-way  
to select Prefs .  
• Select the alert text to view the item  
and keep it in the list.  
Use the 5-way  
Touchscreen.  
to select  
• Check the box next to an alert to clear  
it from the list, and then select Done.  
Follow the onscreen instructions to  
align the screen.  
4
5
Select Done.  
If the problem persists, check for dirt  
between the screen and the edge of the  
smartphone.  
Synchronization  
Synchronization backs up the information  
from your smartphone onto your computer  
and vice versa. If you ever need to perform  
a hard reset or otherwise need to erase all  
your information on your smartphone, you  
can synchronize your smartphone with  
your computer to restore the info. Similarly,  
if your computer crashes and your  
6
If you’re using a screen protector, make  
sure that it is properly installed.  
Palm Desktop info is damaged, you can  
S Y N C H R O NDI ZoAwTnIlOoaNd from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
232  
                     
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
recover your info by synchronizing with  
device name is two words, your user folder  
your smartphone. To make sure you always name consists of the first six characters of  
have an up-to-date backup of your info,  
synchronize frequently.  
the second word of your device name  
followed by the first letter of the first word.  
For example, if your device name is John  
Smith, your user folder is named SmithJ.  
Your user folder is usually located inside  
one of the following folders:  
C:\Program Files\Palm\  
C:\Program Files\palmOne\  
C:\Program Files\Handspring\  
This section describes synchronization  
between your Treo smartphone and a  
desktop computer running Palm Desktop  
software. You can also synchronize the  
information on your smartphone using  
Wireless Sync or other third-party  
applications. See the separate  
documentation for Wireless Sync or other  
third-party applications for information on  
features and configuration.  
MAC ONLY Your user folder name is the  
same as your device name and is usually  
found in this location: Mac hard drive :  
Users : Your Mac username : Documents  
: Palm : Users.  
Before you attempt to synchronize, make  
sure you’ve installed the desktop  
synchronization software from the Palm  
Software Installation CD.  
What is the backup folder?  
The Backup folder is located inside your  
user folder (see I can’t find my user folder).  
During synchronization, HotSync® manager  
puts a copy of most of your info and  
TIP Every device needs a unique name. Never  
synchronize more than one device to the  
same device name on your computer.  
applications in the Backup folder. (Some  
third-party apps do not put a copy in the  
Backup folder.) The next time you sync,  
HotSync manager compares the contents  
of the Backup folder to the contents of your  
I can’t find my user folder  
WINDOWS ONLY If your device name is  
one word, your user folder name is the first  
six characters of your device name. If your  
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
smartphone, and then restores any missing  
info or applications.  
manager icon, click Start, select  
Programs, select Palm, and then select  
HotSync Manager.  
If an app that you deleted reappears on  
your smartphone, try deleting the app from  
your Backup folder.  
HotSync  
manager icon  
Palm® Desktop software does not respond  
to a sync attempt  
1
Make sure that the USB sync cable is  
securely connected to the USB port on  
your computer and on the bottom of  
your smartphone (see Synchronizing  
information—the basics).  
Mac: Find the Palm folder on your Mac  
hard drive. Double-click HotSync  
manager  
in the Palm folder. In the  
Connection Settings panel, set the  
Local Setup port to Palm USB.  
TIP If you’re having trouble trying to sync  
using an IR or Bluetooth® connection, try  
using the USB sync cable instead. If this  
solves the problem, then check your IR or  
Bluetooth settings (see Synchronizing  
information—advanced).  
3
Synchronize. If the synchronization is  
successful, you do not need to  
complete the remaining steps.  
4
5
Perform a soft reset (see Performing a  
soft reset).  
Synchronize. If the synchronization is  
successful, you do not need to  
complete the remaining steps.  
2
Make sure that HotSync manager is  
running:  
Windows: Right-click HotSync  
6
If problems persist and you’re  
synchronizing through a USB hub, try  
connecting the sync cable to a different  
manager  
in the taskbar in the  
lower-right corner of your computer  
screen, and make sure that Local USB  
is checked. If you don’t see the HotSync  
S Y N C H R O NDI ZoAwTnIlOoaNd from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
234  
             
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
USB port or directly to your computer’s  
built-in USB port.  
Synchronization starts but stops without  
finishing  
7
8
Reboot your computer.  
TIP The HotSync Log can give you information  
about your most recent synchronization.  
Synchronize. If the synchronization is  
successful, you do not need to  
complete the remaining steps.  
Windows: Right-click the HotSync manager  
icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of  
your computer screen, and then select View  
Log.  
9
Do one of the following:  
Windows: Uninstall Palm software.  
Click Start, select Settings, select  
Control Panel, select Add or Remove  
Programs, select Palm Desktop  
software, and then click Change/  
Remove.  
Mac: Open Palm Desktop software. From the  
HotSync menu, select View Log.  
®
If you upgraded from a previous Palm OS  
device or received a system error, such as  
Sys0505, there may be conflicts with  
software on your smartphone.  
Mac: Contact Technical Support if the  
problem persists after completing step  
7. Mac computers do not provide an  
option for uninstalling Palm Desktop  
software.  
1
Locate your Backup subfolder and  
rename the folder (for example,  
BackupOld). Note that “Palm” in the  
following locations might be  
“Handspring” or “palmOne,” based on  
the device you’re upgrading from:  
10 Reboot your computer.  
11 Reinstall Palm Desktop software from  
the Palm Software Installation CD that  
came with your smartphone.  
Windows:  
C:\Program Files\Palm\device name  
Mac:  
Mac HD/Users/user name/Documents/  
Palm/Users/device name  
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
2
3
Synchronize.  
Palm Desktop software, and then click  
Change/Remove.  
If the problem is resolved, begin  
reinstalling your third-party applications  
one at a time by double-clicking a single  
file in the original Backup subfolder that  
you renamed, and sync after each  
application you install. If the problem  
recurs, delete the last application you  
installed and report the problem to its  
developer.  
6
7
Reboot your computer.  
Reinstall Palm Desktop software from  
the Palm Software Installation CD that  
came with your smartphone.  
Synchronization finishes but info doesn’t  
appear where it should  
1
Make sure you’re synchronizing with  
the intended desktop personal  
information manager (PIM). The Palm  
Software Installation CD enables you to  
choose whether you want to  
synchronize with Palm Desktop  
software (included) or Microsoft  
Outlook for Windows (sold separately).  
Reinsert the installation CD and select  
Change your synchronization  
method if necessary. If you use a  
different PIM, you need to install  
third-party software to synchronize. For  
more info, consult the company that  
makes the PIM.  
4
Do one of the following:  
Windows: If the Windows New  
Hardware Wizard appears, the  
synchronization process may be timing  
out before the wizard completes its job.  
Follow all instructions in the New  
Hardware Wizard, and then sync again.  
Mac: Contact Technical Support if the  
problem persists after completing step  
3. Mac computers do not provide an  
option for uninstalling Palm Desktop  
software.  
5
(Windows only) Uninstall Palm Desktop  
software. Click Start, select Settings,  
select Control Panel, select Add or  
Remove Programs, select  
2
If multiple Palm OS devices are  
synchronizing with your computer,  
make sure you are synchronizing with  
the correct device name. If info is not  
S Y N C H R O NDI ZoAwTnIlOoaNd from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
236  
     
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
appearing in Palm Desktop software,  
make sure the correct device name is  
selected in the User list on the toolbar  
of Palm Desktop software.  
Calendar, Contacts, Notes, and Tasks to  
be available offline.  
TIP Outlook subfolders and public folders are  
not accessible with the included software.  
You may wish to use a third-party solution  
instead.  
3
4
Open HotSync manager on your  
computer, and make sure the necessary  
conduits are set to Synchronize the  
files.  
TIP (Outlook only) If you want to sync your  
info with a global Exchange Address Book,  
you must copy the addresses to your local  
Contacts list in Outlook (right-click the  
addresses and select Add to Personal  
Address Book).  
Do one of the following:  
Windows: Uninstall Palm Desktop  
software. Click Start, select Settings,  
select Control Panel, select Add or  
Remove Programs, select  
Palm Desktop software, and then click  
Change/Remove.  
TIP For more info on Outlook conduits,  
right-click the HotSync manager icon in the  
taskbar, select Custom, select an app with  
Outlook in its name, and then select Help.  
Mac: Contact Technical Support if the  
problem persists after completing step  
3. Mac computers do not provide an  
option for uninstalling Palm Desktop  
software.  
I have duplicate entries in Microsoft  
Outlook after I sync  
1
Open Microsoft Outlook (sold  
separately) and delete the duplicate  
entries.  
5
6
Reboot your computer.  
2
On your computer, go to the Outlook  
application with duplicate entries and  
manually enter any info you added to  
your smartphone since the last time  
you synchronized.  
Reinstall Palm Desktop software from  
the Palm Software Installation CD that  
came with your smartphone.  
7
(Outlook only) If you’re trying to  
synchronize offline, set your Outlook  
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
3
4
Right-click HotSync manager  
taskbar, and select Custom.  
in the If you’re using Microsoft Outlook (sold  
separately):  
Select the application that has duplicate  
entries and also has Outlook in its  
name, such as Outlook contacts.  
1
Make sure that you installed the  
Microsoft Outlook conduit that came  
with your Treo 755P smartphone. If  
you’re not sure whether this software is  
installed, reinstall Palm Desktop  
software from the Palm Software  
Installation CD that came with your  
smartphone.  
5
6
Click Change.  
Select Desktop overwrites handheld,  
and then click OK.  
7
If more than one Outlook application  
has duplicate entries, then repeat steps  
4 through 6 for each application with  
duplicates.  
2
3
Open Microsoft Outlook and correct the  
wrong entries.  
On your computer, manually enter any  
Calendar info you added to your  
smartphone since the last time  
you synchronized.  
8
9
Click Done.  
Synchronize your smartphone and your  
computer.  
4
5
Click HotSync manager  
taskbar and select Custom.  
in the  
My appointments show up in the wrong  
time slot after I sync  
Select an application that has both  
Calendar and Outlook in its name.  
If you create an appointment in the wrong  
time zone (i.e., your desktop was set to the  
wrong time zone), it shows up in the wrong  
time zone on your smartphone. To be safe,  
enable local network time and avoid  
assigning time zones to your  
6
7
Click Change.  
Select Desktop overwrites handheld,  
and then click OK.  
8
Synchronize your smartphone and your  
computer.  
appointments.  
S Y N C H R O NDI ZoAwTnIlOoaNd from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
238  
     
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
9
Repeat steps 4 through 6 to open the  
Calendar Change HotSync Action  
dialog box.  
7
Click HotSync manager  
taskbar and select Custom.  
in the  
8
9
Select Calendar.  
10 Select Synchronize the files, and then  
Click Change.  
click OK.  
10 Select Desktop overwrites handheld,  
You should now be able to assign time  
zones to your events without encountering  
this problem.  
and then click OK.  
11 Synchronize your smartphone and your  
computer.  
If you’re using Palm Desktop software:  
12 Repeat steps 7 through 9 to open the  
Calendar Change HotSync Action  
dialog box.  
1
On your smartphone, press  
Calendar  
.
13 Select Synchronize the files, and then  
2
3
Press Menu  
.
click OK.  
Select Options, and then select  
Preferences.  
You should now be able to assign time  
zones to your events without encountering  
this problem.  
4
5
6
Uncheck the New events use time  
zones box (if it’s checked).  
IMPORTANT To avoid this problem in the  
future, do not assign time zones to your  
events. Palm Desktop software does not  
support time zones.  
On your computer, open Palm Desktop  
software and correct the wrong entries.  
On your computer, manually enter any  
Calendar info you added to your  
smartphone since the last time  
you synchronized.  
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
My smartphone won’t connect to the  
mobile network  
Phone  
1
Try the suggestions about signal  
strength described in Signal strength is  
weak.  
Signal strength is weak  
Become familiar with low coverage areas  
where you live, commute, work, and play.  
Then you will know when to expect signal  
strength issues. You can check signal  
strength by looking at the signal-strength  
icon in the title bar of the Phone  
2
3
Turn off your phone and turn it on again  
(see Turning your phone on and off).  
Perform a soft reset (see Performing a  
soft reset).  
application’s Main View. The stronger the  
signal, the more bars that appear. If you are  
outside a coverage area, no bars appear.  
The other person hears an echo  
•
•
•
Try decreasing the volume on your Treo  
smartphone to avoid coupling or  
feedback on the other person’s end.  
This applies to both the speakerphone  
and the earpiece.  
1
2
3
4
5
If you’re standing, move about ten feet  
(about 3 meters) in any direction.  
If you’re in a building, move near a  
window. Open any metal blinds.  
Position the earpiece closer to your ear  
to prevent sound leaking back to the  
microphone. Keep your hand away from  
the microphone hole, which is on the  
bottom right side of the smartphone.  
If you’re in a building, move outdoors or  
to a more open area.  
If you’re outdoors, move away from  
large buildings, trees, or electrical wires.  
If you’re using the speakerphone  
If you’re in a vehicle, move your Treo  
smartphone so that it’s level with a  
window of your vehicle.  
feature with your smartphone lying on a  
flat surface, try turning the smartphone  
face down (screen facing the surface).  
P H O N E  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
I hear my own voice echo  
If you’re using a Bluetooth hands-free  
device, try the following:  
Ask the person on the other end of the call  
to turn down the volume on his or her  
phone or to hold the phone closer to his or  
her ear.  
•
Move your smartphone closer to the  
hands-free device. Audio quality  
degrades as the distance between your  
smartphone and hands-free device  
increases. The effective range for a  
device varies between manufacturers.  
My voice is too quiet on the other end  
•
Be sure to place the bottom of the Treo  
smartphone, or the hands-free  
•
Confirm that no obstructions, including  
your body, are between the smartphone  
and your hands-free device.  
microphone, close to your mouth.  
•
Check the signal-strength  
icon in  
the title bar of the Phone application’s  
Main View. If the signal is weak (few  
bars are displayed), try the suggestions  
about signal strength described in  
Signal strength is weak.  
TIP For best performance, keep your  
Bluetooth headset and phone on the same  
side of your body.  
My smartphone hangs up when I hold it  
to my ear  
I hear static or interference  
Check the signal-strength  
title bar of the Phone application’s Main  
View. If the signal is weak (few bars are  
icon in the  
You may be accidentally pressing the  
onscreen Hang Up All button with your  
cheek. Try holding the smartphone so that  
displayed), try the suggestions about signal your face doesn’t press against the screen.  
strength described in Signal strength is  
weak.  
If this is not convenient, you may want to  
disable the screen’s touch-sensitive feature  
during active calls (see Locking your  
screen).  
P H O N E  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
My phone seems to turn off by itself  
TIP To find carrying cases that can help  
prevent your smartphone from making calls,  
as well as other useful accessories, visit  
www.palm.com/mypalm/755pverizon.  
If a system error and reset occur, the Treo  
smartphone automatically turns the phone  
on if it was on before the reset. However, if  
the smartphone can’t determine if your  
phone was on before the reset, the phone  
does not automatically turn on (see Turning  
your phone on and off). If the problem  
persists and you’re using third-party  
applications, see Third-party applications  
for additional suggestions.  
The voicemail icon stays on the screen  
after I listen to my messages  
If the voicemail icon stays in the title bar  
after you listen to your messages, you can  
manually clear the voicemail icon.  
1
2
3
In the Phone application, press  
Menu  
My smartphone makes or answers calls  
when it’s in a bag or pocket  
.
Select Options and then select Phone  
Preferences.  
Items in your bag or pocket may be  
pressing the onscreen Answer button or  
otherwise activating screen items. If this  
happens, be sure to press Power/End  
to turn off the screen before placing  
your smartphone in a bag or pocket. You  
may also want to disable the screen’s  
touch-sensitive feature during incoming  
calls (see Locking your screen).  
Select Clear Voicemail Icon.  
P H O N E  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
•
•
Your hands-free device is charged and  
turned on.  
Hands-free devices  
Your Treo smartphone is within range of  
the hands-free device.  
TIP Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet (10  
meters) in optimum environmental  
conditions. Performance and range may be  
affected by physical obstacles, radio  
interference from nearby electronic  
equipment, and other factors.  
If the problem persists, turn the Bluetooth  
setting Off and then turn it On again. If it  
still persists, create a new partnership with  
the hands-free device (see Connecting to a  
Bluetooth® hands-free device).  
I can’t make or receive calls using a  
Bluetooth® hands-free device  
I hear static or interference when using  
my Bluetooth hands-free device  
Confirm all the following:  
•
Try moving your Treo smartphone closer  
to the hands-free device. Audio quality  
degrades as the distance between your  
smartphone and hands-free device  
increases. The effective range for a  
device varies between manufacturers.  
•
The Bluetooth device is compatible with  
your smartphone. Go to  
www.palm.com/  
treo755pverizon-support for a list of  
compatible devices.  
•
•
Confirm that no obstructions, including  
your body, are between the smartphone  
and your hands-free device.  
•
•
Press Applications  
and select  
Bluetooth  
. Make sure the  
Bluetooth setting is On.  
If the problem persists, turn the  
Bluetooth setting Off and then turn it  
back On again. If it still persists, create a  
new partnership with the hands-free  
device (see Connecting to a Bluetooth®  
hands-free device).  
You have already formed a partnership  
between your smartphone and your  
hands-free device, and that the  
hands-free device appears in the  
Trusted Devices list (see Connecting to  
a Bluetooth® hands-free device).  
H A N D S - F R E E D E V I C E S  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
Messaging  
TIP For best performance, keep your  
Bluetooth headset and phone on the same  
side of your body.  
I can’t tell if data services are available  
When your phone is on, icons appear in the  
title bar in the Phone application’s Main  
View to indicate whether data services are  
available and whether a data connection is  
active. See What are all those icons? for a  
description of the icons that indicate that  
data services are available.  
Some features of my Bluetooth  
hands-free device don’t work with my  
smartphone  
•
Check the Palm compatibility list at  
www.palm.com/  
treo755pverizon-support to ensure that  
your device is compatible.  
•
Check the documentation that came  
with your device or the manufacturer’s  
website for information specific to  
your device.  
TIP If your phone is on and you do not see any  
of the data icons, then data services are not  
available in your current location.  
I can’t send or receive text messages  
•
Make sure your phone is turned on (see  
Turning your phone on and off).  
Email  
•
Contact Verizon Wireless to verify that  
your plan includes text messaging  
services, that these services have been  
correctly activated, and that they are  
available at your location. Verizon  
Wireless should be able to tell you if  
messaging services have been  
•
For troubleshooting info on Wireless  
Sync, go to:  
http://www.wirelesssync.vzw.com  
•
For troubleshooting info on the  
VersaMail® application, see the User  
Guide for the VersaMail Application at  
www.palm.com/mypalm/755pverizon.  
experiencing transmission delays.  
Delays can also occur between the time  
E M A I L  
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
that a message is sent and the time it is  
received.  
the title bar of Main View of the Phone  
application. If you do not see either of  
these icons, data services are not  
available in your current location and you  
cannot exchange MMS messages.  
•
•
Verify with the recipient that the  
receiving device can handle text  
messages.  
•
•
Verify with the recipient that the  
receiving device can handle multimedia  
messages.  
If a text message arrives but does not  
display an alert, perform a soft reset  
(see Performing a soft reset).  
If a message arrives but does not  
display an alert, perform a soft reset  
(see Performing a soft reset).  
I can’t send or receive multimedia (MMS)  
messages  
•
Make sure your phone is turned on (see  
Turning your phone on and off).  
Web  
•
Contact Verizon Wireless to verify that  
your plan includes MMS multimedia  
messaging services, that these services  
have been correctly activated, and that  
they are available at your location.  
Verizon Wireless should be able to tell  
you if messaging services have been  
experiencing transmission delays.  
Delays can also occur between the time  
that a message is sent and the time it is  
received.  
I can’t tell if data services are available  
When your phone is on, icons appear in the  
title bar in the Phone application’s Main  
View to indicate whether data services are  
available and whether a data connection is  
active. See What are all those icons? for a  
description of the icons that indicate that  
data services are available.  
•
Make sure that either the  
TIP If your phone is on and you do not see any  
of the data icons, then data services are not  
available in your current location.  
NationalAccess  
or  
BroadbandAccess  
icon appears in  
WE B  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
My smartphone won’t connect to the  
Internet  
6
7
Select Connect.  
If the connection is successful, go the  
web browser. If you still can’t make a  
connection, perform a soft reset (see  
Performing a soft reset).  
Your Treo 755P smartphone supports the  
NationalAccess and BroadbandAccess  
wireless data networks. To connect to the  
Internet, you must subscribe to and  
activate data services with Verizon  
Wireless, and you must be in a location  
with data coverage.  
8
9
If your phone did not turn on  
automatically, press and hold Power/  
End  
to turn on your phone, and  
try connecting to the Internet.  
1
Press and hold Power/End  
to  
Contact Verizon Wireless to verify the  
following:  
turn off your phone. Then press  
and hold the same button to turn it back  
on again.  
• Your subscription plan includes  
high-speed data services  
2
Press Phone  
the NationalAccess  
BroadbandAccess  
bar of the Phone application’s Main  
View.  
and look for either  
• Data services have been activated on  
your account  
or  
icon in the title  
• Data coverage is available in your  
location  
• There are no data service outages in  
your location  
3
If you see one of these icons, you are in  
a data coverage area. Try connecting to  
the Internet again. If you do not see  
either of these icons, press  
Applications  
and continue with the following steps.  
I can’t access a web page  
First, make sure you have Internet access:  
Open the web browser and try to view  
another web page you’ve loaded before. To  
ensure you’re viewing the page directly  
, select Prefs  
,
4
5
Select Network.  
Select the Services pick list and select  
BroadbandAccess.  
from the Internet, press Menu  
, select  
Go, and then select Refresh.  
W E B  
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
If you can view the other web page after  
a high-speed data service, it seems slow if  
you refresh it, but you still can’t access the you are used to BroadbandAccess speed.  
page you were originally trying to view, the  
1
Press Phone  
the NationalAccess  
BroadbandAccess  
bar of the Phone application’s Main  
View.  
and look for either  
page may contain elements that are not  
supported by the web browser. These  
include Flash, Shockwave, VBScript,  
WMLScript, and other plug-ins.  
or  
icon in the title  
Some websites use a redirector to their  
true home page. If the web browser on  
your smartphone can’t follow the  
redirector, try using a desktop browser to  
see the landing page of the redirector, and  
then enter that address in the web browser  
on your smartphone.  
2
If you see the BroadbandAccess  
icon, then there may be a problem with  
the web site you are trying to access.  
Try opening a different web page to see  
if the problem persists.  
3
4
If you see the NationalAccess  
icon,  
then you may be experiencing the  
difference in performance between the  
two types of data networks.  
TIP Your Treo smartphone can open your email  
application when you select an email address  
on a web page. If nothing happens when you  
select the link, make sure your email  
application is already set up.  
To be sure there is not a problem with  
your connection to the Verizon Wireless  
network, press and hold Power/End  
to turn off your phone. Then  
press and hold the same button to turn  
it back on again.  
It takes a long time for a web page to load  
If it is taking longer than usual to load web  
pages, you may have traveled from a  
BroadbandAccess service area to a  
5
Try opening the web page again to see  
if it loads faster.  
NationalAccess service area. Although  
NationalAccess data service is considered  
WE B  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
An image or map is too small on  
my screen  
Camera  
The web browser has two modes:  
Optimized and Wide Page. Optimized  
Mode resizes all images and page  
elements to fit in a single column on the  
smartphone screen. Switch to Wide Page  
Mode to see the full-size image (see  
Viewing a web page).  
TIP If your smartphone does not have a built-in  
camera, the information in this section about  
taking pictures does not apply to you.  
Here are some tips for taking good pictures  
with the built-in camera:  
You may also be able to save the image on  
your smartphone or an expansion card and  
then view the image later on your  
computer.  
•
Clean the camera’s lens with a soft,  
lint-free cloth.  
•
Take pictures in bright lighting  
conditions. Low-light images may be  
grainy, due to the sensitivity of the  
camera.  
A secure site refuses to permit a  
transaction  
Some websites don’t support certain  
browsers for transactions. Please contact  
the site’s webmaster to make sure the site  
allows transactions using your  
•
Hold the smartphone as still as  
possible. Try supporting your  
picture-taking arm against your body or  
a stationary object (such as a wall).  
smartphone’s Blazer® web browser.  
•
•
Keep the subject of the picture still.  
Exposure time is longer with lower light  
levels, so you may see a blur.  
For best results, verify that you have the  
brightest light source coming from  
behind you, lighting the subject’s face.  
C A M E R A  
248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
Avoid taking indoor pictures with the  
subject in front of a window or light.  
fill up. Here are some common ways to  
clear space:  
•
Make sure the subject is at least 18  
inches (45.72 centimeters) away from  
the camera to ensure good focus.  
•
Email: Messages that have large  
attachments can quickly consume  
memory on your smartphone. Delete  
messages with large attachments. If  
you have hundreds of messages with or  
without attachments, you may want to  
delete older messages to make room  
(see the User Guide for the VersaMail  
Application at www.palm.com/mypalm/  
755pverizon. or the Wireless Sync  
documentation at http://  
When you synchronize your smartphone  
with your computer, your camera images  
are stored on your hard drive (see Viewing  
pictures and videos on your computer).  
Making room on your  
Treo™ smartphone  
www.wirelesssync.vzw.com).  
•
Pics&Videos: Large images take up a  
lot of memory. Move images to an  
expansion card or synchronize them to  
your computer, and then delete the  
images from your smartphone (see  
Viewing pictures and videos on your  
computer and Deleting a picture or  
video).  
Keep in mind that your smartphone  
includes an expansion card slot, and that  
you can store applications and information  
on expansion cards (sold separately).  
However, you still need free memory on  
the smartphone itself to run applications  
from an expansion card. For more info on  
using expansion cards, see Using  
expansion cards.  
•
Music: Music files often consume  
excessive memory. Move music files to  
an expansion card, or delete large files  
from your smartphone (see Transferring  
MP3 files from your computer).  
If you store a large number of records or  
install many third-party applications, the  
internal memory on your smartphone may  
™
Y O U R  
Download from Www.Somanuals.coMmA. KAIllNMGaRnOuaOlsMSOeaNrch AndTDRoEwOnloSaMd.A R T P H O N E  
249  
                             
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
•
•
Messaging: Multimedia content can  
also consume excessive memory. Move keyboard and 5-way navigator in these  
multimedia content to an expansion  
card, or delete large files from your  
smartphone (see Deleting messages).  
strange behavior or errors when using the  
applications. Third-party applications that  
modify wireless features may require extra  
troubleshooting.  
Internet: If you set a large web browser  
cache, you may want to use the web  
browser’s advanced Memory  
Management settings to clear all recent  
pages (see Customizing your web  
browser settings).  
If you recently installed an application and  
your device seems to be stuck, try the  
following:  
1
Perform a soft reset (see Performing a  
soft reset).  
2
If the problem persists, perform a  
system reset (see Performing a system  
reset).  
•
Third-party applications: You can delete  
infrequently used applications (see  
Removing applications) or move them  
to an expansion card (see Copying  
applications between an expansion card  
and your smartphone).  
3
Delete the most recently installed  
application from your smartphone (see  
Removing applications).  
4
5
If the problem persists, perform another  
system reset.  
Third-party  
applications  
If possible, synchronize your  
smartphone with your computer to back  
up your most recent info.  
6
If you’re unable to perform the  
Some third-party applications can cause  
conflicts on your smartphone. For example,  
third-party applications that were not  
written with the Treo smartphone keyboard  
and 5-way navigator in mind may cause  
preceding steps or the problem  
persists, locate your Backup subfolder  
on your computer and rename the  
folder (for example, BackupOld). Note  
that “Palm” in the following locations  
A P P L I C A T I O N S  
T H I R D - P A RDT Yownload from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
250  
                     
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
might be “Handspring” or “palmOne,”  
based on the device you’re upgrading  
from:  
Error messages  
Your Treo smartphone is designed to  
minimize interruptions when a system  
error occurs. If your smartphone  
encounters a system error, it automatically  
resets itself and resumes functioning as  
normal. If possible, it even turns the phone  
back on if it was on before the error  
occurred.  
Windows:  
C:\Program Files\Palm\device name  
Mac:  
Mac HD/Users/user name/Documents/  
Palm/Users/device name  
7
8
9
Perform a hard reset (see Performing a  
hard reset).  
Sync to restore your Calendar, Contacts,  
Tasks, Memos, and Pics&Videos info.  
Sometimes you might want to know more  
about an error. Your Treo smartphone uses  
a special interface to show error messages  
in greater detail.  
If the problem is resolved, begin  
reinstalling your third-party applications  
one at a time by double-clicking a single  
file in the original Backup subfolder that  
you renamed, and sync after each  
application you install.  
1
2
Press Phone  
.
Enter # #377, and then press Send  
*
.
3
Review the screen with details about  
the conditions that led up to the most  
recent automatic reset.  
10 If the problem recurs, delete the last  
application you installed and report the  
problem to its developer.  
4
Select OK.  
Getting more help  
NOTE Third-party developers create their  
own error messages. If you do not  
understand an error message, please  
contact the developer of the application for  
help.  
Contact the author or vendor of the  
third-party software if you require further  
assistance.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And DoEwRnRloOaRd.M E S S A G E S  
251  
                 
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
E R R O R M E S S A G E S  
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beam  
Terms  
The process of sending or receiving an  
entry or application using the infrared port  
on your Treo smartphone.  
1xRTT (single carrier [1x] radio  
transmission technology)  
®
Bluetooth wireless technology  
A wireless technology that provides fast  
data transfer and Internet access with  
average speeds of 60 to 80Kbps and bursts  
of up to 144Kbps. Also called  
NationalAccess for Verizon Wireless  
customers.  
Technology that enables devices such as  
smartphones, mobile phones, and  
computers to connect wirelessly to each  
other so that they can exchange  
information over short distances.  
BroadbandAccess  
Alt (alternative)  
The name Verizon Wireless has given to a  
wireless broadband technology that is  
designed for very high speed data transfer  
with average download speeds of 400 to  
700Kbps. It is capable of reaching  
download speeds of up to 1.8Mbps and  
upload speeds of up to 156Kbps. Also  
called EVDO.  
A keyboard key. Enter a letter on the  
keyboard, and then press Alt  
to access  
variations such as international characters  
and symbols.  
Applications  
The screen on your Palm® Treo™ 755P  
smartphone from which you can open all  
applications.  
BroadBandAccess Connect  
Auto-off interval  
The name Verizon Wireless has given to a  
wireless technology that enables you to  
convert your smartphone into a wireless  
modem so that you can access the Internet  
from your computer. Also called dial-up  
networking.  
The time of inactivity that passes before  
the screen on your smartphone turns off.  
The wireless features on your smartphone  
are unaffected by this setting.  
T E RMS  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Device name  
called BroadbandAccess for Verizon  
Wireless customers.  
The name associated with your Treo  
smartphone that distinguishes it from  
other Palm OS® devices. When you first  
synchronize your smartphone, you are  
asked to give it a device name. This name  
appears in the User list in Palm Desktop  
software.  
Favorite  
A button that provides quick access to a  
phone number (speed dial) or commonly  
used application (such as Contacts, Web,  
or Messaging). You can define up to 70  
favorite buttons in the Phone application.  
Dial-up networking (DUN)  
HotSync® technology  
The wireless technology that enables you  
to convert your smartphone into a wireless  
modem so that you can access the Internet  
from your computer using the Verizon  
Wireless BroadbandAccess Connect  
service.  
The technology that synchronizes your  
smartphone and your computer with the  
simple press of a button.  
HotSync® manager  
The computer application that manages the  
synchronization of your Treo smartphone  
with your computer.  
Dialog box  
A set of options and command buttons that  
is enclosed by a border and that enables  
you to carry out a specific task.  
Infrared (IR)  
A way of transmitting information using  
light waves. The IR port on your  
smartphone enables you to transfer  
information to other IR devices within a  
short radius.  
EVDO (Evolution Data Optimized)  
A wireless broadband technology that is  
designed for very high speed data transfer  
with average download speeds of 400 to  
700Kbps. It is capable of reaching  
Lithium ion (Li-ion)  
download speeds of up to 1.8Mbps and  
upload speeds of up to 156Kbps. Also  
The rechargeable battery technology used  
in Treo smartphones.  
T E R M S  
254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
MMS (Multimedia Messaging System)  
applications that can be added to your Treo  
755P smartphone.  
An enhanced form of messaging that  
enables you to send pictures, videos,  
animations, sounds, and ringtones almost  
instantly.  
Palm® Quick Install  
The component on your Windows  
computer that enables you to install Palm  
OS applications and other information on  
your Treo smartphone.  
NationalAccess  
The name Verizon Wireless has given to a  
wireless technology that provides fast data  
transfer and Internet access with average  
speeds of 60 to 80Kbps and bursts of up to  
144Kbps. Also called 1xRTT.  
Partnership  
Two Bluetooth devices—for example, your  
smartphone and a hands-free device—that  
can connect because each device finds the  
same passkey on the other device. Once  
you form a partnership with a device, you  
don’t need to enter a passkey to connect  
with that device. Partnership is also known  
as paired relationship, pairing, Trusted  
Device, and Trusted Pair on some devices.  
Option key  
The keyboard button that enables you to  
access the alternative feature that appears  
above the letter on each key.  
Palm® Desktop software  
A PIM application for computers that helps  
you manage your personal information and  
keep your personal information  
Phone  
The application on your Treo smartphone  
that enables you to make and receive  
phone calls.  
synchronized with your Treo smartphone.  
Palm OS® software  
PIM (personal information manager)  
The operating system of your Treo 755P  
smartphone. Palm OS software is known  
for its simplicity of use and for the large  
number of compatible third-party  
A genre of software that includes  
applications such as Palm Desktop  
software, Microsoft® Outlook®, Lotus  
Notes, ACT!, and the Palm OS organizer  
T E RMS  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
applications on your smartphone. PIMs  
phones. These messages can usually  
generally store contacts, schedules, tasks, include up to 160 characters; messages  
and memos.  
with more than 160 characters are  
automatically split into several messages.  
Treo smartphones can send and receive  
SMS messages while you are on a voice  
call.  
Pix Place  
The companion website for Verizon  
Wireless picture and video messaging  
services.  
Streaming  
Slide  
Technology that enables you to access  
media content—for example, watch video  
or listen to an audio program—directly  
from the Internet on your smartphone  
without needing to download a file to save  
on your smartphone.  
A collection of text, pictures, videos, and  
sounds that are grouped together within a  
multimedia message. During playback, all  
the items within a particular slide appear  
on the same screen. If a multimedia  
message contains multiple slides, each  
slide can be viewed separately during  
playback.  
User folder  
The folder on your computer that contains  
the information you enter in Palm Desktop  
software and the information you enter on  
your smartphone and synchronize with  
Palm Desktop software.  
SMS (Short Messaging Service)  
The service that exchanges short text  
messages almost instantly. Text messages  
are typically exchanged between mobile  
T E R M S  
256  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
•
An accessory that contains NO metal (snaps, clips, etc.) and  
provides AT LEAST 1.5 cm of separation between the users body  
and the unit.  
Important safety and  
legal information  
Do NOT use the device in a manner such that it is in direct contact  
with the body (i.e., on the lap or in a breast pocket). Such use will  
likely exceed FCC RF safety exposure limits See www.fcc.gov/oet/  
rfsafety/ for more information on RF exposure safety.  
FCC Notice  
The highest reported (FCC) SAR values of the Palm® Treo™ 755P  
smartphone, by Palm are:  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits  
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against  
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment  
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not  
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause  
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If  
this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television  
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and  
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or  
more of the following measures:  
Maximum SAR  
Values  
BroadbandAccess  
Cellular  
BroadbandAccess  
PCS  
Held to Ear  
1.07 (W/1Kg)  
0.89 (W/1Kg)  
1.46 (W/1Kg)  
0.33 (W/1Kg)  
Body - Worn  
FCC Radiofrequency Emission  
This smartphone meets the FCC Radiofrequency Emission  
Guidelines and is certified with the FCC as:  
FCC ID number: O8F-895.  
More information on the smartphone's SAR can be found from the  
following FCC Website:  
https://gullfoss2.fcc.gov/prod/oet/cf/eas/reports/GenericSearch.cfm.  
•
•
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from  
that to which the receiver is connected.  
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility Your Treo smartphone is compliant  
with the FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC) requirements. For  
additional HAC information, including the HAC rating of this product,  
please refer to www.palm.com/treoHAC.  
Antenna Care/Unauthorized Modifications  
Use only the supplied integral antenna. Unauthorized antenna  
modifications or attachments could damage the unit and may violate  
FCC regulations. Any changes or modifications not expressly  
approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the  
user's authority to operate the equipment.  
Static Electricity, ESD, and Your Palm® Device  
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can cause damage to electronic devices  
if discharged into the device, so you should take steps to avoid such  
an occurrence.  
FCC RF Safety Statement  
Description of ESD Static electricity is an electrical charge caused  
by the buildup of excess electrons on the surface of a material. To  
most people, static electricity and ESD are nothing more than  
annoyances. For example, after walking over a carpet while scuffing  
In order to comply with FCC RF exposure safety guidelines, users  
MUST use one of the following types of bodyworn accessories.  
•
A Palm™ brand body-worn accessory that has been tested for  
SAR compliance and is intended for use with this product.  
I M P O R T A N T S A F E T Y A N D  
I N F O R M A T I O N  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search AndLDEoGwAnLload.  
257  
       
your feet, building up electrons on your body, you may get a shock—  
the discharge event—when you touch a metal doorknob. This little  
shock discharges the built-up static electricity.  
•
The rapidity with which you touch, connect, or disconnect  
electronic devices.  
While you should always take appropriate precautions to discharge  
static electricity, if you are in an environment where you notice ESD  
events, you may want to take extra precautions to protect your  
electronic equipment against ESD.  
ESD-susceptible equipment Even a small amount of ESD can harm  
circuitry, so when working with electronic devices, take measures to  
®
help protect your electronic devices, including your Palm device,  
from ESD harm. While Palm has built protections against ESD into its  
products, ESD unfortunately exists and, unless neutralized, could  
build up to levels that could harm your equipment. Any electronic  
device that contains an external entry point for plugging in anything  
from cables to docking stations is susceptible to entry of ESD.  
Devices that you carry with you, such as your smartphone, build up  
ESD in a unique way because the static electricity that may have built  
up on your body is automatically passed to the device. Then, when  
the device is connected to another device such as a docking station, a  
discharge event can occur.  
Battery safety information  
•
Do not disassemble or open, crush, bend or deform, puncture or  
shred.  
•
Do not modify or remanufacture, attempt to insert foreign objects  
into the battery, immerse or expose to water or other liquids,  
expose to fire, explosion or other hazard.  
•
•
Only use the battery for the system for which it is specified.  
Only use the battery with a charging system that has been  
qualified with the system per this standard. Use of an unqualified  
battery or charger may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage,  
or other hazard.  
Precautions against ESD Make sure to discharge any built-up static  
electricity from yourself and your electronic devices before touching  
an electronic device or connecting one device to another. The  
recommendation from Palm is that you take this precaution before  
connecting your device to your computer, placing the device in a  
cradle, or connecting it to any other device. You can do this in many  
ways, including the following:  
•
•
Do not short circuit a battery or allow metallic conductive objects  
to contact battery terminals.  
Replace the battery only with another battery that has been  
qualified with the system per this standard, IEEE-Std-1725-200x.  
Use of an unqualified battery may present a risk of fire, explosion,  
leakage or other hazard.  
•
Ground yourself when you’re holding your mobile device by  
simultaneously touching a metal surface that is at earth ground.  
For example, if your computer has a metal case and is plugged  
into a standard three-prong grounded outlet, touching the case  
should discharge the ESD on your body.  
•
Promptly dispose of used batteries in accordance with local  
regulations.  
•
•
Increase the relative humidity of your environment.  
•
•
Battery usage by children should be supervised.  
Install ESD-specific prevention items, such as grounding mats.  
Avoid dropping the phone or battery. If the phone or battery is  
dropped, especially on a hard surface, and the user suspects  
damage, take it to a service center for inspection.  
Conditions that enhance ESD occurrences Conditions that can  
contribute to the buildup of static electricity in the environment  
include the following:  
•
Improper battery use may result in a fire, explosion or other  
hazard.  
•
•
Low relative humidity.  
Material type. (The type of material gathering the charge. For  
example, synthetics are more prone to static buildup than natural  
fibers like cotton.)  
I M P O R T A N T S A F E T Y  
L E G A L  
Download fAroNmD Www.SoImNaFnOuRaMls.AcToImO.NAll Manuals Search And Download.  
258  
 
Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound  
normal.  
Waste disposal  
This symbol indicates that Palm products should be  
recycled and not be disposed of in unsorted  
Municipal waste. Palm products should be sent to a  
facility that properly recycles electrical and electronic  
equipment. For information on environmental  
programs visit: www palm com/environment  
•
Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you  
experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech or  
experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your  
portable audio device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.  
You can obtain additional information on this subject from the  
following sources:  
Caution: avoid potential hearing loss  
American Academy of Audiology  
11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300  
Reston, VA 20190  
Voice: (800) 222-2336  
Email: [email protected]  
Internet: www audiology org  
Prolonged exposure to loud sounds (including music) is the most  
common cause of preventable hearing loss. Some scientific research  
suggests that using portable audio devices, such as portable music  
players and cellular telephones, at high volume settings for long  
durations may lead to permanent noise-induced hearing loss. This  
includes the use of headphones (including headsets, earbuds and  
Bluetooth® or other wireless devices). Exposure to very loud sound  
has also been associated in some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in  
the ear), hypersensitivity to sound and distorted hearing. Individual  
susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and other potential  
hearing problems varies.  
National Institute on Deafness and Other  
Communication Disorders  
National Institutes of Health  
31 Center Drive, MSC 2320  
Bethesda, MD USA 20892-2320  
Voice: (301) 496-7243  
•
The amount of sound produced by a portable audio device varies  
depending on the nature of the sound, the device, the device  
settings and the headphones. You should follow some  
commonsense recommendations when using any portable audio  
device:  
Email: [email protected]  
Internet: http://www.nidcd.nih.gov/health/hearing  
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health  
Hubert H. Humphrey Bldg.  
200 Independence Ave., SW  
Washington, DC 20201  
Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH (1-800-356-4674)  
Internet: http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/default.htm  
•
•
Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest  
volume at which you can hear adequately.  
When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot  
hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to  
you can hear what you are listening to.  
Precaution against hearing loss  
Protect your hearing. Listening to this device at  
full volume for a long period of time can damage  
your hearing.  
•
Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you  
choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment,  
use noise-cancelling headphones to block out background  
environmental noise.  
A pleine puissance, l'écoute prolongée du  
baladeur peut endommager l'oreille de l'utilisateur. Consultez notre  
site web www.palm.com/fr pour plus d'informations.  
•
•
Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases,  
less time is required before your hearing could be affected.  
Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises,  
such as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss.  
I M P O R T A N T S A F E T Y A N D  
I N F O R M A T I O N  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search AndLDEoGwAnLload.  
259  
I M P O R T A N T S A F E T Y  
L E G A L  
Download fAroNmD Www.SoImNaFnOuRaMls.AcToImO.NAll Manuals Search And Download.  
260  
Specifications  
Radio  
•
CDMA 800MHz (digital cellular), 1900MHz (PCS), and  
1400MHz (GPS)  
•
EVDO and 1xRTT  
Phone features  
•
•
•
•
•
Speakerphone  
Hands-free headset jack (2.5mm, 3 or 4-barrel connector)  
Microphone mute option  
TTY/TDD compatible  
3-way calling  
®
Processor  
technology  
Intel XScale processor, 312MHz  
Expansion  
Battery  
mini-SD card slot  
•
•
•
Rechargeable lithium ion  
Removable for replacement  
3.5 hours full charge time  
Palm OS® version  
Palm OS 5.4.9  
Camera (camera  
version only)  
•
•
•
•
Still image capture resolution (1280 x 1024), 1.3 megapixel  
2x digital zoom  
Video capture resolution (352 x 288)  
Automatic light balance  
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S  
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Size  
5.08 in. x 2.28 in. x 0.89 in. (129mm x 58mm x 22.5mm) with  
antenna  
Weight  
6.4 ounces (180 grams)  
Connectivity  
•
•
IR  
®
Bluetooth wireless technology (1.2 compliant)  
Touch-sensitive LCD screen (includes stylus)  
65,536 colors (16-bit color)  
Display  
•
•
•
User-adjustable brightness  
Keyboard  
•
•
Built-in QWERTY keyboard plus 5-way navigator  
Backlight for low lighting conditions  
Included software  
•
Phone (including Palm OS®  
Favorites, Dial Pad)  
My Treo® software  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Contacts  
Memos  
•
•
Tasks  
Pics&Videos (includes  
camera and camcorder)  
Voice Memo  
Documents-To-Go®  
•
Messaging (text and  
multimedia)  
Calculator Basic and  
Advanced  
•
•
•
•
Web browser (Internet)  
Pocket Tunes™  
Wireless Sync  
Calendar  
•
•
World Clock  
Palm® Desktop software and  
®
HotSync manager  
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S  
262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System  
requirements  
•
Windows 2000, XP Service Pack 2, or Media Edition 2005  
with USB port  
•
•
Mac OS 10.2 –10.3 with USB port  
Later versions may also be supported  
32°F to 104°F (0°C to 40°C)  
Operating and  
storage  
temperature range  
•
•
5% to 90% relative humidity (RH)  
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S  
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S  
264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
calculator 180  
Call Log 48  
corporate mail servers and  
85, 87, 124, 222  
Index  
command buttons 33  
Compose dialog box 102,  
104  
corporate groupware  
information 196  
corporate servers 222  
Dial Pad 45, 53, 66  
email 81–101, 124, 222  
Favorites pages 47  
files 171, 222  
HotSync Manager 194  
information 216  
items on expansion cards  
200  
items on pick lists 35  
Palm online support 9  
Pocket Tunes 149  
Quick Tour 9  
forwarding calls and 57  
getting support for 9  
Internet providers and 83  
setting preferences for 97  
setting up email 82, 89  
voicemail and 50  
Accounts command 97  
Acrobat file formats 171  
activating  
items on screen 33  
smartphone device 20  
Active Call View screen 54,  
55  
active calls. See phone calls  
ActiveSync 197  
SYMBOLS  
! in Tasks list 167  
NUMERICS  
1xRTT (single carrier) radio  
transmission technology  
253  
24-hour clock 209  
3G2 files 140, 144  
3GP files 140  
5-way navigator 13, 31, 32,  
215  
911 calls 72, 76, 215  
911 Only option 72  
Add Bookmark command  
117  
Add Call button 53, 55  
A
AC charger 16  
accented characters 37, 38  
Access Powered devices 9,  
188, 236  
accessing  
Alert screen 179  
secure websites 115, 248 Add Contact command 54  
web browser 39, 115 Add Favorites dialog box 59  
web pages 115, 117, 246 Add New Number prompt 54  
World Clock 164  
accessories 13  
Add Song button 150  
Add to album command 143  
alternate character list 38  
alternate characters 37  
application menus 34  
applications 40, 54  
Account Setup command 91 adding  
accounts accessories 13  
See also email accounts  
conference calls and 56  
additional security 219  
attachments 93–94  
I NDE X  
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Bluetooth devices 63–64,  
129  
bookmarks 117  
videos to albums 143  
voice memos 174  
wallpaper 143  
Advanced Mode command  
180  
agenda lists 155  
business cards 155  
caller ID photos 70, 153  
captions to photos 136,  
143  
Address Bar pick list 117  
addresses  
adding multiple recipients alarm clock 164  
Agenda View 66, 156, 161  
Alarm check box 158  
to 60, 102  
Alarm Sound pick list 162,  
categories for applications  
211  
cities to World Clock 164  
contacts 153  
email addresses 92  
emoticons 102  
events 157, 158  
expansion cards 198  
favorite buttons 58–60  
hands-free devices 65  
memos 173  
assigning to favorite  
buttons 60  
highlighting email 33  
multimedia messages and  
104  
sending email and 92  
synchronizing 237  
text messages and 102,  
106  
viewing website 122  
web links and 115  
168  
alarm tones 162  
alarms  
See also alerts  
adding to calendar 158,  
162  
adding to tasks 166, 168  
recording sounds for 163  
setting for clock 164  
Album command 143  
Album list 139, 141, 143  
albums. See photo albums;  
video albums  
alert icon 76  
Alert screen 51, 106, 158,  
179  
multiple recipients 60, 102 adjusting screen brightness  
partnerships 63, 126, 128  
passwords 217, 218  
phone numbers 54  
pictures to albums 143  
playlists 150  
private entries 218  
QuickText phrases 102  
signatures 100  
208, 221  
adjusting volume  
alarm tones 162  
music 149  
phone calls 20, 69, 240  
ringer 69  
video clips 138  
voice memos 175  
Advanced Mode (calculator)  
180, 181  
Alert Sound pick list 99  
alert tones 68, 69, 99, 110  
alerts  
See also alarms  
clearing 180  
tasks 165  
TTY/TDD devices 73  
displaying 179  
I N D E X  
266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
including message text in  
109  
receiving messages and  
99  
categorizing 211  
caution for 201, 225  
changing screen fonts for  
208  
synchronization defaults  
for 27  
transferring 22, 24, 187,  
189, 201  
responding to 51, 106  
aligning the screen 209  
Alt key 37, 253  
alternate characters 37, 38  
alternate characters list 38  
anniversaries 159  
Answer button 49  
answering phone calls 49, 52  
antenna 257  
closing 39  
copying 201  
troubleshooting 225  
viewing information about  
185  
viewing menus for 34  
viewing tips for 9  
Applications button 13, 40,  
43  
Applications View  
defined 253  
displaying applications in  
211  
opening applications and  
39, 200  
overview 40  
appointments 157, 238  
See also events  
Archive folder 184  
area conversions 181  
arrow icons 31  
copying text to 121  
customizing 210–211  
deleting 23, 184, 185, 250  
disabling synchronization  
for 191  
downloading 119, 183  
finding text in 179  
getting help with 184  
installing 181–183, 225,  
255  
applets 115  
application buttons 39  
application categories 40  
application list view 211  
Application pick list 207  
application preferences 211,  
213  
applications  
See also specific built-in  
applications  
managing 171  
moving around in 29  
opening 13, 39, 40, 53,  
200  
playing music and 149  
recently used 40  
running on expansion  
cards 249  
accessing 40  
ASF files 140  
assigning to Quick Keys  
60  
associating with buttons  
60, 212  
sending over Bluetooth  
connections 187  
setting default 213  
switching 53  
Attach image option 104  
Attach ringtone option 105  
Attach Signature check box  
101  
beaming 189  
I NDE X  
267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Attach voice memo option  
105  
attachments  
adding 93–94  
displaying 95  
downloading 95  
Auto naming pick list 139  
Auto Sync dialog box 98  
auto sync failures 99  
Auto-complete check box  
122  
basics 9  
battery  
charging 16–18  
disposing 231  
installing 15  
maximizing life of 18, 44,  
221  
Auto-hide Toolbar option 141  
multimedia messages and Auto-Keyguard pick list 214  
104  
automated voicemail  
systems 50  
automatic shut-off 221, 253  
automating tasks 58  
Auto-off After pick list 221  
replacing 18, 230  
viewing status of 18  
battery door release 14  
battery icons 18, 77  
Beam Business Card  
command 155  
multiple files and 93  
pictures as 93, 135, 136  
removing 93  
storing large 249  
supported formats for 171 auto-off interval 253  
video clips as 93, 138  
voice memos as 175  
attendee information 159  
audio 207  
See also multimedia  
messages;music;voice  
memos  
Audio Caption command 136  
audio captions  
adding 136, 143  
background music and  
141  
playing 140  
Audio icon 140  
Auto answer pick list 65  
Auto Lock Device box 217  
AVI files 140  
Beam Category command  
189  
B
Beam command 189, 190  
Beam From pick list 190  
Beam Receive pick list 222  
Beam Status dialog box 189,  
190  
beaming  
battery life and 19  
defined 253  
overview 188–190  
troubleshooting 189, 190  
turning off 222  
bell 179, 232  
billing statements 58  
birthdays 159  
Background check box 161  
background music 141  
backgrounds 66, 161  
backing up information 23,  
27, 229  
backlight (keyboard) 36, 208,  
221  
backlight icon 208  
Backspace key 36  
Backup folder 185, 226  
backup folders 235, 250  
Basic Mode (calculator) 180  
Basic Mode command 180  
I N D E X  
268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
blank screens 231  
blank text messages 102  
blank time slots 161  
Blazer application  
See also web browser  
Blazer web browser 115,  
248  
See also web browser  
blinking bell 179, 232  
Bluetooth application  
opening 63  
receiving phone calls and  
64, 241  
sending applications over  
187  
sending information over  
186  
setting up 63–64  
synchronizing from 193,  
194, 234  
BroadbandAccess  
connections  
setting up 126  
troubleshooting 246  
viewing status of 76  
BroadbandAccess  
technology 253  
browsing files 200  
browsing the web. See web  
browsing  
troubleshooting 243  
visibility options for 130  
Bluetooth icon 63  
built-in applications 9, 181,  
184  
sending from 187  
setting trusted pairs in 127 Bluetooth icons (Phone) 76  
See also applications;  
specific application  
built-in camera. See camera  
built-in security software 213  
Business Card command  
155  
setting up connections  
with 128, 130, 193  
visibility options in 187  
Bluetooth devices  
connecting to 62, 128–  
131, 193  
BMP files 139  
bonus software. See built-in  
applications  
Bookmark Page icon 119  
bookmark pages 119  
bookmarks 117–119, 189  
business cards 155, 189  
buttons  
creating partnerships with Bookmarks View 118, 119  
126  
Bookmarks View icon 118  
border glow (highlight) 32  
brightness (screen) 19, 208,  
221, 231  
brightness duration  
(backlight) 208, 221  
See also favorite buttons  
accessing command 33  
changing defaults for 212  
customizing 212  
disabling 53, 215  
highlighted on screen 32  
opening applications with  
39  
disabling or enabling 19,  
64, 187  
enteringpasskeysfor 129,  
131  
incoming calls and 52  
receiving information from Brightness slider 221  
187  
BroadbandAccess Connect  
service 75, 124, 126  
I NDE X  
269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
restoring factory defaults  
for 212  
creating events 157, 158, camera buttons (Camera  
159  
View) 136  
speed-dialing with 47  
Buttons Preferences screen  
212  
displaying events 67  
opening 39, 67  
overview 155  
setting alarms from 158  
setting default view 161  
setting display options in  
161–162  
synchronizing information Caps Lock indicator 37  
in 27 Caps Lock mode 37  
Calendar button 13, 39, 156 captions. See audio captions  
Calendar views 156  
call lists. See Call Log screen  
Call Log button 48  
Call Log screen 48, 54  
call waiting 55  
Call Waiting dialog box 55  
caller IDs 69, 70, 135, 153  
calling plans 58  
calls. See phone calls  
camcorder 137, 138  
camcorder buttons 138  
Camcorder icon 136  
Camcorder View 137, 138,  
143  
Camera icon 135  
camera lens 14  
Camera View 135, 138, 143  
Cancel button 92  
Cancel button (Active Call) 52  
Cancel Spkr button 52  
cancelling menu selection 34  
C
cache 123, 250  
calculator 37, 180  
Calculator application 180–  
181  
Calculator icon 180  
calculator modes 180  
calendar  
See also Calendar  
application  
customizing 161–162  
deleting events from 160  
displaying 156  
saving 107  
schedulingeventsfor 157,  
158, 159  
selecting alarm tones for  
162  
Card Info application 202,  
203  
Card Info button 202  
card readers 148  
carrying cases 232, 242  
cascading style sheets 116,  
123  
categories  
adding ringtones for 70  
applications and 40, 211  
beaming and 189, 190  
color-coding in 160  
contacts and 154  
events and 160, 162  
memos and 173  
naming 211  
viewing tasks on 161  
Calendar application  
changing fonts for 208  
changing views for 156  
color-coding events 160  
camera 135, 138  
troubleshooting 248  
I N D E X  
270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
receiving from Bluetooth  
and 188  
screen fonts 208  
wallpaper 45  
See also World Clock  
closing  
sending over Bluetooth  
connections 186  
tasks and 166, 167, 168  
Category command 211  
category marker 162  
Category pick list 161, 162,  
211  
CDs 148  
Center button 13  
certificates 115  
web page layouts 116  
character entry 36, 37, 38,  
102  
character limits  
memos 173  
text messages 102  
character searches 179  
charge indicator 13, 17  
charger cable 17  
charging  
application menus 34  
applications 39  
pick lists 35  
color palette 138  
color preferences 110, 138,  
210  
Color Theme Preferences  
screen 210  
color-coded category marker  
162  
Change Lock Code option  
216  
smartphone 16, 17, 19  
smartphone battery 16–18 colored backgrounds 33  
color-coding events 160  
changing  
bookmarks 118  
charging status 18  
chat icon 108, 111  
command buttons 33  
commands. See menu items  
button defaults 212  
contact information 154  
default applications 212  
email accounts 97  
events 160  
favorite buttons 60  
frequency bands 74  
information 21  
Chat page (Preferences) 109 completed tasks 166, 167,  
Chat screen 108  
168  
chat sessions 108, 109  
Chat view 108  
Choose Songs button 149  
Choose Songs command  
150  
completion dates 168  
components (Treo  
smartphone) 8  
Compose dialog box 102,  
104  
city information 163, 164,  
221  
Compress Day View check  
box 161  
lock codes 216  
owner information 219  
passwords 218, 219  
playlists 150  
City pick list 164  
compressed files 182, 183  
computers  
BroadbandAccess  
Connect and 124  
Clear Cache button 123  
Clear Cookies button 123  
clock 163, 209  
QuickText phrases 102  
I NDE X  
271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
connecting smartphone to  
26  
downloading applications  
to 183  
installing applications from  
183  
installing synchronization  
software on 25  
to computers 26  
to virtual private networks  
222  
to websites 115, 123,  
124, 253, 254  
connections  
changing frequency bands  
for 74  
assigning caller IDs to 70,  
71  
creating 153  
deleting 155  
editing 154  
entering phone numbers  
for 54, 59  
looking up 59  
quarantined files on 22,  
25, 225  
messaging preferences  
for 110  
marking as private 154  
saving 107  
synchronizing with 21, 28  
transferring information to  
27  
transferring multimedia to  
144  
transferring music from  
147, 148  
Con button (calculator) 181  
conduits 157, 237  
Conf button 56  
conference calls 55, 56, 57  
Confirm message deletion  
check box 109  
conflicting applications 225  
conflicting events 161  
connecting  
headsets 61–62  
to Bluetooth devices 62,  
128–131  
receiving information over  
Bluetooth 187  
restrictions for 53  
sending information over  
Bluetooth 186  
setting up Bluetooth 193  
troubleshooting 240, 246  
TTY devices and 73  
unsupported 128  
viewing status of 75, 244,  
245  
scrolling through 32  
searching for 46, 66, 154  
synchronizing 153, 196,  
197  
viewing details about 47  
Contacts application  
adding events to 159  
changing fonts for 208  
opening 153  
synchronizing information  
in 27  
Contacts button 153  
Contacts list 33, 155  
contracts 7  
constants 181  
Contact Edit dialog box 153  
contact names 46  
contacts  
See also Contacts  
application  
conversion functions  
(calculator) 180, 181  
cookies 115, 122, 123  
Copy button 142, 201  
Copy command 121, 201  
adding photos to 143  
I N D E X  
272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copy Items dialog box 142  
Copy items to pick list 142  
Copy to command 142  
Copy To pick list 201  
copying  
creating  
albums 143  
audio captions 136, 143  
bookmarks 117  
business cards 155  
caller ID photos 70, 153  
current events 67  
Current Privacy pick list 218,  
219  
customer service (Verizon) 9,  
50  
applications 201  
customer support (Palm) 9  
multimedia files 144, 145  
music files 147  
categories for applications customizing  
211  
applications 210–211  
phone numbers 45  
photos 142  
text 121  
chat sessions 108, 109  
cities for World Clock 164  
contacts 153  
buttons 212  
calendar 161–162  
camera 138  
user folders 226  
videos 142  
email 115  
chat sessions 109  
email 97–101  
Keyguard 214  
messaging options 109  
smartphone 135, 156,  
205  
system date and time 220  
system sounds 207–208  
tasks 168  
email messages 92  
events 157, 158  
memos 173  
multimedia messages  
103, 104  
partnerships 63, 126, 128  
passwords 217, 218  
playlists 150  
private entries 218  
QuickText phrases 102  
signatures 100  
copyrighted materials 141  
corporate email accounts 85,  
87, 124, 222  
corporate groupware  
information 196  
corporate servers 27  
country-specificpreferences.  
See language settings  
coupling 240  
coverage area 19, 44, 69, 75,  
240  
web browser 121–123  
D
daily events 156  
Daily Repeating Events  
check box 162  
daily schedules 156  
data. See information  
data service icons 244, 245  
tasks 165  
Coverage in/out pick list 69  
crashes 232  
Create chats from messages  
pick list 109  
text messages 102–103  
voice memos 174  
wallpaper 143  
current date and time 163  
I NDE X  
273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
data services 81, 115, 244,  
245  
data transfer 75, 253, 255  
databases 179  
Date & Time Preferences  
screen 220  
date formats 209  
date preferences 220  
Date stamp pick list 138  
dates  
adding to photos 138  
changing event 160  
completed tasks and 167,  
168  
displaying 156, 163  
selecting 157  
setting due 166  
setting system 220  
sorting on 107  
decimal values 181, 209  
decompression utilities 183  
Default Alarm pick list 163  
Default Apps Preferences  
screen 213  
default settings 212  
Default View pick list 161  
degrees 181  
delays 217  
Delete command 97, 144,  
185  
delete confirmation  
messages 109  
Delete Contact command  
155  
cookies 123  
device names 24  
email 96, 249  
events 160  
files 249  
memos 173  
messages 107, 109  
music from playlists 150  
passwords 218  
photos 136, 143, 144  
playlists 150  
tasks 168  
video clips 138, 143, 144  
desktop software. See Palm  
Desktop software;  
software  
Details button 33  
Details command 143  
Delete events older than pick  
list 160  
Delete From pick list 185  
Delete Memo command 173 Device Name field 63  
synchronizing 220  
viewing due 167, 168  
datestamps 138  
Day display options 161  
Day View 156, 161  
daylight savings 164  
Daylight Savings Time check  
box 164  
Delete Old command 97  
Delete Task command 168  
deleting  
albums 143, 144  
alerts 180  
applications 23, 184, 185, devices. See Bluetooth  
250  
attachments 93  
bookmarks 118  
contacts 155  
device names 24, 63, 188,  
233, 254  
Bluetooth devices and 63  
devices  
entering passkeys and 64  
devices; hands-free  
devices; smartphone  
Dial another call prompt 55  
Dial button 48  
decimal display formats  
(calculator) 181  
I N D E X  
274  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dial Extra Digits  
system sounds 207  
the touchscreen 214, 215  
web page images 116,  
123  
current date and time 163  
due dates 167, 168  
email messages 94, 95  
error messages 251  
event categories 162  
events 67, 156, 161, 162  
items in pick lists 35  
multimedia messages 106  
on-device guide 9  
overdue tasks 156  
personal calendar 156  
photos 135, 138, 139,  
144  
Automatically option 60  
Dial Number dialog box 48  
Dial Pad 37, 45, 66  
Dial Pad button 53  
Dial Preferences screen 71  
dialing 45–48, 53, 71, 121  
dialog boxes  
accessing command  
buttons on 34  
defined 254  
discovery 188  
Discovery icon 127, 129  
discovery results list 129  
Discovery Results screen  
187  
discussion groups 9  
disk space (smartphone) 249  
Display my name in chat  
window as entry field 110  
Display Options command  
161  
getting help with 9  
highlighted buttons in 32  
digital cameras 139  
See also camera  
private entries 219  
Quick Tour 9  
dimming keyboard backlight  
208, 221  
Display Options dialog box  
161  
signal strength 75  
slide shows 141  
Disable cookies check box  
122  
Disable JavaScript check box  
122  
disabling  
Add New Number prompt  
54  
displaying  
alerts 179  
tasks 161, 167, 168  
unread messages 77,  
156, 161  
video clips 138, 140, 144  
video recording time 137  
voicemail messages 76  
web addresses 122  
web pages 115, 117  
DOC files 171  
alternate characters 38  
application information  
185  
application menus 34  
applications 211  
Bluetooth devices 19, 64  
cookies 122  
attachments 95  
bookmarks 118  
Keyguard 43, 214  
onscreen buttons 53, 215  
synchronization 191  
connectionstatus75, 244, documentation 8, 9, 31, 88  
245  
Documents application 171–  
172  
contacts information 47  
I NDE X  
275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Documents icon 172  
Documents To Go icon 172  
Documents To Go software  
171  
Domino servers 82, 83, 196  
downloading  
applications 119, 183  
attachments 95  
email 83  
email messages 98  
files 119, 182  
ringtones 67  
support information 9  
Wireless Sync software  
83  
Downloads bookmark 119  
downward-pointing arrows  
35  
E
creating 92, 115  
customizing 97–101  
defining favorite buttons  
for 60  
deleting 96, 249  
dialing from 47  
downloading 83, 98  
forwarding 95, 96  
leaving on server 85  
removing attachments for  
93  
replying to 95, 96  
requirements for 7  
resending 92  
earpiece 13, 52  
eBooks 23  
echoes 240  
EditBookmarkListdialogbox  
119  
Edit Bookmarks command  
118, 119  
Edit Favorites Button  
command 60  
Edit Favorites Pages  
command 59, 61  
Edit Playlist dialog box 150  
edit screens 34  
editing. See changing  
Effects pick list 138  
email  
retrieving 94  
scrolling 95  
scrolling through 32  
selecting default  
application for 213  
sending 92, 106, 115  
setting alerts for 99  
settingup accountsfor 82,  
89  
sort options for 96  
storing attachments 249  
synchronizing 82, 196,  
197  
accessing 81–101, 124,  
222  
adding multiple addresses  
to 60  
adding signatures 100  
attaching photos to 93,  
135, 136, 141  
attaching ringtones 93  
attaching videos to 93,  
138, 141  
drafts 92, 103  
Drafts button 92  
drained battery icon 18  
draining the battery 16, 17  
Draw on Photo command  
136  
drawing tools 136  
drivers 195  
Due Date pick list 166  
due dates 166, 168  
troubleshooting 244  
viewing attachments 95  
attaching voice memos to  
175  
I N D E X  
276  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
viewing status of 96  
viewing unread messages  
for 156, 161  
email accounts  
changing 97  
information 21, 219  
lock codes 215, 216  
numbers 37, 180  
passkeys 62, 63, 127, 129  
passwords 51, 217, 218  
phone numbers 45–48,  
66, 215  
displaying 67, 156, 161,  
162  
scheduling repeating 159  
setting alarms for 158,  
162  
setting email preferences  
and 97  
synchronizing 156, 196,  
197  
setting up 91, 101  
email applications 81, 213,  
247  
email options 92, 96  
emergency calls 72, 76, 215 entries. See information  
tasks 165  
text 36, 173  
URLs 122  
web addresses 117  
troubleshooting 238–239  
viewing categories of 162  
viewing duration of 161  
Evolution Data Optimized  
(EVDO) technology 254  
Excel spreadsheets 79, 94,  
171  
Exchange ActiveSync 101  
Exchange Address Book 237  
Exchange Servers 101  
Exchange Servers. See  
Microsoft Exchange  
Servers  
emoticons 102  
entry screens 32, 218  
envelope icon 97  
empty battery icon 18  
empty time slots 161  
emptying Trash folder 97  
Enable background play  
check box 149  
Enable Voice Privacy check  
box 72  
encryption 72, 115  
Eng(x) display format 181  
engineering notation 181  
entering  
erasing information 232  
error messages 251  
errors 235, 242, 251  
Escalate ring tone volume  
check box 67  
EVDO broadband technology  
254  
event conflicts 161  
Event Details dialog box 158,  
159, 160  
expansion card slot 14, 198  
expansion cards  
accessing items on 200  
adding 198  
alternate characters 37, 38 events  
beaming from 190  
caution for 23, 202  
copying applications to  
201, 202  
decimal values 181, 209  
device names 24, 63, 233  
email addresses 92  
changing 160  
color-coding 160  
creating 157, 158  
deleting 160  
events 157, 158, 159  
copying music to 147  
I NDE X  
277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
copying photos or videos  
to 142  
deleting applications on  
184  
displaying albums on 139  
downloading to 119  
formatting 202  
inserting 198, 199  
installing applications on  
184  
managing files on 200  
moving files to 23  
opening applications on  
200, 249  
opening files on 172  
renaming 202  
sending attachments to 95  
storing information on 23,  
177, 198  
transferring applications  
from 201  
Extra Digits option (Add  
Favorites) 60  
deleting 249  
downloading 119, 182  
movingtoexpansioncards  
23  
opening 172  
saving 172  
F
fade setting 161  
Fast Mode (web browser)  
116, 122  
favorite buttons  
adding 58–60  
defined 254  
dialing with 47  
editing 60  
streaming 120  
transferring 22, 249  
Files application 200  
financial calculator 180  
financial functions 181  
Find dialog box 179  
Find More button 179  
Find Text on Page command  
121  
organizing 61  
specifying number of 67  
transferringtosmartphone  
59  
Favorites pages 47, 60, 67  
features (Treo smartphone)  
13–15  
feedback 240  
fields 32, 35  
file types  
multimedia 103  
pictures 139  
videos 140  
files  
accessing 171, 222  
attaching to email 93, 94  
browsing 200  
finding  
chat sessions 108  
contacts 46, 66, 154  
specific characters 179  
text 121, 179  
web pages 117  
firewalls 222  
5-way navigator 13, 31, 32,  
215  
Fixed display format 181  
Flash mode 57  
flight mode 44  
Float display format 181  
folder pick list 96  
viewing information about  
202  
Extended Network message  
75  
extensions (phone) 53, 60  
Extra Digits button (Active  
Call View) 53  
I N D E X  
278  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
folders 107, 233, 237  
switching between email  
96  
Font command 116  
Font size pick list 208  
fonts 116, 208  
forgetting passwords 83,  
217, 219  
Format Card command 203  
Formats Preferences screen  
209  
G
hard resets 217, 228  
hardware 8  
headphones 61, 145  
headset button 49, 62  
headset jack 14  
headsets  
See also hands-free  
devices  
Bluetooth devices and 63,  
128  
connecting to smartphone  
61–62  
entering passkeys for 131  
receiving calls and 49, 52  
hearing-impaired services 73  
help 9, 223, 251  
Game Volume pick list 207  
getting started 8, 9, 19  
GIF files 139  
Glossary 253  
GPS receivers 131  
gradients 181  
graphics. See images  
grouping photos or videos  
140  
groupware 101  
formatting  
H
expansion cards 202  
formatting expansion cards  
202  
HAC setting 73  
hands-free devices  
adding 65  
forums 9  
forwarding  
email 95, 96  
connecting to 62  
entering passkeys for 64  
passkeys and 63  
receiving phone calls and  
64, 65  
troubleshooting 243–244  
Hands-free Preferences  
screen 65  
Hands-free Setup button 63  
Hang Up All button 52  
hanging up phone 49, 52, 55,  
56  
hexadecimal characters 181  
Hide Records option 218  
hiding  
blank time slots 161  
information in entry  
screens 218  
Pics&Videos toolbar 141  
private entries 218  
web browser toolbar 120  
High Priority command 103,  
105  
forwarding phone calls 57  
freeing disk space  
(smartphone) 249  
freeing memory 123, 184,  
249  
freezes 225, 228  
frequency bands 74  
From pick list 201  
full charge (battery) 16  
high speed data transfer 253  
highlighted buttons 32  
I NDE X  
279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
highlighting  
applications 40  
Ignore button 50  
Ignore with Text button 50  
image file types 103, 119,  
139  
images  
disabling web page 116,  
123  
downloading 119  
saving 107, 120  
selecting as wallpaper 66  
sending 103, 104  
transferring 23, 249  
troubleshooting 248  
uploading 104  
IMAP servers 84  
importing phone numbers  
166  
Info screens 185  
information  
accessing 216  
backing up 23, 27, 229  
beaming 189  
changing 21  
entering 21, 36–37, 219  
erasing all 232  
hard resets and 217  
losing 202, 217, 229  
marking as private 218–  
219  
masking 214, 218  
protecting 213, 216  
receiving over Bluetooth  
connections 187  
favorite buttons 47  
items in pick lists 35  
items on screen 32  
menu items 34  
phone numbers 48  
text 33, 121  
web links 33, 116  
hints 217  
History command 121  
History list 121  
Hold button 52, 55  
holidays 159  
home city 163  
home page 122  
home page icon 117, 122  
HotSync Log 235  
sending over Bluetooth  
connections 186  
Inbox 33, 94, 111  
HotSync Manager 194, 195, Inbox icons 96  
storing 23, 177, 198, 249  
synchronizing 21, 25, 27,  
191–198, 236  
transferring 22, 28, 188  
updating 21, 27, 177  
254  
Incoming dialog box 99  
HotSync Manager icon 194,  
234  
HotSync Setup button 194  
HotSync technology 254  
hypertext links. See web  
links  
incoming messages 111  
incoming phone calls 49, 55,  
65, 215  
incompatible applications 23, infrared port  
225  
Incompatible Apps directory  
22  
indicator light 13, 17  
Info command 23, 185  
beaming from 189, 190  
defined 254  
location of 14  
synchronizing with 195,  
234  
I
icons 117, 211  
I N D E X  
280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
infrared transmission 254  
inserting expansion cards  
198, 199  
installer 182  
installing  
applications 181–183,  
225, 255  
bonus software 28, 182  
Palm Desktop software  
22, 183, 227  
smartphone battery 15  
synchronization software  
21, 25  
third-party applications  
249  
Internet connections 116,  
123, 124, 253, 254  
troubleshooting 246  
Internet email accounts 83  
interruptions 251  
Into album pick list 142  
invalid characters 102  
IR port  
beaming from 189, 190  
defined 254  
location of 14  
synchronizing with 195,  
234  
items in pick lists 35  
items on screen  
activating 33  
dialing with 45  
entering information from  
36–37  
illustrated 36  
incremental searches  
from 46  
locking 214  
restoring factory defaults  
212  
keyboard backlight 36, 208,  
221  
Keyguard 214  
Keyguard Preferences  
screen 214, 215  
Known Caller pick list 67  
VPN clients 222  
VZAccess Manager  
software 124  
L
highlighting 32  
selecting 33  
iTunes 145, 146, 148  
Label color pick list 110  
language selection screen  
16, 25  
language settings 209, 227,  
229  
laptops 194, 195  
large attachments 249  
length functions 181  
liability ii  
lightning bolt icons 18, 77  
Li-ion battery 254  
See also battery  
interference 241, 243  
international characters. See  
alternate characters  
international clock. See  
World Clock  
international settings. See  
language settings  
Internet 44, 113, 182  
See also web browsing;  
websites  
J
Java applets 115  
JavaScript elements 122  
JPG files 139  
K
keyboard  
accessing alternate  
characters on 37  
I NDE X  
281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
links 106  
See also web links  
list screens  
See also pick lists  
accessing command  
buttons on 33  
highlighting items in 33  
selecting items on 32  
list view (applications) 211  
listening to  
locations, disabling/enabling  
transmission of 72, 73  
Lock & Turn Off option 218  
lock codes 215, 216  
Lock Device dialog box 217  
lock icon 116, 141, 187, 189  
locking  
keyboard 214  
phone 215–216  
touch-sensitive features  
215  
Treo smartphone 216,  
217  
M
M4V files 140  
Mac systems  
installing applications from  
183  
installing synchronization  
software on 25  
installing to expansion  
cards and 184  
listening to music and 145  
removing applications and  
185  
requirements for 22  
synchronization defaults  
for 27  
synchronizing with 192,  
196, 234, 235, 251  
transferring music from  
145, 146, 148  
music 145, 149  
voice captions 140  
voice memos 174  
Lithium Ion battery  
See also battery  
Lithium ion battery 254  
loading web pages 106, 122, looking up contacts 59  
logging in to corporate  
servers 222  
logic functions 181  
247  
Lookup button 59  
loops 228  
losing  
information 202, 217, 229  
passwords 83, 217, 219  
Lost Password option 219  
Lotus Domino servers 196  
Lotus Notes 197  
Local button 194  
local weather reports 84  
locating  
chat sessions 108  
contacts 46, 66, 154  
specific characters 179  
text 121, 179  
web pages 117  
Location icon 72, 76  
Location On option 72  
uninstalling desktop  
software and 235  
upgrading and 24  
user folders on 226  
magnet 14  
mail. See email  
low coverage areas 240  
lowercase letters 36  
mail servers 83, 84  
Mail Service pick list 91  
Manage Playlists command  
150  
I N D E X  
282  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
map (World Clock) 164  
maps (web pages) 248  
marking information as  
private 218–219  
removing memos with  
173  
synchronizing information  
in 27  
dialing from 47  
displaying status of 111  
displaying unread 77, 156,  
161  
marking private contacts 154 Memos button 173  
including in alerts 109  
invalid characters in 102  
memory consumption and  
250  
Mask Records option 218  
masks 214, 218  
Memos list 33  
Menu button 13  
mathematical constants 181 menu items 34  
mathematical functions 181  
maximizing battery life 18,  
44, 221  
media features 19  
Media Player 145, 147, 148  
memory 123, 160, 249  
freeing 184, 249  
memory slots (calculator)  
181  
Menu key 34, 36  
menu shortcuts 34  
menus 34  
Message command 49  
message lists 108  
Message Tone pick list 111  
messages  
See also multimedia  
messages; text  
messages  
paging from 102  
previewing 105  
receiving 105, 110  
retrieving 51, 76  
saving 103  
scrolling through 32  
selecting phone numbers  
in 48  
sending 49, 101, 112  
setting colors for 110  
setting preferences for  
109–111  
memos  
See also notes  
creating 173  
adding graphical elements  
to 103  
deleting 173  
recording 173  
adding multiple recipients  
for 60  
specifying priority settings  
for 103, 105  
scrolling through 32  
sending voice 105  
Memos application  
changing fonts for 208  
entering text in 173  
opening 39, 173  
overview 169  
arranging in folders 107  
chat sessions and 108  
checking status of 76, 77  
creating 102, 103, 104  
defining favorite buttons  
for 60  
troubleshooting 244, 245  
Messages page  
(Preferences) 109  
messaging 79  
See also text messages  
Messaging application  
See also text messages  
deleting 107, 109  
I NDE X  
283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
changing fonts for 208  
creating chat sessions  
from 108  
creating multimedia  
messages with 104  
creating text messages  
with 102  
Microsoft Exchange  
ActiveSync 101, 197  
Microsoft Exchange Servers  
82, 83, 101, 153, 156,  
196  
Microsoft Office Manager  
See Documents  
application  
Move to command 142  
moving  
bookmarks 119  
favorite buttons 61  
moving around on screen 29,  
31  
moving through web pages  
116, 122  
customizing 109  
deleting messages in 107 Microsoft Outlook. See  
MP3 files 147  
opening 39  
overview 101  
Outlook  
MP3 formats 145  
MP4 files 140  
MPEG-4 formats 144  
MPG files 140  
multi-connector pin 14  
multimedia file types 140  
multimedia files 103, 139  
multimedia messages  
See also Messaging  
application  
addressing 104  
attaching photos to 135,  
136, 141  
attaching videos to 138,  
141  
attaching voice memos to  
175  
Microsoft Windows. See  
Windows systems  
Microsoft Word documents  
79, 94, 171  
mini-SD expansion card slot  
14  
sorting messages in 107  
status indicators for 111  
viewing multimedia  
messages in 106  
messaging applications 213  
Messaging Inbox 33  
messaging preferences 109– minutes usage information  
111  
messaging services 7, 101,  
244  
messaging, troubleshooting  
244–245  
metric values 181  
microphone 14, 53, 138  
Microphone pick list 138  
Microsoft Excel 79, 94  
Microsoft Excel  
mini-SDcards 261  
(phone) 58  
mirror 14  
MMS messaging services  
101, 245, 255  
See also multimedia  
messages  
MMS Receipts pick list 109  
mobile networks 240  
modems 124, 253, 254  
Month display options 162  
Month View 156, 162  
checking status of 77  
creating 103, 104  
deleting 107  
spreadsheets 171  
I N D E X  
284  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
dialing from 47  
displaying details of 107  
memory consumption and  
250  
playing 106  
previewing 105  
retrieving 77, 105  
selecting alert tones for  
110  
selecting text in 107  
sending 101, 105  
setting delivery  
memory consumption and  
249  
pausing 149  
playing 120, 149  
selecting 149  
stopping 149  
troubleshooting 246  
NationalAccess technology  
75, 255  
navigator buttons 13, 31, 32  
See also 5-way navigator  
Network page (Preferences)  
110  
network preferences 110  
networks 240, 246  
New Bookmark dialog box  
117  
uploading 147  
music file types 119  
music files 145, 147, 249  
music subscription services  
145  
mute button 53  
New button 33  
confirmation for 109  
troubleshooting 245  
viewing 106  
multimedia messaging  
services 7, 101, 245  
Multimedia Messaging  
System (MMS) 255  
multiple recipients 60, 102  
music  
adjusting volume 149  
answering phone calls and  
49  
changing playlists for 150  
creating playlists for 150  
downloading 119  
listening to 145, 149  
New Message dialog box 92,  
93  
N
names  
New message pick list 109  
Next Song button 149  
No Service message 19, 75  
Normal Mode (web browser)  
116, 122  
Note button 154  
notes  
See also memos  
adding to contact  
information 154  
sorting on 107  
synchronizing and 233  
naming  
categories 211  
device 24, 63, 233  
messages for chat  
sessions 110  
photo albums 135  
photo groups 139  
playlists 150  
adding to events 160  
adding to tasks 166  
scrolling through 32  
storing 173  
video albums 137  
voice memos 174, 175  
NationalAccess connections  
126, 247  
notifications 51, 99  
I NDE X  
285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See also alerts  
number formats 209  
numbers  
calculator display options  
for 181  
web pages 106, 122, 247  
World Clock 164  
operating system  
synchronizing with 26, 27,  
191, 237  
time zones and 157  
Wireless Sync application  
and 196  
Outlook folders 237  
overdue tasks 156, 161, 167  
owner information 219  
Owner Preferences screen  
219, 220  
(smartphone) 22  
operating systems (PCs) 22  
Optimized Mode (web  
browser) 115, 116  
Option button 39  
Option key 13, 36, 37, 39,  
255  
Option key indicator 37  
Option Lock indicator 37  
Option Lock mode 37, 102  
options in pick lists 35  
organizer features 7, 19, 27,  
255  
entering from keyboard  
37, 180  
O
offline synchronization 237  
offline viewing (web) 118  
OK button 33  
online forums 9  
online support 9  
opening  
Alert screen 179  
application menus 34  
applications 13, 39, 40,  
53, 200  
Bookmarks View 118  
Call Log 48  
Dial Pad 45, 53, 66  
email applications 247  
files 172  
P
page icon 111  
Page View 118, 121, 122  
paging 102  
paired relationship. See  
partnerships  
Palm Desktop software  
defined 255  
device names in 254  
entering information with  
21  
forgetting passwords and  
219  
installing 22, 183, 227  
Microsoft Exchange  
ActiveSync and 198  
multipleappointmentsand  
157  
Outbox 111  
Outbox button 92  
outgoing messages 112  
outgoing phone calls 55  
Outlook  
duplicate entries in 237  
entering information with  
21  
Microsoft Exchange  
ActiveSync and 197  
multipleappointmentsand  
157  
History list 121  
HotSync Manager 194  
Pocket Tunes 149  
Quick Tour 9  
web browser 39, 115  
multiple contacts and 153  
I N D E X  
286  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
multiple contacts and 153  
reinstalling 237  
email and 84, 91  
entering 51  
connecting smartphone to  
26  
synchronizing with 27,  
234  
time zones and 157  
troubleshooting 227, 234  
upgrades and 24  
forgetting 83, 217, 219  
owner information and  
219  
private entries and 214,  
218  
smartphone and 217  
Paste command 45, 121  
pasting  
phone numbers 45  
text 121  
Pause button 149  
pausing  
music 149  
streamed content 120  
video playback 138, 140  
video recording 138  
voice memos 174, 175  
PCs. See personal  
computers  
downloading applications  
to 183  
installing applications from  
183  
installing synchronization  
software on 25  
quarantined files on 22,  
25, 225  
synchronizing with 21, 28  
transferring information to  
27  
transferring multimedia to  
144  
transferring music from  
147, 148  
personal information 151,  
213, 216, 219  
See also information  
personal information  
managers 227, 255  
personal schedules 155  
personalizing smartphone  
135, 156, 205  
See also preferences  
phone  
See also phone calls  
answering 49, 52  
Wireless Sync application  
and 197  
PALM folder 135, 137  
Palm online support 9  
Palm OS software 22  
Palm OS-compatible  
applications 182  
Palm Software Installation  
CD 8, 25  
paper clip icon 93, 95  
paragraphs, selecting 33  
partial battery icon 18  
partnerships 63, 126, 128,  
255  
passkeys 62, 63, 127, 129  
Password box 217, 219  
password hints 217  
passwords  
PDB (Palm OS) databases  
182  
PDF files 94, 171  
pending alerts 106  
pending messages 108, 112  
personal computers  
BroadbandAccess  
Connect and 124  
caution for 218  
changing 218, 219  
deleting 218  
dialing 53, 60  
I NDE X  
287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
changing frequency bands  
74  
conference calls and 56,  
57  
dialing 45–48, 53, 121  
dialing preferences for 71  
getting started with 19  
hands-free devices and  
61, 64, 65  
hanging up 49, 52, 55, 56  
locking 215–216  
maximizing batterylife and  
44  
customizing 66  
dialing from 48  
displaying events in 156  
enabling privacy settings  
from 72  
finding contacts from 46  
opening 39, 45  
overview 41  
selecting wallpaper for 66,  
143  
selecting wireless bands  
from 74  
setting alert tones 68  
setting ringtones 67  
setting TTY/TDD  
connections 73  
encrypting 72  
ending 49, 52, 55, 56  
forwarding 57  
keyboard backlight and 36  
making 45, 53, 55, 57  
placing on hold 52, 55  
receiving 49, 55  
restrictions for 53  
running applications and  
53  
sending to voicemail 50  
switching between active  
56, 57  
text messages and 106  
transmitting location  
during 72  
privacy settings for 72  
selecting alert tones for  
68, 69  
selecting ringtones for 67,  
68  
service carrier for 7  
status icons for 74–77  
turning HAC on/off 74  
Phone button 13, 39  
viewing details about 58  
viewing status of 55  
phoneindicator. Seeindicator  
light  
silencing ringer for 50, 207 Phone Call screen 49  
troubleshooting 240–242  
turning on and off 43, 44  
viewing Call Log for 48  
viewing minutes usage for  
58  
Phone application  
accessing Dial Pad in 45,  
53, 66  
phone calls  
See also phone; phone  
numbers  
adding a second 55  
adjusting volume for 20,  
69, 240  
automatically answering  
65  
Phone Info command 21  
Phone Info screen 21  
Phone Lock 215, 216  
Phone Lock command 215  
phone numbers  
adding 54  
assigning prefix to 71  
copying 45  
adding caller IDs 70  
disabling screen for 215  
I N D E X  
288  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
dialing extra digits with 53,  
60  
entering 45–48, 66, 215  
getting device 21  
highlighting 33  
attaching to multimedia  
messages 104  
backing up 144  
copying 142  
deleting 136, 144  
displaying information  
about 143  
copying pictures and  
videos in 142  
creating wallpaper with  
143  
hiding toolbar in 141  
opening 139  
organizing media with 143  
removing photos or videos  
from 144  
importing 166  
pasting into Dial Pad 45  
redialing most recent 48  
saving 54  
downloading 119  
grouping 140  
selecting 48  
personalizing 136  
positioning on screen 140  
removing from albums  
143, 144  
rotating 143  
saving 136  
scrolling through 32  
selecting as backgrounds  
161  
rotating photos in 143  
sending pictures or videos  
from 141  
synchronizing information  
in 27  
viewing pictures in 139  
viewing slide shows in  
141  
phone off icon 75  
Phone Off message 19, 44,  
75  
phone on icon 75  
Phone Preferences  
command 72  
Phone Preferences screen  
72, 73, 74  
viewing videos in 140  
phone-off icon 44  
photo albums 135, 139, 142,  
143  
Photo Settings screen 138  
photos  
See also pictures  
adding as wallpaper 143  
adding caller ID 70, 153  
adding captions to 136  
adding to albums 143  
adding to contacts 143  
sending 93, 135, 136, 141 Pics&Videos icon 139  
setting default size 138  
setting preferences for  
138  
picture formats 139  
Picture list 141  
pictures 71, 107, 135, 248  
See also images; photos  
PIM applications 7, 255  
PIMs 227  
Pix Place 104, 256  
plain text formats 96  
Play button (Pocket Tunes)  
149  
storing 133  
taking 135, 248  
viewing 135, 138, 139,  
144  
pick lists 32, 35  
Pics&Videos application  
I NDE X  
289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Play icon (web browser) 120 PowerPoint files 94, 171  
prefixes (phone numbers) 71  
Prefs icon 219  
preinstalled applications 9,  
181, 184  
playback  
pausing 120, 138, 140,  
PPT files 171  
PRC (Palm OS) applications  
182  
149  
resuming 120, 149  
stopping 107, 149, 175  
playing  
precautions 258  
predefined passkeys 63,  
129, 131  
See also applications;  
specific application  
presentations 171  
multimedia messages 106 preferences  
preset delays 217  
music 120, 149  
streamed content 120  
video clips 138, 140  
voice captions 140  
voice memos 174  
playlists 150  
Playlists command 150  
plug-ins 115  
Pocket Tunes application  
changing playlists in 150  
creating playlists in 150  
opening 147  
overview 145, 147  
playing music from 149  
upgrading 145  
POP protocols 100  
POP servers 84  
alarm tones 162  
alert tones 68  
applications 211, 213  
buttons 212  
calculator 181  
preset passkeys 63, 129,  
131  
pressing keyboard keys 36  
pressing onscreen buttons  
215  
previewing messages 105  
Previous Song button 149  
primary applications 39  
primary button assignments  
212  
prioritizing tasks 165, 168  
priority levels 165, 168  
priority settings 103, 105  
privacy flag 166  
camcorder 138  
camera 138  
country-specific 209  
dialing 71  
email 97, 99–101  
hands-free devices 65  
Keyguard 214  
messaging 109–111  
owner information 219  
power settings 221  
ringtones 67, 68  
system colors 210  
Privacy Mode check box 109  
privacy settings 72  
private entries 214, 218–219  
ports 26  
system date and time 220 programs. See applications  
Power Preferences screen  
19, 221  
system sounds 207  
tasks 168  
progress indicator bar (video  
recording) 138  
Power/End button 13, 43, 44  
web pages 121–123  
Prompt sounds pick list 138  
I N D E X  
290  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
protecting personal  
information 213, 216  
protecting the screen 13,  
232  
protecting Treo smartphone  
213–220  
Protocol pick list 91  
proxy servers 123  
pTunes icon 147  
punctuation marks 37, 38  
Purge command 107, 160  
Purge pick list 108  
purging old information 24  
range (Bluetooth devices)  
186  
redialingmostrecentnumber  
48  
Rcl button (calculator) 181  
readjusting the screen 209  
receipts (messaging) 109  
receiving phone calls 49, 55  
recently viewed web page  
icon 117  
rechargeable battery 8  
See also battery  
rechargeable battery. See  
battery  
Record command 189  
Record Completion Date  
check box 168  
Record new option 105  
recorder 173  
recording  
ringtones 68  
sounds 163  
videos 104, 136  
voice memos 173, 174  
Records button 186  
recovering lost passwords  
219  
recurring events. See  
repeating events  
redirector (websites) 247  
reducing storage space 23  
Refresh command 246  
Refresh icon (web pages)  
116  
refreshing web pages 116,  
246  
Regulatory Information 257  
reinstalling Palm Desktop  
software 237  
reinstalling third-party  
applications 225, 226, 229  
Reminder Sound pick list 163  
reminders 158, 165  
Remove from album  
command 143  
removing  
albums 143, 144  
alerts 180  
applications 23, 184, 185,  
250  
attachments 93  
bookmarks 118  
contacts 155  
cookies 123  
device names 24  
email 96, 249  
Q
quarantined files 22, 25, 225  
quick buttons 39, 212  
Quick Install 255  
Quick Keys 60  
Quick Tour documentation 9  
QuickText button 102  
QuickText phrases 102  
R
radians 181  
radio frequency emissions  
257  
random number generator  
181  
red paper clip icon 93  
I NDE X  
291  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
events 160  
expansion cards 199  
files 249  
caution for 217  
resizing text 116  
Resolution pick list 138  
resolution settings (camera)  
136  
restoring factory defaults 212 Rotate command 143  
restricting location  
information 72  
resuming playback 120, 149  
Return key 36  
Review photos/videos pick  
list 138  
RF emissions 257  
ringer  
setting for phone 68  
setting phone 67  
roaming icon 75  
Roaming message 75  
Roaming pick list 68  
memos 173  
messages 107, 109  
music from playlists 150  
passwords 218  
photos 136, 143, 144  
playlists 150  
rotating photos 143  
S
Save As command 172  
Save as Contact command  
143  
Save as Wallpaper command  
143  
tasks 168  
video clips 138, 143, 144  
Rename Card command 202  
Rename Memo command  
175  
Save List button 150  
Save Page command 118  
Save Picture command 107  
Save Sound command 107  
saved web page indicator  
118  
saving  
calendars 107  
contact information 107  
files 172  
images 107, 120  
messages 103  
renaming expansion cards  
202  
repeat intervals (events) 159  
Repeat pick list 159, 163,  
166  
repeating alarms 163  
repeating event icon 159  
repeating events 159, 162  
repeating tasks 166  
replacingsmartphonebattery  
18, 230  
rescheduling events 160  
Reset Counters button 58  
resets 225, 228–229, 242,  
251  
adjusting volume 69  
silencing 50  
turning off 207  
Ringer switch 15, 44, 50,  
207  
ringtone file types 103, 119  
Ringtone pick list 70  
ringtone preferences 67, 68  
ringtones  
assigning to caller IDs 69,  
154  
downloading 67, 119  
recording 68  
sending with messages  
93, 103, 105  
phone numbers 54  
photos 136  
playlists 150  
I N D E X  
292  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
video clips 138  
voice memos 174  
web pages 118  
schedules 156  
screen fonts 208  
screen protectors 232  
scroll arrows 95  
scroll bars 32  
selecting  
alarm tones 162  
applications 40, 200, 201  
chat sessions 108  
dates 157  
scheduling events 157, 158, scrolling 32, 116  
159  
scrolling preferences 122  
SD cards 261  
SD_Audio folder 148  
search results 179  
searching for  
favorite buttons 47  
home city 163  
items in pick lists 35  
items on screen 33  
menu items 34  
Sci(x) display format 181  
scientific calculator 180  
scientific notation 181  
screen  
accessing command  
buttons on 33  
activating items on 33  
adjusting brightness 208,  
221  
aligning 209  
automatically turning off  
43, 221  
battery life and 19  
disabling 53, 214, 215  
locking 215  
moving around on 29, 31  
protecting 13, 232  
scrolling through 32  
selecting items on 33, 35  
troubleshooting 231–232  
turning on or off 43, 221,  
242  
contacts 46, 66, 154  
specific characters 179  
text 121, 179  
secondary applications 39  
secure connections 128  
secure web pages 116  
secure websites 115, 248  
security 64, 219  
music 149  
phone numbers 48  
photo albums 139, 141  
playlists 150  
songs 149  
text 33, 107, 122  
time zones 157  
video albums 140, 141  
wallpaper 66, 143  
web links 116  
self-portrait mirror 14  
Send button 13, 48, 92  
Send command 187  
Send From pick list 187  
Send To Device droplet 147  
sending  
See also passwords;  
privacy settings  
Security button 217, 218  
security certificates 115  
Security dialog box 217  
security software 213  
Select Band command 74  
Select Band dialog box 74  
Select Font dialog box 208  
Select Media screen 93  
applications over  
Bluetooth 187  
waking up 43  
calls to voicemail 50  
I NDE X  
293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
email 92, 106, 115  
informationoverBluetooth  
186  
messages 49, 101, 112  
photos 93, 135, 136, 141 Show Category Column  
Show Calendar event check  
box 67, 156  
Show Categories check box  
168  
signal strength 69, 75, 240,  
241  
signal strength indicator 44  
signal-strength icon 44  
signatures 100  
to chat rooms 108  
video clips 135, 138, 141  
voice memos 175  
Sent folder 111  
servers 27, 83, 84, 222  
service contracts 7  
service providers 75, 81, 89  
See also Verizon Wireless Show Due Tasks check box  
setting 161  
check box 162  
Show Category List check  
box 161, 162  
Show Completed Items  
check box 168  
silencing system sounds 50,  
207  
silencing the ringer 50  
silent alarm 67, 69, 162  
silent alerts 110  
single carrier (1xRTT) radio  
transmission technology  
253  
Show Due Dates check box  
166, 168  
SIT files 182, 183  
alarm clocks 164  
Show Favorite buttons check Size button 23, 186  
passwords 51, 217, 218  
setting up smartphone 8, 16 Show Messages check box  
settings (incompatible) 225  
Setup Devices button 127,  
129, 194  
box 67  
slide show options 141  
slide shows 141  
slider 32  
slides 103, 256  
Slideshow Setting command  
141  
161  
Show Priorities check box  
168  
Setup Devices dialog box 63, Show Time Bars check box  
194  
161  
smartphone  
Shift/Find indicator 36  
Shift/Find key 36, 179  
Short Messaging Service  
(SMS) 256  
shortcuts 34, 40  
Show Address Bar check box  
122  
Show timestamps in chats  
check box 110  
Show Wallpaper option 66  
Shutter sounds pick list 138  
Side button 13, 149, 174,  
212  
activating 20  
adding additional security  
for 219  
as wireless modem 124,  
253, 254  
battery life for 18  
charging 16, 17, 19  
Signal faded pick list 69  
I N D E X  
294  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
components of 8  
connecting Bluetooth  
devices to 128, 130  
connecting to PCs 26  
customizing 135, 156,  
205  
synchronization defaults  
for 27  
synchronizing 22, 24  
third-partyapplicationsand  
250  
transferring data to 23, 27  
troubleshooting 9, 223,  
241  
turning on and off 16  
unauthorized users and  
213  
managing 171  
reinstalling 237  
synchronization defaults  
for 27  
synchronizing information  
and 25, 26  
troubleshooting 227  
uninstalling 235  
updating 225  
software conflicts 235  
songlists. See playlists  
songs. See music  
Sort by check box 168  
Sort by Date command 107  
Sort by Name command 107  
documentation  
conventions for 43  
entering passkeys for 64  
features illustrated 13–15  
freeing memory for 184,  
249  
freeing space for 249  
getting help with 9, 223  
getting phone number for  
21  
unsupported connections  
for 128  
updating information on  
21, 27  
viewing signal strength for Sort command 107  
headsets compatible with  
61  
locking 216, 217  
naming 24, 63, 233  
navigating around on 29  
overview 7  
protecting 213–220  
required items for 8  
resetting 217, 228–229  
setting up 16  
specifications for 261  
storing 13, 14  
75  
sorting  
messages 96  
SMS messaging services  
244, 256  
See also text messages  
soft resets 190, 228  
software  
See also Palm Desktop  
software  
accessing from web  
browser 119  
sorting messages 107  
sorting tasks 168  
Sound & Alerts Preferences  
screen 162, 207  
sound clips 103, 105  
Sound icon 106  
Sound Off 15  
Sound Off position (ringer)  
50, 207  
included with smartphone  
8
installing 28, 182  
Sound On position (ringer)  
207  
I NDE X  
295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
sound preferences 162  
sounds 103, 163, 207  
Sounds button 207  
Space key 36  
storing  
information 23, 177, 198,  
249  
music files 148  
notes 173  
photos 133, 135  
smartphone 13, 14  
videos 133, 137  
streaming files 120  
style sheets 116, 123  
removing applications and  
185  
selecting applications for  
191–193  
setting default application  
for 212  
troubleshooting 232–239  
upgrading and 24  
synchronization applications  
(third-party) 229, 233, 236  
synchronization software 21,  
25, 227  
synchronizing  
Calendar events 156, 196,  
197  
contacts 153, 196, 197  
dates and time 220  
email 82, 196, 197  
information 21, 25, 27,  
191–198, 236  
photos and videos 144  
time zones 220  
with Bluetooth devices  
193, 194  
speaker 14  
speakerphone 52, 53  
troubleshooting 240  
special characters 37, 38,  
102  
specifications 261  
speech-impaired services 73 stylus 14, 31, 32, 35  
speed-dialing buttons 47  
Spkr-phone button 52  
spreadsheets 79, 94, 171  
Start With pick list 118  
static 241, 243  
statistical functions 181  
statistical information 185  
status icons (email) 96  
status icons (phone) 74–77  
stereo headphones 61, 145  
Sto button (calculator) 181  
stopping  
submitting web forms 116  
support (Palm) 9  
support (Verizon) 9  
symbols 37, 38, 102  
Syncautomaticallycheckbox  
98  
sync button 26, 28, 147  
sync cable 17, 21, 26  
sync. See synchronization;  
synchronizing  
synchronization  
ActiveSync and 101  
Bluetooth devices and 128  
device names and 24  
overview 177  
multimedia playback 107  
music playback 149  
video recording 137  
with Microsoft Exchange  
ActiveSync 197  
voice memo playback 175  
storage solutions 177  
storage space 23  
preparing for 21  
recommendations for 27  
with Microsoft Outlook  
191  
I N D E X  
296  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
with Wireless Sync 196,  
233  
displaying 156, 161, 167,  
168  
temperature conversions  
181  
system colors 210  
system dates and time 163,  
220  
system errors 235, 242, 251  
system requirements (PCs)  
22  
system resets 225, 228,  
242, 251  
system sounds 50, 207–208 Tasks application  
marking as private 166  
prioritizing 165, 168  
setting alarms for 166,  
168  
setting preferences for  
168  
temporary passwords 83  
text  
copying 121  
entering 36, 173  
finding 121, 179  
highlighting 33, 121  
resizing 116  
selecting 33, 107, 122  
viewing against photos  
161  
viewing due dates for 167,  
168  
System Volume pick list 207  
changing fonts for 208  
opening 165  
synchronizing information text message icon 111  
text fields 32, 35  
T
Take new picture option 104  
Take new video option 104  
taking pictures 135, 248  
Tap and Drag check box 122  
tapping 31, 32, 33, 35, 232  
Task Details dialog box 165  
tasks  
See also events; Tasks  
application  
adding 165  
in 27  
text messages  
See also messages  
addressing 102  
checking status of 76, 77  
containing links 106  
creating 102–103  
deleting 107  
Tasks button 165  
Tasks list 33, 156, 166, 167,  
168  
Tasks Preferences screen  
168  
TDD devices 73  
technical support (Palm) 9  
technical support (Verizon) 9,  
50  
telecommunications devices  
73  
dialing from 47  
retrieving 77, 105  
selecting alert tones for  
110  
sending 50, 101, 103, 108  
setting priority of 103, 105  
special characters and 102  
troubleshooting 244  
assigning to attachments  
95  
checking off 166  
telephone calls. See phone;  
phone calls  
deleting 168  
I NDE X  
297  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
text messaging service 7  
text messaging services 244 time bars 161  
viewing 163  
Trusted Pairs. See  
partnerships  
Text Telephone devices 73  
third-party applications  
caution for 212, 225  
compatibility with 22  
deleting 23, 250  
getting help with 184  
installing 225, 249  
reinstalling 225, 226, 229 tips 9  
searching in 179  
transferring to expansion  
cards 24  
troubleshooting 31, 228,  
250–251  
third-party utilities 23, 219  
third-party VPN client  
software 222  
three-way calling 55, 56, 57  
Thumbnail View 140, 141,  
144  
time formats 209  
TTY devices 73  
TTY icon 73  
time preferences 220  
time slots (calendar) 161  
Time Zone pick list 157  
time zones 158, 220, 238  
Timed Events check box 162  
timestamps 110  
TTY/TDD Mode icon 76  
TTY/TDD pick list 73  
turning on or off  
Caps Lock 37  
keyboard backlight 36  
Keyguard 43, 214  
microphone 138  
phone 43, 44  
screen 43, 221, 242  
smartphone 16  
speakerphone 52  
Typing starts contacts search  
option 66  
Tips command 9  
to do items. See tasks  
toolbars 120, 141  
touchscreen. See screen  
Touchscreen Preferences  
screen 210  
transmitting location 72  
Trash folder 96  
travel alarm 164  
Treo 700p smartphone. See  
smartphone  
trigonometric functions 181  
troubleshooting 9, 223  
U
unauthorized users 213  
Unfiled category 188, 190  
uninstalling  
applications 184  
Palm desktop software  
235  
third-party applications  
228  
Unknown Caller pick list 68  
TIF files 139  
time  
displaying video recording Trusted Device list 128, 130,  
137  
scheduling events and  
157, 160  
setting system 220  
synchronizing 220  
187  
trusted devices 128  
See also partnerships  
Trusted Devices button 127,  
129  
I N D E X  
298  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
unlocking  
the keyboard 214  
the phone 215, 216  
Treo smartphone 217  
unread messages 77, 111,  
156, 161  
User Guide 9  
usernames 90  
overview 88  
responding to messages  
from 95  
settingup accountsfor 89,  
90, 91  
sorting messages with 96  
switching accounts from  
97  
V
Verizon Wireless  
customer service for 9, 50  
smartphone requirements  
for 7  
untimed events 158, 159,  
162  
technical support for 9, 50  
troubleshooting Internet  
connections and 246  
voicemail services and 50  
voicemail system 50  
Verizon Wireless onscreen  
message 75  
Untimed Events check box  
162  
updating  
application software 225  
information 21, 27, 177  
system date and time 164  
upgrades 22–25, 59, 235  
troubleshooting 225–226  
uploading  
images 104  
music files 147  
videos 104  
uppercase letters 36  
urgent messages 111  
URLs 106, 122  
See also web links  
USB hub 26  
Version button 186  
version numbers 186  
Vibrate pick list 67, 69, 162  
vibrating alarm 67, 69, 162  
video albums 137, 139, 142,  
143  
video file types 103, 119,  
140  
video recording screen 137  
Video Settings screen 138  
videos  
adding to albums 143  
adjusting volume for 138  
attaching to email 93, 138  
attaching to multimedia  
messages 103  
VersaMail  
documentation for 88  
VersaMail application  
accessing email and 81,  
244  
adding attachments from  
93–94  
creating email messages  
from 92  
customizing 97–101  
displaying attachments  
with 95  
backing up 144  
copying 142  
deleting 138, 144  
displaying information  
about 143  
USB ports 26  
Use color for pick list 110  
user discussion groups 9  
user folders 226, 233, 256  
Exchange ActiveSync  
accounts and 101  
I NDE X  
299  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
downloading 119  
grouping 140  
contacts information 47  
current date and time 163 voice captions  
Vista 9, 22  
jumping to specific  
sections of 138  
pausing 138, 140  
playing 120, 138, 140  
recording 104, 136  
removing from albums  
143, 144  
due dates 167, 168  
email messages 94, 95  
error messages 251  
event categories 162  
events 67, 156, 161, 162 Voice Memo application 169,  
items in pick lists 35 173–175  
multimedia messages 106 Voice Memo button 174  
adding 136, 143  
background music and  
141  
playing 140  
saving 138  
on-device guide 9  
overdue tasks 156  
personal calendar 156  
photos 135, 138, 139,  
144  
Voice Memo list 174  
voice memos 105, 174  
voice privacy icon 72  
voice quality 240  
voicemail  
sending 135, 138, 141  
setting default size of 138  
setting preferences for  
138  
storing 133  
uploading 104  
viewing 138, 140, 144  
View By pick list 211  
viewing  
private entries 219  
Quick Tour 9  
signal strength 75  
slide shows 141  
checking 76  
retrieving messages 51,  
76  
sending calls to 50  
setting alert tones for 69  
setting up 50  
voicemail (Verizon) 50  
Voicemail Alert pick list 69  
Voicemail button 50  
Voicemail icon 51, 76  
voicemail page icon 111  
Voicemail screen 51  
volume  
tasks 161, 167, 168  
unread messages 77,  
156, 161  
video clips 138, 140, 144  
video recording time 137  
voicemail messages 76  
web addresses 122  
web pages 115, 117  
virtual private networks  
(VPNs) 124, 222  
alerts 179  
alternate characters 38  
application information  
185  
application menus 34  
applications 211  
attachments 95  
bookmarks 118  
connectionstatus 75, 244,  
245  
alarm tones 162  
alert tones 69  
Visibility pick list 130, 187  
I N D E X  
300  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
music 149  
phone 20, 69, 240  
ringer 69  
ringtones 67  
video clips 138  
voice memos 175  
Volume button 13, 20, 69  
volume conversions  
(calculator) 181  
Volume pick list 67, 69  
volume preferences 207  
VPN client software 222  
VZAccess Manager icon 126  
VZAccess Manager software  
124–126  
auto-completion options  
for 122  
beaming from 189  
bookmarking and 117,  
119  
customizing 121–123  
deleting cookies for 123  
dialing phone numbers  
from 48, 121  
from smartphone 44, 115  
memory consumption and  
250  
requirements for 7  
secure sites and 115, 116  
selecting default  
application for 213  
troubleshooting 245–248  
web browsing service 7  
web forms 116  
hiding toolbar in 120  
installing applications from Web icon 115  
182  
web links  
assigning to favorite  
buttons 60  
creating email from 115  
highlighting 33  
Palm online support 9  
selecting 116  
web pages  
accessing 115, 117, 246  
bookmarking 117–119  
caching 123, 250  
changing fonts for 116,  
208  
changing layouts for 116  
copying text from 121  
dialing from 47  
opening 39, 115  
overview 113, 115  
restrictions for 115  
selecting default views for  
118  
selecting home page for  
122  
streamed content and 120  
troubleshooting 246  
unsupported elements for  
247  
web browser application.  
See Blazer web browser;  
web browser  
web browser icons 116  
web browsing  
VZAccess Manager window  
126  
W
waking up screen 43  
wallpaper 45, 66, 143  
warranty 8  
weather reports 84  
web addresses 117, 122  
See also URLs; web links  
web browser  
accessing email providers  
and 81  
disabling images for 116,  
123  
See also web browser  
I NDE X  
301  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
displaying 115, 117  
finding text on 121  
loading 122, 247  
locating most recent 117  
opening from text  
messages 106  
opening History list for  
121  
refreshing 116, 246  
saving 118  
scrolling 116, 122  
selecting text on 121, 122  
sending email from 115  
setting initial view for 121  
setting preferences for  
121–123  
viewing offline 118  
web-based email 81  
websites  
See also web browsing  
accessing 115, 117, 123,  
248  
displaying addresses for  
122  
entering addresses for  
117  
opening Palm online  
support 9  
redirectors and 247  
transactions and 248  
Week View 156  
weekly events 156  
weight conversions 181  
Wide Page Mode 116  
Windows systems  
wireless band selection 74  
wireless connections 113,  
186  
wireless devices. See  
Bluetooth  
devices hands-free  
devices; smartphone  
wireless features 19, 126,  
250  
wireless modems 124, 253,  
254  
installing applications from Wireless Sync application  
183  
accessing email and 81,  
83, 85, 87  
documentation for 249  
opening 39  
overview 82  
synchronizing with 196,  
233  
troubleshooting 244  
Wireless Sync button 13, 39,  
83, 85, 87  
Wireless Sync server 83, 87  
wizards 182  
WMA formats 145  
Word documents 79, 94,  
171  
word searches 179  
words, selecting 33  
installing to expansion  
cards and 184  
listening to music and 145  
removing applications and  
185  
requirements for 22  
synchronization defaults  
for 27  
synchronizing with 191,  
195, 234, 235, 251  
transferring music from  
145, 148  
displaying recently visited  
117  
downloading files from  
119  
Windows Vista 9, 22  
wireless accounts. See  
accounts; Verizon  
Wireless  
I N D E X  
302  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
World Clock 163–164  
World Clock icon 164  
world map 163  
X
Z
XLS files 171  
ZIP files 182, 183  
zoom settings (camera) 136  
Y
Wrap Search check box 121  
Year View 156  
I NDE X  
303  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I N D E X  
304  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Miele Cooktop CS 1212 1 User Manual
MTD Blower 244 675 000 User Manual
NETGEAR Network Router WNDR3800 100NAS User Manual
Nokia Cell Phone 282 User Manual
NordicTrack Treadmill NTL10840 User Manual
Nuance comm Computer Accessories K609A G00 110 User Manual
NXP Semiconductors Switch PIP3107 D User Manual
Olympus Camcorder E 420 User Manual
Oneida Air Systems Dust Collector 5 75 HP Direct Drive Cyclonic Dust Collectors User Manual
Panasonic Microwave Oven LE Relays User Manual